740i
740Li
750i
750Li
760Li
750i xDrive
750Li xDrive
Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The
more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you
will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.
Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐
tains important information on vehicle operation that will help you
make full use of the technical features available in your BMW. The
manual also contains information designed to enhance operating
reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the
value of your BMW.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the printed or
integrated Owner's Manual are located in the appendix of the
printed quick reference for the vehicle.
Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐
chures in the onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable drive.
BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
© 2011 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English II/11, 03 11 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to
page 288.
Using this Owner's Manual
6 Notes
At a glance
12 Cockpit
19 iDrive
25 Voice activation system
27 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Controls
32 Opening and closing
48 Adjusting
61 Transporting children safely
65 Driving
75 Displays
84 Lamps
88 Safety
98 Driving stability control systems
105 Driving comfort
125 Climate control
132 Interior equipment
138 Storage compartments
Driving tips
144 Things to remember when driving
Navigation
152 Navigation
Entertainment
170 Tone
172 Radio
179 CD/multimedia
199 Rear entertainment
204 Professional rear entertainment
Communication
212 Telephone
223 Office
232 Contacts
234 BMW ConnectedDrive
Mobility
242 Refueling
243 Fuel
244 Wheels and tires
253 Engine compartment
255 Engine oil
258 Maintenance
260 Replacing components
266 Breakdown assistance
271 Care
Reference
276 Technical data
280 Short commands of the voice activation
system
288 Everything from A to Z
Seite 5
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic is by using the index.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in
the first chapter.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Any
updates made after the editorial deadline for
the Owner's Manuals are located in the appen‐
dix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle.
Additional sources of information
Should you have any questions, your service
center will be glad to advise you at any time.
Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is
available on the Internet: bmwusa.com.
Symbols
Indicates precautions that must be followed
precisely
in order to avoid the possibility of per‐
sonal injury and serious damage to the vehicle.
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of informa‐
tion.
* Indicates special equipment, country-specific
equipment and optional accessories, as well as
equipment and functions not yet available at the
time of printing.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to se‐
lect individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice ac‐
tivation system.
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
Refers to measures that can be taken to help
protect the environment.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the rele‐
vant section of this Owner's Manual for infor‐
mation on a particular part or assembly.
Your individual vehicle
You
have decided in favor of a vehicle with indi‐
vidualized equipment and features.
This Owner's Manual describes the entire array
of options and equipment available for a specific
model.
As a result, the manual may contain accessories
and equipment that you may not have specified
for your own vehicle.
All options and special equipment are marked
with an asterisk *.
For options and equipment not described in this
Owner's Manual, please refer to the Supple‐
mentary Owner's Manuals.
On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls are
arranged differently than shown in the illustra‐
tions.
Status of the Owner's Manual
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a pol‐
icy of constant development that is conceived
to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody
the highest quality and safety standards. In rare
cases, therefore, the features described in this
Owner's Manual may differ from those in your
vehicle.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Any updates made after the editorial deadline for
the Owner's Manuals are located in the appen‐
dix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle.
Seite 6
6
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Notes
For your own safety
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern
materials
and high-performance electronics, re‐
quires suitable maintenance and repair meth‐
ods.
Therefore, have this work performed only by a
BMW center or a workshop that works accord‐
ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri‐
ately trained personnel.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.
Parts and Accessories
For your own safety, use genuine parts and ac‐
cessories approved by BMW. When you pur‐
chase accessories tested and approved by
BMW and Genuine BMW Parts, you simultane‐
ously acquire the assurance that they have been
thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure optimum
performance when installed on your vehicle.
BMW warrants these parts to be free from de‐
fects in material and workmanship. BMW will not
accept any liability for damage resulting from in‐
stallation of parts and accessories not approved
by BMW. BMW cannot test every product made
by other manufacturers to verify if it can be used
on a BMW safely and without risk to either the
vehicle, its operation, or its occupants. Genuine
BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and other prod‐
ucts approved by BMW, together with profes‐
sional advice on using these items, are available
from all BMW centers. Installation and operation
of non-BMW approved accessories such as
alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors,
wheels, suspension components, brake dust
shields, telephones, including operation of any
mobile phone from within the vehicle without
using an externally mounted antenna, or trans‐
ceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkie-
talkies, ham radios or similar accessories, may
cause extensive damage to the vehicle, com‐
promise its safety, interfere with the vehicle's
electrical system or affect the validity of the
BMW Limited Warranty. See your BMW center
for additional information. Maintenance, re‐
placement,
or repair of the emission control de‐
vices and systems may be performed by any au‐
tomotive repair establishment or individual
using any certified automotive part.
California Proposition 65 Warning
California laws require us to state the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile
components and parts, including components
found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, con‐
tain or emit chemicals known to the State of Cal‐
ifornia to cause cancer and birth defects and re‐
productive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your
hands after handling. Used engine oil contains
chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory
animals. Always protect your skin by washing
thoroughly with soap and water.
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐
lowing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
▷ California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty.
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con‐
ditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to deliver
the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is op‐
erated under those conditions. If you wish to op‐
Seite 7
7
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
erate your vehicle in another country or region,
you may be required to adapt your vehicle to
meet different prevailing operating conditions
and homologation requirements. You should
also be aware of any applicable warranty limita‐
tions
or exclusions for such country or region. In
such case, please contact Customer Relations
for further information.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the Na‐
tional Highway Traffic Safety Administration
NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safe‐
rcar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about mo‐
tor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone
the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can
also obtain other information about motor vehi‐
cle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
Seite 8
8
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Notes
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
At a glance
These overviews of buttons, switches and
displays are intended to familiarize you with your
vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted
with the available control concepts and options.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Cockpit
All around the steering wheel
1 Seating comfort functions*
Gentleman function* 50
Seat, mirror, steering wheel mem‐
ory* 57
Active seat* 50
2 Roller sunblind* for rear window 45
3 Safety switch for the windows and the roller
sun blind* in the rear 45
4 Power windows 44
5 Exterior mirror operation 58
6 Driver assistance systems*
Active Blind Spot Detec‐
tion* 95
Collision warning* 110
Lane departure warning* 94
Night Vision with pedestrian de‐
tection* 120
Head-up Display* 123
7 Lamps
Front fog lamps* 87
Parking lamps 84
Low beams 84
Seite 12
12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Cockpit
Automatic headlamp con‐
trol* 85
Daytime running lights* 85
Adaptive light control
* 85
High-beam Assistant* 86
Instrument lighting 87
8 Steering column stalk, left
Turn signal 70
High beams, head‐
lamp flasher 70
High-beam Assistant* 86
Roadside parking lamps 85
Computer 77
9 Steering wheel buttons, left
Store speed 112, 106
Resume speed 113, 107
Cruise control on/off, inter‐
rupt 112, 105
Increase distance* 107
Decrease distance* 107
10 Instrument cluster 14
11 Steering wheel buttons, right
Entertainment source
Volume
Voice activation* 25
Telephone* 212
12 Steering column stalk, right
Windshield wipers 70
Rain sensor* 71
Clean the windshields and head‐
lamps* 70
13 Start/stop the engine and switch
the ignition on/off 65
14 Horn
15 Steering wheel heating* 60
16 Adjust steering wheel 60
17 Open trunk lid* 40
18 Unlocking the hood
Seite 13
13
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Instrument cluster
1 Fuel gauge 75
2 Speedometer
3 Indicator/warning lamps 14
4 Tachometer 76
5 Engine oil temperature 76
6 External temperature 76
7 Electronic displays 16
8 Miles, trip miles 77
9 Clock 80
10 Reset miles 77
Indicator/warning lamps
Instrument cluster
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in
a variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lamps are checked for proper
functioning
when the engine is started or the ig‐
nition is switched on, and light up briefly in the
process.
Overview: indicator/warning lamps
Symbol Function or system
Turn signal
Parking brake
Parking brake in Canadian models
Automatic Hold*
Front fog lamps*
Seite 14
14
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Cockpit
Symbol Function or system
High beams
High-beam Assistant*
Parking lamps, headlamp control
Active Cruise Control*
Vehicle detection, Active Cruise
Control*
Cruise control*
Lane departure warning*
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
DSC Dynamic Stability Control or
DTC Dynamic Traction Control
Tire Pressure Monitor*
Safety belts
Airbag system
Symbol Function or system
Steering system
Emissions
Brake system
Brake system in Canadian models
Antilock Brake System ABS
Antilock Brake System ABS in Cana‐
dian models
Text messages
Text
messages in combination with a symbol in
the instrument cluster explain a Check Control
message and the meaning of the indicator and
warning lamps.
Supplementary text messages
Additional information on the Control Display,
e.g., on the cause of a malfunction or the re‐
quired action, can be called up via Check Con‐
trol, refer to page 82.
The text of urgent messages is displayed auto‐
matically.
Seite 15
15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
All around the center console
1 Headliner 18
2 Control Display 19
3 Glove compartment, top/bottom 138
4 Air vent 128
5 Hazard warning system 266
Central locking system 39
6 Radio 172
CD/Multimedia 179
7 Automatic climate control 125
8 Controller with buttons 19
9 Parking brake 66
Auto Hold 68
10 PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol* 113
Top View* 119
Backup camera* 116
Side View* 118
HDC Hill Descent Control* 99
11 Dynamic Driving Control 102
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 102
12 Transmission selector lever
Seite 17
17
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
iDrive
The concept
The
iDrive combines the functions of a multitude
of switches. Thus, these functions can be oper‐
ated from a central location.
Using the iDrive during a trip
To avoid becoming distracted and posing
an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occu‐
pants and to other road users, never attempt to
use the controls or enter information unless traf‐
fic and road conditions allow this.◀
Controls at a glance
Controls
1 Control Display
2 Controller with buttons
The
buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to select
menu items and create the settings.
Control Display
Notes
▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the care
instructions.
▷ Do not place objects close to the Control
Display; otherwise, the Control Display can
be damaged.
Switching off
1.
Press the button.
2. "Switch off control display"
Switching on
Press the controller again to switch the screen
back on.
Controller
Select menu items and create settings.
1. Turn.
2. Press.
Seite 19
19
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
3. Move in four directions.
Buttons on controller
Press the button Function
MENU Open the main menu.
RADIO Opens the Radio menu.
CD Opens the CD/Multimedia
menu.
NAV Opens the Navigation map
view.
TEL Opens the Telephone
menu.
BACK Displays the previous
panel.
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
Operating concept
Opening the main menu
Press the button.
The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the main
menu.
Selecting menu items
Menu items shown in white can be selected.
1. Turn the controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
2. Press the controller.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
"Settings".
Changing between panels
After a menu item is selected, e.g.,
"Radio", a
new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.
▷ Move the controller to the left.
The
current panel is closed and the previous
panel is displayed.
The previous panel is opened again by
pressing the BACK button. In this case, the
current panel is not closed.
▷ Move the controller to the right.
A new panel is opened on top of the previous
display.
Seite 20
20
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
iDrive
White arrows pointing to the left or right indicate
that additional panels can be opened.
View of an opened menu
When
a menu is opened, it generally opens with
the panel that was last selected in that menu. To
display the first panel of a menu:
▷ Move the controller to the left repeatedly
until the first panel is displayed.
▷ Press the menu button on the controller
twice.
Opening the Options menu
Press the button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
Additional options: move the controller to the
right
repeatedly until the "Options" menu is dis‐
played.
Options menu
The "Options" menu consists of various areas:
▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen".
This area remains unchanged.
▷ Control options for the selected main menu,
e.g., for "Radio".
▷ If applicable, further operating options for
the selected menu, e.g., "Store station".
Changing settings
1. Select a field.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed.
3. Press the controller.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐
vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item
activates or deactivates the function.
The function is activated.
The function is deactivated.
Example: setting the clock
Setting the clock
1. Press the button. The main menu is
displayed.
2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
3. If necessary, move the controller to the left
to display "Time/Date"
.
Seite 21
21
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date"
is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
6. Turn the controller to set the hours and
press the controller.
7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller.
Status information
Status field
The
following information is displayed in the sta‐
tus field at the top right:
▷ Time.
▷ Current entertainment source.
▷ Sound output, on/off.
▷ Wireless network reception strength.
▷ Telephone status.
▷ Traffic bulletin reception*.
Status field symbols
The symbols are grouped as follows.
Radio symbols
Symbol Meaning
Traffic bulletins* are switched on.
HD Radio™* is switched on.
Satellite radio* is switched on.
Telephone symbols
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call*.
Missed call*.
Wireless network reception
strength*
Symbol flashes: searching
for network.
Wireless network is not available*.
Bluetooth* is switched on.
Roaming* is active.
Text message* was received.
Check the SIM card*.
SIM card* is blocked.
SIM card* is missing.
Enter the PIN*.
Entertainment symbols
Symbol Meaning
CD/DVD* player.
Music collection*.
Gracenote® database*.
AUX-IN port.
Rear AUX-IN port on the left*.
Rear AUX-IN port on the right*.
Seite 22
22
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
iDrive
Symbol Meaning
USB audio interface*.
Mobile phone audio interface*.
Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning
Spoken instructions* are switched
off.
Request of the current vehicle posi‐
tion*.
Split screen*
General information
Additional information can be displayed on the
right side of the split screen, e.g., information
from the computer.
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even
when you change to another menu.
Switching the split screen on and off
1. Press the button.
2. "Split screen"
Selecting the display
1. Press the button.
2. "Split screen"
3. Move the controller until the split screen is
selected.
4. Press the controller or select "Split screen
content".
5. Select the desired menu item.
Programmable memory
buttons
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐
tions, phone numbers and entry points into the
menu.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Saving a function
1. Highlight the function via the iDrive.
2.
Press the desired button for more
than 2 seconds.
Running a function
Press the button.
The function will run immediately. This
means, for example, that the number is dialed
when a phone number is selected.
Displaying the button assignment
Use a finger to touch the buttons. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.
The
key assignment is displayed at the top edge
of the screen.
Seite 23
23
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
▷ To display short information: touch the but‐
ton.
▷ To display detailed information: touch the
button for an extended period.
Deleting the button assignments
1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for
approx. five seconds.
2. "OK"
Entering letters and numbers
1. Turn the controller: select letters or num‐
bers.
2. Select additional letters or numbers if
needed.
3. "OK": confirm the entry.
Symbol Function
Press the controller: delete the letter
or number.
Press the controller for an extended
period: delete all letters or numbers.
Enter a blank space.
Switching between letters and
numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering letters and numbers:
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
Switching between upper and lower
case letters
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case letters:
Symbol Function
Move the controller up: switch
from upper to lower case letters.
Move the controller up: switch
from lower to upper case letters.
Entry comparison
Entry of names and addresses: the selection is
narrowed
down every time a letter is entered and
letters may be added automatically.
The entries are continuously compared to the
data stored in the vehicle.
▷ Only those letters are offered during the en‐
try for which data is available.
▷ Destination search: town/city names can be
entered
using the spelling of language avail‐
able on the Control Display.
Seite 24
24
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
iDrive
Voice activation system*
The concept
▷ The voice activation system can be used to
operate
functions by means of spoken com‐
mands.
▷ Most menu items on the Control Display can
be voiced as commands. The system
prompts you to make your entries.
▷ Functions that can only be used when the
vehicle is stationary cannot be operated us‐
ing the voice activation system.
▷ The system uses a special microphone on
the driver's side.
▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's
Manual to use with the voice activation sys‐
tem.
Requirements
Via the Control Display, set a language that is
also supported by the voice activation system
so
that the spoken commands can be identified.
Set the language, refer to page 81.
Using voice activation
Activating the voice activation system
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
The
command is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐
cates that the voice activation system is active.
If no other commands are available, continue
operating the function via iDrive.
Terminating the voice activation
system
Briefly press the button on the steering wheel
or ›Cancel‹.
Possible commands
Having possible commands read aloud
The commands available in each case depend
on the menu item selected on the Control Dis‐
play.
To have the available commands read out
loud: ›Voice commands‹
For
example, if the "Settings" menu is displayed,
the commands for the settings are read out loud.
Help dialog for the voice activation
system
Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹
Additional commands for the help dialog:
▷ ›Help with examples‹: information about the
current operating options and the most im‐
portant
commands for them are announced.
▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: information
about the principle of operation for the voice
activation system is announced.
Executing functions using short
commands
Functions on the main menu can be performed
directly
by means of short commands, irrespec‐
tive of which menu item is currently selected,
e.g., ›Vehicle status‹.
List of short commands of the voice activation
system, refer to page 280.
Seite 25
25
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Example: playing back a CD
1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output
if necessary.
2.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
3. ›C D and multimedia‹
The medium last played is played back.
4. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
5. ›C D track ...‹ e.g., CD track 4.
Setting the voice dialog
You
can set whether the system should use the
standard dialog or a shorter version.
In the shorter variant of the voice dialog, the an‐
nouncements from the system are issued in an
abbreviated form.
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech mode:"
4. Select the setting.
Adjusting the volume
Turn
the volume button while giving an instruc‐
tion until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Notes on Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to initiate
an Emergency Request. In stressful situations,
the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can
unnecessarily delay the establishment of a tel‐
ephone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button*, refer to
page 266, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
▷ When selecting a radio station, use the com‐
mon pronunciation of the station name.
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐
roof* closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Seite 26
26
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Voice activation system
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
The integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
played on the Control Display. The equipment
and functions that are in the vehicle are descri‐
bed therein.
Components of the
integrated Owner's Manual
The integrated Owner's Manual consists of
three parts, which offer various levels of infor‐
mation or access possibilities.
Quick Reference Guide
Located
in the Quick Reference is important in‐
formation for the operation of the vehicle, the
operation of basic vehicle functions or for what
to do in the event of a flat tire. This information
can also be displayed during driving.
Search by pictures
Information and descriptions based on illustra‐
tions can be searched via search by pictures.
This is helpful, for example, if the description of
an outfitting package that cannot be named is
needed.
Owner's Manual
Information and descriptions can be searched
by direct entry of a search term via the index.
Select components
1.
Press the button.
2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle Info".
3. Press the controller.
4. Selecting desired range:
▷ "Quick reference"
▷ "Search by pictures"
▷ "Owner's Manual"
Leafing through the Owner's
Manual
Page by page with link access
Turn the controller until the next or previous
page is displayed.
Page by page without link access
Leaf through the pages directly while skipping
the links.
Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press
the controller to leaf from page to page.
Leaf back.
Leaf forward.
Context help - Owner's
Manual to the temporarily
selected function
The
relevant information can be opened directly.
Opening during operation via iDrive
To move directly from the application on the
Control Display to the options menu:
Seite 27
27
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
1. Press the button or move the controller
to the right repeatedly until the
"Options"
menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
Opening when a Check Control
message is displayed
Directly
from the Check Control message on the
Control Display:
"Display Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the
Owner's Manual
To change from a function, e.g., radio, to the
Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to
switch between the two displays:
1.
Press the button or move the controller
to the right repeatedly until the
"Options"
menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4.
Press
the button again to return to the
function displayed last.
5.
Press the button to return to the page
of the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To switch back and forth repeatedly between
the function displayed last and the page of the
Owner's Manual displayed last, repeat steps 4
and 5. This opens a new panel every time.
Programmable memory
buttons
General information
The Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly.
Storing
1. Select "Owner's Manual" via the iDrive.
2. Press the desired button for more
than 2 seconds.
Executing
Press the button.
The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐
mediately.
Seite 28
28
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information that will give you complete control of
your vehicle. All features and accessories that are
useful for driving and your safety, comfort and
convenience are described here.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Opening and closing
Remote control/key
Buttons on the remote control
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Opening the trunk lid
4 Panic mode*, headlamp courtesy delay fea‐
ture
General information
The
vehicle is supplied with two remote controls
with keys.
Every remote control contains a replaceable
battery.
The settings called up and implemented when
the vehicle is unlocked depend on which remote
control is used to unlock the vehicle, Personal
Profile, refer to page 33.
In addition, information about service require‐
ments is stored in the remote control, Service
data in the remote control, refer to page 258.
Integrated key
Press the button on the back of the remote con‐
trol, arrow 1, and pull out the key, arrow 2.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
▷ Driver's door.
▷ Trunk lid.
▷ Storage compartment in the front center
armrest.
The storage compartment contains a switch for
separately securing the trunk lid, refer to
page 41.
Replacing the battery
1. Take the integrated key out of the remote
control.
2. Push in the catch with the key, arrow 1.
3. Remove the cover of the battery compart‐
ment; see arrow 2.
4. Insert a battery of the same type with the
positive side facing upwards.
5. Press the cover closed.
Seite 32
32
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Opening and closing
Take the used battery to a recycling cen‐
ter or to your service center.
New remote controls
You can obtain new remote controls from your
service center.
Loss of the remote controls
Lost remote controls can be blocked by your
service center.
Emergency
detection of remote control
It is possible to switch on the ignition or start the
engine in situations such as the following:
▷ Interference of radio transmission to remote
control by external sources.
▷ Discharged battery in the remote control.
A Check Control message is displayed if an at‐
tempt is made to switch on the ignition or start
the engine.
Starting the engine in case of
emergency detection of remote control
If a corresponding Check Control message ap‐
pears, hold the remote control, as shown,
against
the marked area on the steering column
and press the Start/Stop button within 10 sec‐
onds while pressing the brake.
Personal Profile
The concept
Personal Profile concept
You can set several of your vehicle's functions
to suit your personal needs and preferences.
▷ The settings are automatically saved in the
profile currently activated.
▷ When the vehicle is unlocked, the profile that
was last detected and called up with the re‐
mote control is used.
▷ Your personal settings will be recognized
and called up again even if the vehicle has
been
used in the meantime by someone else
with another remote control.
The individual settings are stored for three Per‐
sonal Profiles and one guest profile.
Transmitting the settings
Your personal settings can be taken with you to
another vehicle equipped with the Personal Pro‐
file function. For more information, contact your
service center.
Transmission takes place via:
▷ The USB interface*, refer to page 138, in
the glove compartment onto a USB device.
Profile management
Opening the profiles
A
different profile can be called up than the one
associated with the remote control currently in
use.
1. "Settings"
Seite 33
33
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
2. "Profiles"
3. Select a profile.
The profile that is opened is assigned to the re‐
mote control currently in use.
Renaming profiles
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
The current profile is selected.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Rename current profile"
Resetting profiles
The settings of the active profile are reset to
their default values.
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
The current profile is selected.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Reset current profile"
Importing profiles
Existing settings and contacts are overwritten
with the imported profile.
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Import profile"
4. USB interface, refer to page 138: "USB
device"
Exporting profiles
Most
settings of the active profile and the saved
contacts can be exported.
This can be useful for storing and opening per‐
sonal settings, for instance if settings are acci‐
dentally changed or deleted.
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Export profile"
4. USB interface, refer to page 138: "USB
device"
Using the guest profile
The guest profile can be used to make individual
settings without affecting the three Personal
Profiles.
This can be useful for drivers who are using the
vehicle temporarily and do not have their own
profile.
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. The current profile is selected.
4. Open "Guest".
5. Create the settings.
Note: the guest profile cannot be renamed.
Seite 34
34
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Opening and closing
Display profile list during start
The profile list can be displayed during each
start for selecting the desired profile.
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display user list at startup"
Personal Profile settings
The following functions and settings can be
stored in a profile.
More information on the settings can be found
under:
▷ Active Cruise Control: collision warning, re‐
fer to page 110.
▷ Exterior mirror position, refer to page 58.
▷ CD/Multimedia, refer to page 179: audio
source listened to last.
▷ Dynamic Driving Control: sport program, re‐
fer to page 103.
▷ Driver's seat position, refer to page 37: au‐
tomatic retrieval after unlocking.
▷ Programmable memory buttons, refer to
page 23: assignment.
▷ Head-up Display, refer to page 123: selec‐
tion, brightness and position of the display.
▷ Headlamp courtesy delay feature, refer to
page 84: time setting.
▷ Tone, refer to page 170: tone settings.
▷ Automatic climate control, refer to
page 125: settings.
▷ Steering wheel position, refer to page 60.
▷ Navigation, refer to page 152: map views,
route criteria, voice output on/off.
▷ Night Vision with pedestrian detection, refer
to
page 120: selection of functions and type
of display.
▷ Daytime running lights*, refer to page 85:
current setting.
▷ Park Distance Control PDC, refer to
page 171: adjusting the signal tone volume.
▷ Radio, refer to page 172: stored stations,
station listened to last, special settings.
▷ Backup camera, refer to page 116: selec‐
tion of functions and type of display.
▷ Side View, refer to page 118: selection of
the display type.
▷ Language on the Control Display, refer to
page 81.
▷ Lane departure warning, refer to page 94:
last setting, on/off.
▷ Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to
page 95: last setting, on/off.
▷ Triple turn signal activation, refer to
page 70.
▷ Locking the vehicle, refer to page 39: after
a brief period or after starting to drive.
Central locking system
The concept
The central locking system becomes active
when the driver's door is closed.
The system simultaneously engages and re‐
leases the locks on the following:
▷ Doors.
▷ Trunk lid.
▷ Fuel filler flap.
Operating from the outside
▷ Via the remote control.
▷ Via the driver's door lock*.
▷ Via the door handles*.
▷ Via the button in the trunk lid*.
The following takes place simultaneously when
locking/unlocking the vehicle via the remote
control:
▷ Anti-theft protection is switched on/off.
Doors cannot be unlocked using the lock
buttons or the door opener.
▷ The welcome lamps, interior lamps and
courtesy lamps* are switched on and off.
Seite 35
35
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
▷ The alarm system*, refer to page 43, is
armed or disarmed.
Operating from the inside
Via the button for the central locking system.
If the vehicle has been locked from inside, the
fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the
central locking system unlocks automatically.
The hazard warning system and interior lamps
come on.
Opening
and closing: from the
outside
Using the remote control
General information
Take the remote control with you
People or animals left unattended in a
parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐
side. Always take the remote control with you
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can
then be opened from the outside.◀
Unlocking
Press the button.
The vehicle is unlocked.
You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Unlock button:"
4. Select the desired function:
▷ "Driver's door only"
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐
locks the entire vehicle.
▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Convenient opening
The remote control can be used to simultane‐
ously
open the windows and the glass sunroof*.
Press and hold the button on the re‐
mote control.
The windows and the glass sunroof* open.
Releasing the button stops the motion.
Locking
Press the button on the remote control.
Do not lock from the outside
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be
unlocked from inside without special knowl‐
edge.◀
Switching on the interior lamps,
courtesy lamps*, and welcome lamps
Press the button on the remote control
with the vehicle locked.
Panic mode*
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Seite 36
36
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Opening and closing
Press the button on the remote control
for at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Switching on the headlamp courtesy
delay feature
Briefly press the button on the remote
control.
The duration can be set in the Control Display.
Opening the trunk lid
Press
the button on the remote control
for approx. 1 second and release.
The trunk lid opens, regardless of whether it was
previously locked or unlocked.
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and up.
Ensure that adequate clearance is available be‐
fore opening.
In some vehicle equipment variants, the trunk lid
can only be opened using the remote control if
the vehicle was unlocked first.
To avoid locking yourself out of the vehicle, do
not place the remote control into the cargo area.
The trunk lid is locked again as soon as it is
pushed closed.
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. Deactivate or activate the desired confirma‐
tion signals.
▷ "Acoustic sig. lock/unlock"
▷ "Flash when lock/unlock"
Retrieving the seat, mirror, and
steering wheel settings
The driver's seat, exterior mirror, and steering
wheel positions selected last are stored for the
currently used remote control.
When the vehicle is unlocked, these positions
are automatically retrieved if this function was
activated.
Pinch hazard when moving back the seat
If
this function is used, first make sure that
the footwell behind the driver's seat is empty.
Otherwise, people can be injured or objects
damaged when the seat is moved back.◀
The adjustment procedure is interrupted:
▷ When a seat position switch is pressed.
▷ When a button of the seat, mirror, and steer‐
ing wheel memory is pressed briefly.
Activating the setting
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Last seat position auto."
Malfunction
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or un‐
locked
with the remote control, the battery may
be discharged or there may be interference from
external sources such as mobile phones, metal
objects, overhead power lines, transmission
towers, etc.
If this occurs, unlock or lock the vehicle at the
door lock using the key.
Seite 37
37
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission
regulations. Operation is governed
by the following:
FCC ID:
▷ LX8766S.
▷ LX8766E.
▷ LX8CAS.
▷ LX8CAS2.
▷ MYTCAS4.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful interfer‐
ence, and
▷ this device must accept any interference re‐
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Using the door lock
General information
Do not lock from the outside
Do
not lock the vehicle from the outside if
there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be
unlocked from inside without special knowl‐
edge.◀
Remove the key before pulling the door
handle
Before pulling the outside door handle, remove
the
key to avoid damaging the paintwork and the
key.◀
In some country-specific versions, the alarm
system* is triggered if the vehicle is unlocked via
the door lock.
Manual operation
If an electrical malfunction occurs, lock or unlock
the vehicle using a key via the door lock on the
driver's door.
Locking the doors and trunk lid at
once*
In some vehicle equipment versions, only the
driver's door can be locked via the door lock.
To lock all doors and the trunk lid at once:
1. With the doors closed, lock the vehicle using
the button for the central locking system in
the interior.
2. Unlock and open the driver's or front pas‐
senger door.
3. Lock the vehicle.
▷ Lock the driver's door using the
integrated key in the door lock, or
▷ Press down the lock button of the front
passenger door and close the door from
the outside.
The fuel filler flap can only be locked using the
remote control.
Seite 38
38
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Opening and closing
Opening and closing: from the
inside
Unlocking and opening*
▷ Either unlock the doors together using the
button for the central locking system and
then
pull the door handle above the armrest
or
▷ Pull the door opener twice individually on
each door: the first time unlocks the door,
the second time opens it.
Locking and unlocking
Press the button in the vehicle.
The doors and the trunk lid are locked
or
unlocked when the front doors are closed, but
they are not secured against theft.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Automatic locking
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. Select the desired function:
▷ "Lock if no door is opened"
The vehicle locks automatically after a
short period of time if a door is not
opened.
▷ "Lock after start. to drive"
The vehicle locks automatically after
you drive away.
Doors
Automatic Soft Closing*
To close the doors, push lightly.
It is closed automatically.
Danger of pinching
Make sure that the closing path of the
doors is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Trunk lid
Opening
During
opening, the trunk lid pivots back and up.
Ensure that adequate clearance is available be‐
fore opening.
Opening from the outside
▷ Press the button on the trunk lid.
▷ Press the button on the remote
control
for approx. 1 second and re‐
lease.
Seite 39
39
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Opening from the inside
Push
the button in the driver's footwell.
If the vehicle is stationary, the trunk lid opens if
it is not locked.
Manual release
All of the vehicle's keys fit the trunk lid lock, lo‐
cated in the license plate recess.
Turn the key all the way to the left. The trunk lid
unlocks.
To avoid locking yourself out of the vehicle, do
not
place the key or remote control in the cargo
area.
The trunk lid is locked again as soon as it is
pushed closed.
If the trunk lid is opened via the lock with the
alarm system armed, the alarm is triggered.
Therefore, unlock the vehicle first.
If the alarm has been triggered accidentally:
switch off the alarm, refer to page 43.
Closing
Recessed grips in the interior trim of the trunk
lid make it easier to pull down the lid.
Danger of pinching
Make sure that the closing path of the
trunk
lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Do not place the remote control in the
cargo area
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the remote
control may be locked inside the vehicle when
the trunk lid is closed.◀
Automatic Soft Closing
To close it completely, push the trunk lid down
lightly.
It is closed automatically.
Locking the vehicle*
Press the button on the inside of the trunk lid.
The vehicle is locked completely.
Automatic trunk lid operation*
Opening
The trunk lid opens fully.
▷ Press the button on the exterior of the trunk
lid.
Seite 40
40
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Opening and closing
▷ Press the button on the remote
control or in the driver's footwell.
Pressing the button again stops the motion.
The opening process is interrupted as well:
▷ When starting the engine.
▷ When the vehicle starts moving.
▷ By pressing the button in the driver's foot‐
well.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
trunk lid.
Closing
▷ Press the button on the inside of the trunk
lid.
The trunk lid closes automatically.
Pressing again stops the motion.
With Comfort Access:
▷ Press the button, arrow 1, on the inside of
the trunk lid.
The trunk lid closes automatically.
Pressing again stops the motion.
▷ Press the button, arrow 2.
The trunk lid closes automatically and the
vehicle is locked.
▷ Press the button on the exterior of the trunk
lid.
Pressing again stops the motion.
The closing operation is interrupted:
▷ When starting the engine.
▷ The vehicle starts off with jerks.
Danger of pinching
Make sure that the closing path of the
trunk
lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Do not place the remote control in the
cargo area
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the remote
control may be locked inside the vehicle when
the trunk lid is closed.◀
Manual operation
If an electrical malfunction occurs:
1. Manually unlock the trunk lid, refer to
page 40.
2. Open or close the trunk lid slowly and
smoothly.
Locking separately
The
trunk lid can be locked separately using the
switch in the front center armrest.
▷ Trunk lid secured, arrow 1.
▷ Trunk lid not secured, ar‐
row 2.
Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position. This
secures
the trunk lid and disconnects it from the
central locking system.
Seite 41
41
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
When the center armrest is locked, the tailgate
cannot
be accessed. This is beneficial when the
vehicle is parked using valet service. The infra‐
red remote control can be handed out without
the key.
Emergency unlocking*
Pull the handle inside the cargo area.
The trunk lid unlocks.
Comfort Access*
The concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activating
the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote control
with you, e.g., in your jacket pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is nearby or in the passenger
compartment.
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.
▷ Convenient closing.
▷ Unlocking of the trunk lid separately.
▷ Starting the engine.
Functional requirements
▷ There are no external sources of interfer‐
ence nearby.
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control must
be located outside of the vehicle.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
▷ The engine can only be started if the remote
control is inside the vehicle.
Comparison with ordinary remote
control
The
functions can be controlled by pressing the
buttons or via Comfort Access.
Unlocking
Fully grasp a door handle, arrow 1. This corre‐
sponds to pressing the button.
Locking
Press the area on the door handle, arrow 2, with
your finger for approx. 1 second.
This corresponds to pressing the button.
To save battery power, ensure that the ignition
and all electronic systems and/or power con‐
sumers are switched off before locking the ve‐
hicle.
Convenient closing
Press the area, arrow 2, with your finger and
hold.
In
addition to locking, the windows and the glass
sunroof* are closed.
Seite 42
42
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Opening and closing
Monitor the closing process
Monitor
the closing process to ensure that
no one becomes trapped.◀
Unlocking the trunk lid separately
Press the button on the exterior of the trunk lid,
refer to page 39.
This corresponds to pressing the
button.
Do not place the remote control in the
cargo area
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave
it in the cargo area; otherwise, the remote
control may be locked inside the vehicle when
the trunk lid is closed.◀
Malfunction
Comfort Access may not function properly if it
experiences interference from external sources
such as mobile phones, metal objects, overhead
power lines, transmission towers, etc.
If this occurs, open or close the vehicle using the
buttons on the remote control or use a key in the
door lock.
To subsequently start the engine, hold the re‐
mote control against the marked area on the
steering column, refer to page 33.
Alarm system*
The concept
The vehicle alarm system responds to:
▷ Opening of a door, the hood or the trunk lid.
▷ Movements in the vehicle: interior motion
sensor, refer to page 44.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at‐
tempts to steal a wheel or when towing the
car.
▷ Interruptions in battery voltage.
The alarm system briefly indicates tampering:
▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm.
▷ By switching on the hazard warning system.
▷ By flashing the high beams.
Arming and disarming the alarm
system
General information
When
you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with
the remote control or at the door lock*, the alarm
system is armed or disarmed at the same time.
Door lock and armed alarm system
Unlocking via the door lock will trigger the alarm
on some country-specific versions.
Trunk lid and armed alarm system
The trunk lid can be opened using the remote
control, even if the alarm system is armed.
Press the button on the remote control
for approx. 1 second and release.
After the trunk lid is closed, it is locked and
monitored again by the alarm system. The haz‐
ard warning system flashes once.
In some vehicle equipment variants, the trunk lid
can only be opened using the remote control if
the vehicle was unlocked first.
Panic mode*
Press the button on the remote control
for at least 3 seconds.
Switching off the alarm
▷ Unlock the vehicle using the remote control.
▷ With Comfort Access: If you are carrying the
remote control with you, pull on the door
handle.
Seite 43
43
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Indicator lamp on the interior rearview
mirror
▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
The system is armed.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after locking:
The doors, hood or trunk lid is not closed
properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se‐
cured.
After
10 seconds, the indicator lamp flashes
continuously. The interior motion sensor is
not active.
▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the engine is started, but no longer than
approx. 5 minutes:
An alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such
as attempts to steal a wheel or tow the car.
Interior motion sensor
The
windows and glass sunroof* must be closed
for the system to function properly.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
can be switched off together, such as in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In automatic car washes
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on car-carrying trains, at
sea or on a trailer.
▷ When animals are to remain in the vehicle.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the button on the remote control
twice in succession.
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then flashes continuously.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
are switched off until the vehicle is locked again.
Power windows
General information
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
cannot operate the power windows and injure
themselves.◀
Opening
▷
Press the switch to the resistance
point.
The window opens while the switch is held.
▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
The window opens automatically.
Pressing again stops the motion.
Seite 44
44
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Opening and closing
Closing
Danger of pinching
Monitor the closing process and make
sure
that the closing path of the window is clear;
otherwise, injuries may result.◀
▷
Pull
the switch to the resistance point.
The window closes while the switch is held.
▷
Pull the switch beyond the resistance
point.
The window closes automatically.
Pressing the switch stops the motion.
Convenient operation, refer to page 36, via the
remote control.
Convenient
closing, refer to page 42, with Com‐
fort Access*.
Pinch protection
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a
window closes, the closing action is interrupted.
The window reopens slightly.
Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐
tection
Even with the pinch protection system, check
that the window's closing path is clear; other‐
wise, the closing action may not stop in certain
situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀
Window accessories
Do not install any accessories in the range
of movement of the windows; otherwise, the
pinch protection system will be impaired.◀
Closing without the pinch protection
system
Danger of pinching
Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the window is clear;
otherwise, injuries may result.◀
For example, if there is an external danger or if
ice on the windows prevents a window from
closing normally, proceed as follows:
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and
hold it there.
Pinch protection is limited and the window
reopens
slightly if the closing force exceeds
a certain value.
2. Pull the switch past the resistance point
again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
there.
The window closes without pinch protec‐
tion.
Safety switch
The following functions can be locked simulta‐
neously, using the switch:
▷ Opening and closing of the rear windows
using the switches in the rear.
▷ Operation of the roller sunblinds* using the
switches in the rear.
▷ Adjustment of the power rear seats*.
▷ Adjustment of the power head restraints* in
the rear.
Switching on and off
Press the button.
The
LED lights up if the safety function
is switched on.
Safety switch for rear operation
Press the safety switch when transporting
children in the rear; otherwise, injury may result
if the windows are closed without supervision.◀
Roller sunblinds*
General information
The safety switch in the driver's door can be
used to prevent children, for example, from op‐
erating the roller blinds using the switches in the
rear.
Press the safety switch in the driver's door. The
LED lights up if the safety function is switched
on.
Seite 45
45
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
If you are no longer able to move the roller blinds
after having activated them consecutively a
number of times, the system is blocked for a
limited
time to prevent overheating. Let the sys‐
tem cool.
The roller sunblinds cannot be moved at low in‐
terior temperatures.
Driver's door controls
Roller blind for rear window
Press the button.
Extending
or retracting the roller blinds
together
Press and hold the button.
Rear door controls
Roller blind for the side windows
Press the button.
The roller blind can only be extended or re‐
tracted when the side window is closed.
Roller blind for rear window
Press the button.
Raising and lowering the roller blinds
together
Press and hold the button.
Glass sunroof, powered*
General information
The glass sunroof and the sliding visor can be
operated
together or separately, using the same
switch.
The glass sunroof is operational when the igni‐
tion is switched on.
Danger of pinching
Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is
clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
cannot operate the roof and injure themselves.◀
Tilting the glass sunroof
Push switch upward briefly.
▷ The closed roof is tilted and
the sliding visor opens
slightly.
▷ The opened roof closes until
it is in its tilted position. The
Seite 46
46
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Opening and closing
sliding visor stays completely
open.
Pressing the switch again
closes the sliding visor al‐
most completely.
Opening/closing the sliding visor
▷ Press the switch in the de‐
sired direction to the resist‐
ance point and hold it there.
The
sliding visor moves while
the switch is being held.
▷ Press the switch in the desired direction
past the resistance point.
The sliding visor moves automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof
When the sliding visor is open, proceed as de‐
scribed under Sliding visor.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
sliding visor together
Briefly press the switch twice in
succession in the desired direc‐
tion past the resistance point.
The glass sunroof and sliding vi‐
sor move together. Pressing the
switch again stops the motion.
Convenient operation, refer to page 36, via the
remote control.
Convenient
closing, refer to page 42, with Com‐
fort Access*.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force when closing the glass sun‐
roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐
ment is stopped, beginning at approximately the
middle of the opening in the roof, or from the
tilted position during closing.
The glass sunroof opens again slightly.
Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐
tection
Despite
the pinch protection system, check that
the roof's closing path is clear; otherwise, the
closing action may not be interrupted in certain
extreme situations, such as when thin objects
are present.◀
Closing without the pinch protection
system
For example, if there is an external danger, pro‐
ceed as follows:
1. Press the switch forward beyond the resist‐
ance point and hold.
Pinch protection is limited and the roof re‐
opens slightly if the closing force exceeds a
certain value.
2. Press the switch forward again beyond the
resistance point and hold until the roof
closes without pinch protection.
Initializing after a power failure
After
a power failure during the opening or clos‐
ing process, the roof can only be operated to a
limited extent.
Initializing the system
The system can be initialized when the vehicle
is stationary and the engine is running.
Danger of pinching
Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is
clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Press the switch up and hold it
until the initialization is complete:
▷ Initialization begins within
15
seconds and is completed
when the sunroof and sliding
visor are completely closed.
▷ The roof closes without pinch protection.
Seite 47
47
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Adjusting
Sitting safely
The
ideal seating position can make a vital con‐
tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
The seating position plays an important role in
an accident in combination with:
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 53.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 54.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 88.
Front seats
Adjusting
General information
Do not adjust the seat while driving
Never attempt to adjust the driver's seat
while driving.
The seat could respond with unexpected move‐
ment and the ensuing loss of vehicle control
could lead to an accident.◀
Do not incline the backrest too far to the
rear
Do not incline the backrest on the front passen‐
ger side too far to the rear during driving. Oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of sliding under the
safety belt in an accident. This would eliminate
the protection normally provided by the belt.◀
The seat setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use. When the vehicle is unlocked
via the remote control, the position is automati‐
cally retrieved if this function, refer to page 37,
was activated.
Overview
1 Lumbar support*
2 Backrest width*
3 Shoulder support*
4 Backrest
5 Forward/back, height, tilt
6 Thigh support*
Adjustments in detail
1. Forward/back.
2. Height.
Seite 48
48
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Adjusting
3. Seat tilt.
4. Backrest tilt.
5. Thigh support*.
Lumbar support*
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in such a way that it supports the lumbar
region of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright posture.
▷ Press the front/rear section of the switch.
The curvature is increased/decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower section of the switch.
The curvature is shifted up/down.
Backrest width*
Change the width of the backrest using the side
wings to adjust the lateral support.
To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle,
the backrest width temporarily opens fully.
Shoulder support*
Also supports the back in the shoulder area:
▷ Results in a relaxed seating position.
▷ Reduces strain on the shoulder muscles.
Seite 49
49
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Gentleman function*
The front passenger seat can be adjusted with
the switches of the driver's seat.
1. Press the button. The LED lights up.
2. Adjust the front passenger seat on your own
seat.
3. If needed, store the memory position, refer
to page 57, for the front passenger seat.
4. Press the button to deactivate the function.
The LED goes out.
The function deactivates itself automatically af‐
ter some time.
Active seat*
Active adjustment of the seat cushion's con‐
tours reduces muscular tension and fatigue to
help prevent lower back pain.
Press the button. The LED lights up.
Front seat heating*
Switching on
Press
the button once for each temper‐
ature level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
Switching off
Press the button longer.
The LEDs go out.
The temperature may be reduced or seat heat‐
ing may be switched off entirely to save battery
power.
Temperature distribution*
The heating action in the seat cushion and back‐
rest can be distributed in different ways.
1. "Climate"
2. "Seat heating distribution"
3. Select the required seat.
4. Turn the controller to set the temperature
distribution.
Seite 50
50
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Adjusting
Front active seat ventilation*
The seat cushion and backrest surfaces are
cooled by means of integrated fans.
The
ventilation rapidly cools the seat, e.g., if the
vehicle interior is overheated or for continuous
cooling at high temperatures.
Switching on
Press
the button once for each ventila‐
tion level.
The highest level is active when three LEDs are
lit.
After a short time, the system automatically
moves down one level in order to prevent ex‐
cessive cooling.
Switching off
Press the button longer.
The LEDs go out.
Rear seats
Adjusting
General information
The switches for adjusting the seats are located
on the center armrest of the rear seats.
Center armrest
When folding down the center armrest,
ensure that the area below the center head re‐
straint is clear. Otherwise, injury may result.◀
At a glance
1 Forward/backward, tilt
2 Backrest
3 Adjust front passenger seat
4 Reset to standard position
5 Head restraint.
6 Lumbar support
The seats cannot be adjusted if the safety
switch for the power windows has been
pressed.
Settings in detail
1. Forward/back.
2. Seat tilt.
Seite 51
51
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
3. Backrest tilt.
Lumbar support
The contour of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in such a way that it supports the lumbar
region of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright posture.
▷ Press the front/rear section of the switch.
The curvature is increased/decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower section of the switch.
The curvature is shifted up/down.
Adjusting the front passenger seat
from the rear
For more leg room in the rear, for example.
1. Press the button to activate the function, ar‐
row.
2. Adjust the passenger seat, e.g., forward/
back.
3. Press the button to deactivate the function,
arrow.
The function deactivates itself automatically af‐
ter some time.
Reset* to standard position
Maintain pressure on the button until the system
completes the adjustment.
Massage function in rear seats
*
Wavelike motions from the top to the bottom in
the backrest relax back muscles.
Button in rear
Switching on
To
switch on, press the button once for
each massage level.
The highest level is active when two LEDs are
lit.
Switching off
To switch off, press and hold the button.
The LEDs go out.
Seite 52
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Adjusting
Rear seat heating*
Switching on
Press
the button once for each temper‐
ature level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
Switching off
Press the button longer.
The LEDs go out.
Temperature distribution*
The heating action in the seat cushion and back‐
rest can be distributed in different ways.
1. "Climate"
2. "Seat heating rear"
3. Select the required seat.
4. Turn the controller to set the temperature
distribution.
Active seat ventilation*
Switching on
Press
the button once for each ventila‐
tion level.
The highest level is active when three LEDs are
lit.
Switching off
Press the button longer.
The LEDs go out.
Safety belts
Seats with safety belt
The vehicle has five seats, each of which is
equipped with a safety belt.
Notes
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving away.
Although airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
▷ The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be
correct for adult seat occupants of every
build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
▷ The two outer safety belt buckles,
integrated
into the rear seat, are for passen‐
gers sitting on the left and right.
▷ The center rear seat belt buckle marked with
the letters CENTER is solely intended for
the center passenger.
Seite 53
53
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
One person per safety belt
Never
allow more than one person to wear
a single safety belt. Never allow infants or small
children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀
Putting on the belt
Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly
across the lap and shoulders, as close to the
body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies low
around the hips in the lap area and does not
press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt can
slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal im‐
pact and injure the abdomen.
The safety belt must not lie across the neck, rub
on sharp edges, be routed over solid or breaka‐
ble objects, or be pinched.◀
Reduction of restraining effect
Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the
belt from fitting properly, and pull the shoulder
belt periodically to readjust the tension across
your lap; otherwise, the retention effect of the
safety belt may be reduced.◀
Buckling the belt
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the
belt buckle.
Tensioning the safety belt
automatically*
After the belt is buckled and the door is closed,
the belt is tightened once automatically.
Unbuckling the belt
1. Hold the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the belt back into its reel.
Safety belt reminder for the driver's and
front passenger seat
The indicator lamp flashes or lights up
and a signal sounds. Make sure that the
safety belts are positioned correctly.
The safety belt reminder is active at speeds
above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be ac‐
tivated if objects are placed on the front pas‐
senger seat.
Safety mode*
In
critical situations, e.g., during full brake appli‐
cation, the front safety belts tighten automati‐
cally.
If the situation passes without an accident oc‐
curring, the belt tension relaxes.
If the belt tension does not loosen automatically,
stop the vehicle and unbuckle the belt using the
red button in the buckle. Fasten the belt before
continuing on your trip.
Damage to safety belts
In the case of strain caused by accidents or
damage:
Have the safety belts, including the safety belt
tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors
checked.
Checking and replacing safety belts
Have the work performed only by your
service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured
that this safety feature will function properly.◀
Front head restraints
Correctly adjusted head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of
an accident.
Seite 54
54
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Adjusting
Adjusting the head restraint
Correctly adjust the head restraints of all
occupied
seats; otherwise, there is an increased
risk of injury in an accident.◀
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is ap‐
proximately at ear level.
Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is
as close as possible to the back of the head.
Active head restraint
In the event of a rear-end collision with a certain
severity, the active head restraint automatically
reduces the distance from the head.
Reduced protective function
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint cov‐
ers.
▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
on the head restraints.
▷ Only attach accessories approved by BMW
to the seat or head restraint.
Otherwise, the protective function of the active
head restraint will be impaired and the personal
safety of the occupants will be endangered.◀
Adjusting the height
Adjusting electrically.
Distance to back of head: manual head
restraints
▷ Forward: pull.
▷ Back: press the button and push the head
restraint toward the rear.
Distance to the back of the head:
power* head restraints
The
head restraint is automatically repositioned
when the shoulder support is adjusted.
Adjusting the side extensions*
Fold forward for increased lateral support in the
resting position.
Removing
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Rear head restraints
Correctly adjusted head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk
of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of
an accident.
Seite 55
55
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Adjusting the head restraint
Correctly adjust the head restraints of all
occupied
seats; otherwise, there is an increased
risk of injury in an accident.◀
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is ap‐
proximately at ear level.
Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is
as close as possible to the back of the head.
Folding forward the center head
restraint
Before using the center seat, fold the center
head restraint forward.
Press the button, arrow 1, and fold the head re‐
straint forward.
Adjusting the height: manual head
restraints
The height of the outer head restraints can be
adjusted.
▷ To raise: pull.
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
Adjusting the height: electrical*
▷ The head restraints on the left and right rear
passenger seats extend automatically
whenever a passenger in the rear seat fas‐
tens his or her safety belt.
▷ In addition, the height of the head restraint
can be adjusted electrically.
Extending the head restraint
To prevent possible personal injury and
property damage, always ensure that the area
above the head restraints is clear and unob‐
structed before extending them upward.◀
The height adjustment of the head restraint is
deactivated when the safety switch for the rear
windows, refer to page 45, has been pressed.
Adjusting the side extensions
*
Fold the side extensions on the head restraint
forward
for increased lateral support in the rest‐
ing position.
Removing: manual head restraints
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
Seite 56
56
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Adjusting
1. Pull the head restraint upward as far as pos‐
sible.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head
restraint out completely.
Before transporting passengers
Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐
porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐
tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐
able.◀
Removing: Electrical
* head restraints
Note
Do not remove the rear head restraints.
To avoid damage, they can only be installed by
your service center.
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
1. Completely raise the head restraint.
2. Completely pull out the head restraint with a
firm tug.
Before transporting passengers
Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐
porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐
tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐
able.◀
Seat, mirror, and steering
wheel memory*
General information
Front
Two different driver's seat, exterior mirror, and
steering wheel positions can be stored and re‐
trieved
for each remote control. The adjustment
of the lumbar support is not stored.
Rear
Two different seat positions can be stored and
retrieved.
Storing
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Set the desired position.
3. Press the button. The LED in the
button lights up.
4. Press the desired button 1 or 2. The LED
goes out.
If the M button is pressed accidentally:
Press the button again.
The LED goes out.
Seite 57
57
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Calling up settings
Do not retrieve the memory while driving
Do not retrieve the memory setting while
driving,
as an unexpected movement of the seat
or steering wheel could result in an accident.◀
Comfort function
1. Open the driver's door.
2. Switch off the ignition.
3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2.
The corresponding seat position is performed
automatically.
The procedure stops when a switch for adjust‐
ing the seat or one of the buttons is pressed.
Safety mode
1. Close the driver's door or switch on the ig‐
nition.
2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2 until
the adjustment procedure is completed.
Calling up of a seat position
deactivated
After a brief period, the calling up of stored seat
positions is deactivated to save battery power.
To reactivate calling up of a seat position:
▷ Open or close the door or trunk lid.
▷ Press a button on the remote control.
▷ Press the Start/Stop button.
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
At a glance
1 Adjusting
2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor*
3 Fold in and out*
General information
The
mirror on the passenger side is more curved
than the driver's side mirror.
Estimating distances correctly
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. Do not estimate the distance
to the traffic behind you based on what you see
in the mirror, as this will increase your risk of an
accident.◀
The mirror setting is stored for the remote con‐
trol currently in use. When the vehicle is un‐
locked via the remote control, the position is au‐
tomatically retrieved if the setting for this
function is active.
Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the mirror changeover switch.
Adjusting electrically
The setting corresponds to the direction
in which the button is pressed.
Seite 58
58
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Adjusting
Storing positions*
Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer
to page 57.
Adjusting manually
If an electrical malfunction occurs, for example,
press the edges of the mirror glass.
Automatic Curb Monitor*
When the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror
glass tilts downward slightly on the front pas‐
senger
side. This improves your view of the curb
and other low-lying obstacles when parking, for
example.
Activating
1.
Slide the mirror changeover switch
to the driver's side mirror position.
2. Engage transmission position R.
Deactivating
Slide the mirror changeover switch to the pas‐
senger's side mirror position.
Fold in and out*
Press the button.
Possible up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h.
For example, this is advantageous
▷ In car washes.
▷ In narrow streets.
▷ For folding back mirrors that were folded
away manually.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically
at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Fold in the mirror in a car wash
Before entering an automatic car wash,
fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with the
button; otherwise, they could be damaged, de‐
pending on the width of the vehicle.◀
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
whenever the engine is running.
Automatic dimming feature
Both
exterior mirrors are automatically dimmed.
Photocells are used for control in the Interior rear
view mirror, refer to page 59.
Interior rearview mirror
Reducing the blinding effect
From behind when driving at night: turn the
knob.
Interior rearview mirror, automatic
dimming feature
*
Photocells are used for control:
▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
For proper operation:
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield.
Seite 59
59
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Illuminated vanity mirror* in
the rear
Folding down
Press the button.
The vanity mirror folds down.
The angle can be adjusted by hand.
Folding up
Press the mirror up.
Steering wheel
General information
Do not adjust while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement
could result in an accident.◀
Adjusting
The steering wheel can be adjusted in four di‐
rections.
Storing the position
Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer
to page 57.
Assistance getting in and out
The steering wheel temporarily moves into the
highest position to make it easier to enter and
exit the vehicle.
Steering wheel heating
*
Switching on/off
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Seite 60
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Adjusting
Transporting children safely
The right place for children
Note
Children in the vehicle
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐
selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the
doors.◀
Children should always be in the rear
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the back seat.
Transporting children in the rear
Only transport children younger than
13
years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in the
rear in child restraint fixing systems provided in
accordance with the age, weight and size of the
child; otherwise, there is an increased risk of in‐
jury in an accident.
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
fixing system can no longer be used, due to their
age, weight and size.◀
Children on the front passenger seat
Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐
straint fixing system in the front passenger seat,
make sure that the front, knee and side airbags
on the front passenger side are deactivated. Au‐
tomatic deactivation of front passenger airbags,
refer to page 89.
Deactivating the front passenger airbags
If a child restraint fixing system is used in
the front passenger seat, the front passenger
airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is
an increased risk of injury to the child when the
airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint
fixing system.◀
Installing child restraint fixing
systems
Before mounting
If the rear seat backrests are adjustable:
Before mounting child restraint fixing systems,
return all of the rear seat backrests to the basic
position.
Notes
Manufacturer's information for child re‐
straint fixing systems
To select, mount and use child restraint fixing
systems, observe the information provided by
the system manufacturer; otherwise, the pro‐
tective effect can be impaired.
◀
On the front passenger seat
After installing a child restraint fixing system in
the front passenger seat, make sure that the
front, knee and side airbags on the front pas‐
senger side are deactivated.
Deactivate the front passenger airbags auto‐
matically, refer to page 89.
Deactivating the front passenger airbags
If a child restraint fixing system is used in
the front passenger seat, the front passenger
airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is
an increased risk of injury to the child when the
airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint
fixing system.◀
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint fixing system,
move the front passenger seat as far back as
possible and adjust its height to the middle po‐
sition to obtain the best possible position for the
belt and to offer optimal protection in the event
of an accident.
Do not change the seat position and height after
this.
Seite 61
61
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Backrest width*
Before
installing a child restraint fixing system in
the front passenger seat, open the backrest
width completely. Do not change the backrest
width again and do not call up a memory posi‐
tion.
Backrest width for the child seat
Before installing a child restraint fixing
system in the front passenger seat, the backrest
width must be opened completely. Do not
change the adjustment after this; otherwise, the
stability of the child seat will be reduced.◀
Child seat security
The rear safety belts and the front passenger
safety belt can be locked against pulling out for
mounting the child restraint fixing systems.
Locking the safety belt
1. Pull out the belt webbing completely.
2. Secure the child restraint fixing system with
the belt.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and
pull it taut against the child restraint fixing
system. The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt
1. Unbuckle the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint fixing system.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com‐
pletely.
LATCH child restraint fixing
system
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for CHil‐
dren.
Note
Manufacturer's information for LATCH
child restraint fixing systems
To
mount and use the LATCH child restraint fix‐
ing systems, observe the operating and safety
information from the system manufacturer; oth‐
erwise, the level of protection may be reduced.◀
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
Correctly engage the lower LATCH an‐
chors
Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have
properly engaged and that the child restraint fix‐
ing system is resting snugly against the back‐
rest; otherwise, the degree of protection offered
may be reduced.◀
Before mounting the LATCH child restraint fix‐
ing system, pull the belt away from the child re‐
straint fixing system.
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are lo‐
cated
in the gap between the seat and backrest.
Mounting LATCH child restraint fixing
systems
1. Mount the child restraint fixing system; refer
to the operating instructions of the system.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
Seite 62
62
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Transporting children safely
Mounting LATCH child restraint fixing
systems on power rear seats
*
1. Before mounting, adjust the seats to their
basic position, refer to page 52.
2. For better accessibility, tilt the backrest
back slightly.
3. Mount the child restraint fixing system; refer
to the operating instructions of the system.
4. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
5. After mounting, move the backrest back up
slightly so that the child restraint fixing sys‐
tem rests lightly against the backrest.
Child restraint fixing system with a
tether strap
LATCH mounting eyes
Only use the mounting eyes for the upper
LATCH retaining strap to secure child restraint
fixing systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes
could be damaged.◀
Mounting points
Depending on the vehicle equipment, there are
two outer or three mounting points for child re‐
straint fixing systems with a tether strap.
Retaining strap guide
Retaining strap
Make
sure that the upper retaining strap is
not routed over the head restraints or sharp
edges and is free of twisting on its way to the
upper mounting point; otherwise, the belt can‐
not properly secure the child restraint fixing sys‐
tem in an accident.◀
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint.
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Mounting point/eye
5 Rear window shelf
6 Seat backrest
7 Upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap to
the mounting point
1. Remove the mounting point cover.
2. Raise the head restraint. Do not change the
middle head restraint*.
3. Guide the upper retaining strap between the
supports of the head restraint.
Guide
it over the head restraint of the middle
seat.
4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the
mounting eye.
5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
down.
6. Lower the head restraint.
Seite 63
63
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Locking the doors and
windows
Rear doors
Push the locking lever on the rear doors down.
The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Safety switch for the rear
Press the button on the driver's door if
children are being transported in the
rear.
This
locks various functions so that they cannot
be operated from the rear: safety switch, refer to
page 45.
Seite 64
64
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Transporting children safely
Driving
Start/Stop button
The concept
Pressing the Start/Stop button
switches
the ignition on or off and
starts the engine.
The engine starts if the brake
pedal is pressed when you press
the Start/Stop button.
Ignition on
Press the Start/Stop button, and do not press on
the brake pedal at the same time.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
Most of the indicator and warning lamps in the
instrument cluster light up for varying lengths of
time.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
The ignition switches off automatically:
▷ When the vehicle is locked, if the low beams
are switched on.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started.
▷ If the engine is switched off and the ignition
is switched on, the system automatically
switches to the radio ready state when the
door is opened if the lights are switched off
or the daytime running lights are switched
on.
Ignition off
Press the Start/Stop button again, and do not
press on the brake pedal at the same time.
All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go
out.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
Transmission position P with the ignition
off
When the ignition is switched off, position P is
engaged automatically. When in an automatic
car
wash, for example, ensure that the ignition is
not switched off accidentally.◀
When the vehicle is locked using the central
locking system, the ignition switches off auto‐
matically.
Radio ready state
Activate radio ready state:
▷ When the ignition is switched off: press ON/
OFF button on the radio.
▷ When the engine is running: press START/
STOP button.
Some electronic systems/power consumers re‐
main ready for operation.
Radio ready state switches off automatically:
▷ After approx. 8 minutes.
▷ When the vehicle is locked using the central
locking system.
Starting the engine
General information
Enclosed areas
Do not let the engine run in enclosed
areas; otherwise, breathing of exhaust fumes
may lead to loss of consciousness and death.
The
exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an
odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.◀
Unattended vehicle
Do not leave the car unattended with the
engine running; otherwise, it presents a poten‐
tial source of danger.
Seite 65
65
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Before leaving the car with the engine running,
set
the parking brake and place the transmission
in position P or neutral to prevent the car from
moving.◀
Frequent starting in quick succession
Avoid repeated futile attempts at starting
the car and avoid starting the car frequently in
quick succession. Otherwise, the fuel is not
burned or is inadequately burned, and there is
the danger of overheating and damaging the
catalytic converter.◀
Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the
vehicle remains stationary. Start driving at mod‐
erate engine speeds.
Starting the engine
Press on the brake pedal and
press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is cranked until it
starts.
Engine stop
General information
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
cannot operate the windows and injure them‐
selves.◀
Set the parking brake and further secure
the vehicle as required
Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐
erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward
and downward inclines, further secure the vehi‐
cle, for example, by turning the steering wheel in
the direction of the curb. ◀
Before driving into a car wash
In order for the vehicle to be able to roll into a car
wash, heed the information regarding Washing
in automatic car washes, refer to page 271.
Switching off the engine
1. Engage transmission position P with the ve‐
hicle stopped.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.
The radio ready state is switched on.
3. Set the parking brake.
Parking brake
The concept
The
parking brake is used to prevent the vehicle
from rolling when it is parked.
▷ Engine switched off: the parking brake acts
on the rear wheels.
▷ Engine running: the parking brake acts on
the disc brakes of the front and rear wheels
via the hydraulic brake system.
The parking brake can be set manually or auto‐
matically:
▷ Manual: by pulling and pushing the switch.
▷ Automatic: by activating Automatic Hold.
Setting
Pull the switch.
The LED lights up.
The indicator lamp lights up in red. The
parking brake is set.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian
models
Seite 66
66
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Driving
Set the parking brake and further secure
the vehicle as required
Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐
erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward
and
downward inclines, further secure the vehi‐
cle, for example, by turning the steering wheel in
the direction of the curb. ◀
While driving
Use while driving:
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes
hard while the button is being pulled.
The indicator lamp lights up in red, a sig‐
nal sounds and the brake lamps light up.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian
models
If the vehicle is braked to a speed of approx.
2 mph/3 km/h, the parking brake remains set.
Releasing
Press the switch while the brake pedal is
pressed or transmission position P is en‐
gaged.
The LED and indicator lamp go out.
The parking brake is released.
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
cannot release the parking brake.◀
Manual release
The parking brake can be released manually in
the event of a power failure or electrical fault.
Before releasing, secure the vehicle
against rolling
Before releasing the parking brake manually,
and whenever you park the vehicle with the
parking brake released, ensure that position P of
the automatic transmission is engaged.
Secure the vehicle in a manner appropriate to
the inclination of the road, e.g., with a wheel
chock; otherwise, there is the danger of the ve‐
hicle rolling.◀
Unlocking
1. Remove the release tool from the tool kit.
2. Raise the floor panel in the cargo area.
3. Take out the floor trim in the cargo area, re‐
moving
the screws with the release tool, ar‐
rows.
Seite 67
67
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
4. Place the release tool on the release point,
arrow.
5. Forcefully pull the release tool up against the
resistance until you notice a marked in‐
crease in the resistance and the parking
brake releases audibly.
Have the malfunction corrected
If the parking brake has been released
manually in response to a malfunction, only
technicians can return it to operation.
Have
the malfunction corrected by your service
center.◀
After a power failure
Only put the parking brake into operation
after a power failure
The parking brake should only be put into oper‐
ation again if it was manually released due to an
interruption in the supply of electrical power.
Otherwise, it cannot be ensured that the parking
brake will function properly.◀
Putting the parking brake into
operation
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the switch while the brake is de‐
pressed or transmission position P is en‐
gaged.
It may take several seconds for the brake to be
put into operation. Any sounds associated with
this are normal.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out as soon as the parking
brake is ready for operation.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian
models.
Automatic Hold
The concept
This system assists the driver by automatically
setting and releasing the brake, such as when
moving in stop-and-go traffic.
The vehicle is automatically held in place when
it is stationary.
On inclines, the system prevents the vehicle
from rolling backward when driving away.
For your safety
Under
the following conditions, Automatic Hold
is automatically deactivated and the parking
brake is set:
▷ The engine is switched off.
▷ A door is opened and driver's safety belt is
unbuckled.
▷ The moving vehicle is brought to a standstill
using the parking brake.
Seite 68
68
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Driving
The indicator lamp switches from green
to red and the letters AUTO H go out.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian
models
Before driving away:
▷ Release the parking brake manually.
▷ Reactivate Automatic Hold.
Leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
ning
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
ning, engage position P of the automatic trans‐
mission
and ensure that the parking brake is set.
Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.◀
Activating
This function can be activated when the driver's
door is closed and the safety belt is fastened, or
while driving.
Press the button.
The LED and the letters AUTO H light
up.
The indicator lamp lights up.
Automatic Hold is activated.
Deactivating
Press the button again.
The LED and the letters AUTO H go
out.
Automatic Hold is deactivated.
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
press on the brake pedal to deactivate it.
When the parking brake, refer to page 66, is set
manually, Automatic Hold is deactivated auto‐
matically.
Driving
Automatic Hold is activated: the vehicle is auto‐
matically secured against rolling when it stops.
The indicator lamp lights up in green.
Step on the accelerator pedal to drive
off.
The brake is released automatically.
The indicator lamp goes out.
Lower
lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models
Before driving into a car wash
Deactivate Automatic Hold; otherwise, the
parking brake will be set when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary and the vehicle will no longer be able to
roll.◀
Parking
The parking brake is automatically set if the en‐
gine is switched off while the vehicle is being
held by Automatic Hold.
The indicator lamp changes from green
to red.
The parking brake is not set if the engine
is switched off while the vehicle is coast‐
ing to a halt. Automatic Hold is deacti‐
vated.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models
Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
leaving the vehicle so that children, for example,
cannot release the parking brake.◀
Malfunction
In the event of a failure or malfunction of the
parking brake, secure the vehicle against rolling
using a wheel chock, for example, when leaving
it.
Seite 69
69
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Turn signal, high beams,
headlamp flasher
Turn signal
Using turn signals
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
To
switch off manually, press the lever to the re‐
sistance point.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp in‐
dicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
Triple turn signal activation
Press the lever to the resistance point.
The turn signal flashes three times.
The function can be activated or deactivated:
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Triple turn signal"
Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it
there for as long as you want the turn signal to
flash.
High beams, headlamp flasher
▷ High beams, arrow 1.
▷ Headlamp flasher, arrow 2.
Washer/wiper system
Switching the wipers on/off and brief
wipe
Do not switch on the wipers if frozen
Do
not switch on the wipers if they are fro‐
zen onto the windshield; otherwise, the wiper
blades and the windshield wiper motor may be
damaged.◀
Switching on
Press the wiper levers up.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷ Normal wiping speed: press up once.
The wipers switch to intermittent operation
when the vehicle is stationary.
▷ Fast wiping speed: press up twice or press
once beyond the resistance point.
The
wipers switch to normal speed when the
vehicle is stationary.
Seite 70
70
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Driving
Switching off and brief wipe
Press the wiper levers down.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷ Brief wipe: press down once.
▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down once.
▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.
Rain sensor
The concept
The time between wipes is controlled automat‐
ically
and depends on the intensity of the rainfall.
The sensor is located on the windshield, directly
in front of the interior rearview mirror.
Activating/deactivating the rain sensor
Press the button on the wiper lever.
When
activated, the wipers move over the wind‐
shield once.
The LED in the steering column stalk lights up.
Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes
Deactivate the rain sensor when passing
through an automatic car wash; otherwise, dam‐
age could be caused by undesired wiper activa‐
tion.◀
Rain sensor sensitivity
Turn the thumbwheel.
Clean the windshield,
headlamps*
Pull the lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
In
addition, the headlamps are cleaned at regular
intervals when the vehicle lights are switched
on.
Do not use the washer system at freezing
temperatures
Do not use the washers if there is any danger
that the fluid will freeze on the windshield; oth‐
erwise, your vision could be obscured. For this
reason, use antifreeze.
Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is
empty; otherwise, you could damage the
pump.◀
Seite 71
71
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Windshield washer nozzles
The washer jets are automatically heated*
whenever the ignition is switched on.
Fold-out position of the wipers
Required when changing the wiper blades or
under frosty conditions, for example.
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Under frosty conditions, ensure that the
wiper blades are not frozen onto the wind‐
shield.
3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point of
resistance
and hold it for approx. 3 seconds,
until the wiper remains in a nearly vertical
position.
After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper
system must be reactivated.
Fold the wipers back down
Before switching the ignition on, fold the
wipers back down to the windshield; otherwise,
the wipers may become damaged when they are
switched on.◀
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the wiper levers down. The wipers
move to their resting position and are ready
for operation.
Washer fluid
General information
Antifreeze for washer fluid
Antifreeze is flammable. Therefore, keep
it away from sources of ignition.
Only
keep it in the closed original container and
inaccessible to children.
Follow the instructions on the container.◀
Washer fluid reservoir
Adding washer fluid
Only add washer fluid when the engine is
cool, and then close the cover completely to
avoid
contact between the washer fluid and hot
engine parts.
Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a risk
to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀
All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser‐
voir.
Fill with water and – if required – with a washer
antifreeze,
according to the manufacturer's rec‐
ommendations.
Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain
the correct mixing ratio.
Capacity
Approx. 5.3 US quarts/ 5 liters
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic
Transmission positions
D Drive, automatic position
Position for normal vehicle operation. All for‐
ward gears are available.
R is Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
N is Neutral
Use in automatic car washes, for example. The
vehicle can roll.
Seite 72
72
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Driving
When the ignition is switched off, refer to
page 65, position P is engaged automatically.
P Park
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The
drive wheels are blocked.
P is engaged automatically:
▷ After the engine is switched off, if the car is
in
radio ready state, refer to page 65, or if the
ignition is switched off, refer to page 65, and
if position R or D is engaged.
▷ If the ignition is switched off and position N
is engaged.
▷ If the safety belt is unbuckled, the driver's
door is opened, and the brake pedal is not
pressed while the vehicle is stationary and
transmission position R or D is engaged.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance. Press on the accelerator beyond
the resistance point at the full throttle position.
Engaging the transmission position
▷ Transmission position P can only be disen‐
gaged if the engine is running and the brake
pedal is pressed.
▷ With the vehicle stationary, press on the
brake pedal before shifting out of P or N;
otherwise, the shift command will not be
executed: shift lock.
Depress the brake until you start driv‐
ing
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after
you select a driving position, maintain pres‐
sure on the brake pedal until you are ready
to start.◀
Engaging D, R and N
Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di‐
rection, beyond a resistance point if necessary.
After
releasing the selector lever, it returns to its
center position.
Press the Unlock button to:
▷ Engage R.
▷ Shift out of P.
Engaging P
Press button P.
Seite 73
73
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Sport program and manual mode M/S
Activating the sport program
Push the selector lever to the left out of trans‐
mission position D.
DS is displayed in the instrument cluster.
This position is recommended for a perform‐
ance-oriented driving style.
Activating the M/S manual mode
Push the selector lever to the left out of trans‐
mission position D.
Push the selector lever forward or backward.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
The
engaged gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster, e.g., M1.
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
▷ To shift up: press the selector lever back‐
ward.
The transmission only shifts up or down if the
rpm and vehicle speed are appropriate. If the
engine
speed is too high, the transmission does
not shift down.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
Ending the sport program/manual
mode
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The transmission position is dis‐
played, for instance, P.
Seite 74
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Driving
Displays
Instrument cluster
At a glance
1 Fuel gauge
2 Speedometer
3 Indicator/warning lamps
4 Tachometer
5 Oil temperature
6 External temperature
7 Electronic displays
8 Miles, trip miles
9 Clock
10 Display/reset miles
Fuel gauge
The vehicle inclination may
cause the display to vary.
Notes on refueling, refer to
page 242.
Range
After the reserve range is
reached:
▷ A Check Control message is
displayed briefly.
▷ The remaining range is
shown on the computer.
▷ When a dynamic driving style is used, such
as when corners are taken rapidly, engine
functions are not ensured.
The Check Control message appears continu‐
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
Refuel promptly
Refuel no later than at a range 30 miles/
50
km, or engine functions are not ensured and
damage may occur.◀
Seite 75
75
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Displaying the cruising range
1. "Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. "Additional indicators"
The range is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Tachometer
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
field.
In this range, the fuel supply is interrupted
to protect the engine.
Engine oil temperature
▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at
the low temperature end.
Drive at moderate engine and
vehicle speeds.
▷ Normal operating tempera‐
ture: the pointer is in the mid‐
dle or in the left half of the
temperature display.
▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high tem‐
perature end. A Check Control message is
displayed in addition.
Coolant temperature
Should the coolant, and with it the engine, be‐
come too hot, a Check Control message is dis‐
played.
Check the coolant level, refer to page 256.
External temperature
External temperature warning
If the display drops to +37 ℉/
+3 ℃, a signal sounds.
A Check Control message is dis‐
played.
There is the increased danger of
ice.
Ice on roads
Even
at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃,
there can be a risk of ice on roads.
Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and shady
roads, for example, to avoid the increased dan‐
ger of an accident.◀
Current fuel consumption
Displays the current fuel con‐
sumption. You can check
whether you are currently driving
in an efficient and environmen‐
tally-friendly manner.
Displaying the current fuel
consumption
1. "Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. "Additional indicators"
Seite 76
76
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Displays
The bar display for the current fuel consumption
is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Energy recovery
The energy of motion of the ve‐
hicle
is converted to electrical en‐
ergy while coasting. The vehicle
battery is partially charged and
fuel consumption can be low‐
ered.
Odometer and trip odometer
▷ Odometer, arrow 1.
▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2.
Display/reset miles
Press the knob.
▷ When the ignition is switched
off, the time, external temper‐
ature and odometer are dis‐
played.
▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip
odometer is reset.
Time
The time is displayed at the bot‐
tom of the instrument cluster.
Setting
the time and time format,
refer to page 80.
Date
The date is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
Setting the date and date format,
refer to page 80.
Selection lists in the
instrument cluster
The concept
The following can be operated using the buttons
and the thumbwheel on the steering wheel:
▷ Current audio source.
▷ Redial on telephone*.
▷ Activation of the voice activation system*.
Activating a list and creating the
setting
Press a button on the right side of the steering
wheel
or turn the thumbwheel to activate the re‐
quired list.
Create the setting using the thumbwheel.
Computer
Indication in the info display
The information from the com‐
puter is shown in the Info display
in the instrument cluster.
Seite 77
77
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Calling up information on the info
display
Press the computer button on the turn signal
lever.
Information
is displayed on the info display of the
instrument cluster.
Information at a glance
Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn sig‐
nal lever calls up the following information on the
info display:
▷ Range.
▷ Average fuel consumption.
▷ Average speed.
▷ Date*.
▷ Time of arrival*
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ Distance to destination*
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ Arrow view of navigation system*
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
Adjusting the info display
You can select what information from the com‐
puter
is to be displayed on the info display of the
instrument cluster.
1. "Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. Select the desired displays.
Information in detail
Range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel.
It is calculated based on your driving style over
the last 20 miles/30 km. If there is only enough
fuel left for less than 45 miles/80 km, the color
of the display changes.
Average fuel consumption
This
is calculated for the period during which the
engine is running.
The average fuel consumption is calculated on
the basis of various distances.
Average speed
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the
engine stopped do not enter into the calculation.
Resetting average values
Press and hold the computer button on the turn
signal lever.
Distance to destination*
The distance remaining to the destination is dis‐
played if a destination is entered in the naviga‐
tion system* before the trip is started.
The distance to the destination is adopted au‐
tomatically.
Seite 78
78
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Displays
Time of arrival*
The estimated time of arrival is
displayed if a destination is en‐
tered in the navigation system
*
before the trip is started.
The time must be correctly set.
Speed limit
Display of a speed limit which, when reached,
should cause a warning to be issued.
Renewed warning if the vehicle speed drops be‐
low the set speed limit once by at least 3 mph/
5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing the
limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning at:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is
displayed.
5. Press the controller.
The speed limit is stored.
Activating/deactivating the limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning"
4. Press the controller.
Applying your current speed as the
limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Select current speed"
4. Press the controller.
The current vehicle speed is stored as the
limit.
Resetting values
The average fuel consumption and average
speed can be reset.
Press
and hold the computer button on the turn
signal lever.
Trip computer
There are two types of computer.
▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as
often as necessary.
▷ "Trip
computer": the values provide an over‐
view of the current trip.
Resetting the trip computer
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset": all values are reset.
"Automatically reset": all values are reset
approx. 4 hours after the vehicle comes to a
standstill.
Display on the Control Display
Display the computer or trip computer on the
Control Display.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Seite 79
79
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Resetting the fuel consumption or
speed
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Onboard info"
3. "Cons." or "Speed"
4. "Yes"
Settings on the Control
Display
Time
Setting the time zone
*
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time zone"
4. Select the desired time zone.
The time zone is stored.
Setting the time
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired hours
are displayed.
5. Press the controller.
6. Turn the controller until the desired minutes
are displayed.
7. Press the controller.
The time is stored.
Setting the time format
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The time format is stored.
Date
Setting the date
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Date:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed.
5. Press the controller.
6. Make the necessary settings for the month
and year.
The date is stored.
Setting the date format
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
Seite 80
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Displays
The date format is stored.
Language
Setting the language
To set the language on the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Language:"
4. Select the desired language.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Setting the voice dialog
*
Voice dialog for the voice activation system*,
refer to page 26.
Units of measure
Setting the units of measure
To set the units for fuel consumption, route/dis‐
tance and temperature:
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. Select the desired menu item.
4. Select the desired unit.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Brightness
Setting the brightness
To set the brightness of the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
5. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness control may not be clearly visible.
Service requirements
Display
The driving distance or the time
to the next service is displayed
briefly after the ignition is
switched on.
The current service require‐
ments can be read out from the remote control
by the service specialist.
Data
regarding the maintenance status or legally
mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto‐
matically transmitted to your service center be‐
fore a service due date, Automatic Service Re‐
quest, refer to page 234.
Seite 81
81
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Detailed information on service
requirements
More information on the scope of service re‐
quired can be displayed on the Control Display.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3.
"Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and le‐
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐
tion.
Symbols
Symbols Description
No service is currently required.
The deadline for service or a le‐
gally mandated inspection is
approaching. Please make a
service appointment.
The service deadline has al‐
ready passed.
Entering appointment dates
Enter the dates for the required inspections.
Ensure that the vehicle date and time are set
correctly.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
5. "Date:"
6. Create the settings.
7. Confirm.
The entered date is stored.
Automatic Service Request*
Data
regarding the maintenance status or legally
mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto‐
matically transmitted to your service center be‐
fore a service due date.
You can check when your service center was
notified.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control system monitors functions
in
the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in
the monitored systems.
A Check Control message is displayed as a
combination of indicator or warning lamps and
text messages in the instrument cluster and in
the Head-up Display*.
In addition, an acoustic signal may be output and
a text message may appear on the Control Dis‐
play.
Indicator/warning lamps
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in
a variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lamps are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Text messages
Text
messages in combination with a symbol in
the instrument cluster explain a Check Control
Seite 82
82
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Displays
message and the meaning of the indicator and
warning lamps.
Supplementary text messages
Addition information, such as on the cause of a
fault or the required action, can be called up via
Check Control. The supplementary text of ur‐
gent messages is displayed automatically.
It is shown on the Control Display.
Symbols
Depending on the Check Control message, the
following functions can be selected.
▷ "Owner's Manual"
Display additional information about the
Check Control message in the integrated
owner's manual.
▷ "Service request"
Contact the service partner.
▷ "Roadside Assistance"
Contact Roadside Assistance.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press the computer button on the turn signal
lever.
▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐
played
continuously and are not cleared un‐
til the malfunction is eliminated. If several
malfunctions occur at once, the messages
are displayed consecutively.
These messages can be hidden for approx.
8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐
played again automatically.
▷ Other Check Control messages are hidden
automatically after approx. 20 seconds.
They are stored and can be displayed again
later.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3.
"Check Control"
4. Select the text message.
Messages after trip completion
Malfunctions indicated during a trip are dis‐
played again after the ignition is switched off.
Seite 83
83
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Lamps
At a glance
1 Rear fog lamps*
2 Front fog lamps*
3 Automatic headlamp control / adaptive light
control* / high-beam assistant* / welcome
lamps / daytime running lights
*
4 Lamps off / daytime running lights*
5 Parking lamps / daytime running lights*
6 Low beams / welcome lamps / high-beam
assistant*
7 Instrument lighting
Parking lamps/low beams,
headlamp control
Parking lamps
Switch position
: the vehicle lamps light
up on all sides, e.g., for parking.
Do not use the parking lamps for extended pe‐
riods; otherwise, the battery may become dis‐
charged
and it would then be impossible to start
the engine.
When parking, it is preferable to switch on the
one-sided roadside parking lamps, refer to
page 85.
Low beams
Switch position
with the ignition switched
on: the low beams light up.
Welcome lamps
When parking the vehicle, leave the switch in
position or : the parking and interior
lamps light up briefly when the vehicle is un‐
locked.
Activating/deactivating
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Welcome light"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Headlamp courtesy delay feature
The
low beams stay lit for a short while after the
ignition is switched off, if the lamps are switched
off and the headlamp flasher is switched on.
Setting the duration
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Pathway light.: s"
4. Set the duration.
Seite 84
84
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Lamps
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Automatic headlamp control
Switch
position
: the low beams are switched
on and off automatically, e.g., in tunnels, in twi‐
light or if there is precipitation. The indicator
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
The low beams always stay on when the fog
lamps are switched on.
Personal responsibility
The automatic headlamp control cannot
serve
as a substitute for your personal judgment
in determining when the lamps should be
switched on in response to ambient lighting
conditions.
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you
should always switch on the lamps manually un‐
der these conditions.◀
Daytime running lights*
With the ignition switched on, the daytime run‐
ning lights light up in position 0,
or .
After the ignition is switched off, the parking
lamps light up in position
.
Activating/deactivating
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Daytime running lamps"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Roadside parking lamps
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
Switching on
With the ignition switched off, press the lever
either up or down past the resistance point for
approx. 2 seconds.
Switching off
Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in
the opposite direction.
Adaptive light control*
The concept
Adaptive light control is a variable headlamp
control system that enables dynamic illumina‐
tion of the road surface.
Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
rameters, the light from the headlamp follows
the course of the road.
In tight curves, e.g., on mountainous roads or
when turning, an additional, corner-illuminating
lamp is switched on that lights up the inside of
the curve when the vehicle is moving below a
certain speed.
Controls
Activating
Switch position with the ignition switched
on.
The turning lamps are automatically switched
on depending on the steering angle or the use
of turn signals.
Seite 85
85
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the adaptive
light control directs light towards the front pas‐
senger side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
When
driving in reverse, only the turning lamp is
active.
Self-leveling headlights
The self-leveling headlights feature adapts the
light distribution to the contours of the road.
The light distribution is lowered on hilltops to
avoid blinding oncoming traffic and tilted in de‐
pressions to increase visibility.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
Adaptive light control is malfunctioning or has
failed. Have the system checked as soon as pos‐
sible.
High-beam Assistant*
The concept
When the low beams are switched on, this sys‐
tem automatically switches the high beams on
and off. The procedure is controlled by a sensor
on the front of the interior rearview mirror. The
assistant ensures that the high beams are
switched on whenever the traffic situation al‐
lows. The driver can intervene at any time and
switch the high beams on and off as usual.
Activating the High-beam Assistant
1. Turn the light switch to or .
2. Press the button on the turn signal lever, ar‐
row.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up.
When the lights are switched on, the
high beams are switched on and off automati‐
cally.
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic
and traffic driving ahead of you, and to ad‐
equate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.
Switching the high beams on and off
manually
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
▷ High beams off/headlamp flasher, arrow 2.
To reactivate the High-beam Assistant, press
the button on the turn signal lever.
System limits
Personal responsibility
The high-beam assistant cannot serve as
a substitute for the driver's personal judgment
of
when to use the high beams. Therefore, man‐
ually switch off the high beams in situations
where this is required to avoid a safety risk.◀
The system is not fully functional in situations
such as the following, and driver intervention
may be necessary:
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and
wagons; when driving close to train or ship
traffic; and at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming
traffic on freeways.
Seite 86
86
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Lamps
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the pres‐
ence of highly reflective signs.
▷ At low speeds.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered with stickers, etc.
Camera
The camera is located on the front of the interior
rearview mirror.
Keep the area in front of the interior rearview
mirror clear.
Fog lamps
Front fog lamps*
The parking lamps or low beams must be
switched on.
Press the button. The green indicator
lamp lights up.
If the automatic headlamp control, refer to
page 85, is activated, the low beams will come
on automatically when you switch on the front
fog lamps.
Instrument lighting
Adjusting
The parking lamps or low beams
must
be switched on to adjust the
brightness.
Adjust the brightness using the
thumbwheel.
Interior lamps
General information
The interior lamps, footwell lamps, entry lamps
and courtesy lamps are controlled automati‐
cally.
The brightness of some of these lamps is influ‐
enced by the thumbwheel for the instrument
lighting.
1 Interior lamps
2 Reading lamp
Switching the interior lamps on and off
Press the button.
To switch off permanently: press the button for
approx. 3 seconds.
To clear this setting: press the button.
Reading lamps
Press the button.
Reading lamps are located at the front and rear
next to the interior lamps.
Seite 87
87
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Safety
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver
2 Front airbag, front passenger
3 Head airbag
4 Side airbag
5 Knee airbags
Front airbags
Front airbags help protect the driver and front
passenger by responding to frontal impacts in
which safety belts alone cannot provide ade‐
quate restraint.
Side airbags
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
side of the body in the chest and lap area.
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
side
of the body in the chest, lap, and head area.
Head airbags
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports the
head.
Knee airbag
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal
impact.
Protective action
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end
collisions.
Information on how to ensure the optimal
protective effect of the airbags
▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim, holding your hands at
the
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep
the danger of injury to your hands or arms as
low as possible if the airbag is triggered.
Seite 88
88
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Safety
▷ There should be no people, animals, or ob‐
jects between an airbag and a person.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
▷ Keep the dashboard and window on the
front
passenger side clear, i.e., do not cover
with adhesive labels or coverings, and do not
attach holders such as for navigation instru‐
ments and mobile phones.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting
correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs
in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries can
occur if the front airbag is triggered.
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects on the front passenger seat
that are not approved specifically for seats
with integrated side airbags.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jack‐
ets, over the backrests.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag and do not rest
against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries
can occur if the airbags are triggered.
▷ Do not remove the airbag restraint system.
▷ Do not remove the steering wheel.
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐
bag cover panels, cover them or modify
them in any way.
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This
also applies to steering wheel covers, the
dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars and the
sides of the headliner.◀
Even when all instructions are followed closely,
injury from contact with the airbags cannot be
ruled out in certain situations.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐
ing impairment in sensitive individuals.
In the case of a malfunction, deactivation
and after triggering of the airbags
Do not touch the individual components imme‐
diately after the system has been triggered; oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of burns.
Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐
mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by
your service center or a workshop that has the
necessary
authorization for handling explosives.
Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐
tem could lead to failure in an emergency or un‐
desired triggering of the airbag, either of which
could result in injury.◀
Warnings and information on the airbags are
also found on the sun visors.
Functional readiness of the airbag
system
When the ignition is switch on, the warn‐
ing lamp in the instrument cluster lights
up briefly and thereby indicates the op‐
erational readiness of the entire airbag system
and the belt tensioner.
Airbag system malfunctioning
▷ In radio ready state, the warning lamp does
not come on.
▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously.
When there is a malfunction, have the air‐
bag system checked immediately
When there is a malfunction, have the airbag
system checked immediately; otherwise, there
is a risk that the system does not function as ex‐
pected in the event of an accident despite cor‐
responding severity of the accident.◀
Automatic deactivation of the front
passenger airbags
The system determines whether the front pas‐
senger seat is occupied by measuring the re‐
sistance of the human body.
The front, knee, and side airbag on the front
passenger side are activated or deactivated ac‐
cordingly.
Leave feet in the footwell
Make sure that the front passenger keeps
his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise, the front
passenger airbags may not function properly.◀
Seite 89
89
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Child restraint fixing system in the front
passenger seat
Before
transporting a child on the front passen‐
ger seat, see the safety notes and instructions
under Children on the front passenger seat.◀
Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation system
When transporting older children and adults, the
front passenger airbags may be deactivated in
certain sitting positions. In this case, the indica‐
tor lamp for the front passenger airbags lights
up.
In this case, change the sitting position so that
the front passenger airbags are activated and
the indicator lamp goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
To make sure that the occupied seat cushion
can be evaluated correctly
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or
other items to the front passenger seat un‐
less they are specifically recommended by
the manufacturer of your vehicle.
▷ Do not place any objects on the front pas‐
senger seat.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
could press against the seat from below.
Indicator lamp for the front passenger
airbags
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐
bags indicates the operating state of the front
passenger airbags.
The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ac‐
tivated or deactivated.
▷ The indicator lamp lights up
when a child who is properly
seated in a child restraint fix‐
ing system intended for that
purpose is detected on the
seat
or the seat is empty. The
airbags on the front passen‐
ger side are not activated.
▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,
for example, a correctly seated person of
sufficient size is detected on the seat. The
airbags on the front passenger side are ac‐
tivated.
The system generally detects children seated in
a child seat, especially in the child seats that
were required by NHTSA when the vehicle was
manufactured. After installing a child seat, make
sure that the indicator lamp for the front pas‐
senger airbags lights up. This indicates that the
child seat has been detected and the front pas‐
senger airbags are not activated.
Strength of the driver's and front
passenger airbag
The strength with which the driver's and front
passenger airbags are triggered depends on the
position of the driver's and front passenger
seats.
To maintain the accuracy of this function over
the long-term, calibrate the front seats when a
corresponding message appears on the Control
Display.
Calibrating the front seats
A corresponding message appears on the Con‐
trol Display.
1. Move the respective seat forward all the
way.
2. Move the respective seat forward again. It
moves forward briefly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
The calibration procedure is completed when
the message on the Control Display disappears.
If the message continues to be displayed, repeat
the calibration.
Seite 90
90
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Safety
If the message does not disappear after a repeat
calibration,
have the system checked as soon as
possible.
Unobstructed area of movement
Ensure that the area of movement of the
seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injury or
damage to objects.◀
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM*
The concept
The tire inflation pressure is measured in the
four mounted tires. The system notifies you if
there is a significant loss of pressure in one or
more tires.
Functional requirements
The system must have been reset when the in‐
flation pressure was correct; otherwise, reliable
signaling of a flat tire is not ensured. Always use
wheels with TPM electronics to ensure that the
system will operate properly. Reset the system
after each correction of the tire inflation pres‐
sure and after every tire or wheel change.
System limits
Sudden tire damage
Sudden serious tire damage caused by
external influences cannot be indicated in ad‐
vance.◀
The system does not operate correctly if it has
not been reset. For example, a flat tire may be
indicated despite correct tire inflation pres‐
sures.
The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat
tire:
▷ For a mounted wheel without TPM electron‐
ics.
▷ When the TPM is disturbed by other sys‐
tems or devices with the same radio fre‐
quency.
Status display
The
current status of the Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM can be displayed on the Control Display,
e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3.
"Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM"
The status is displayed.
Status display
The tire and system status is indicated by the
color of the tires.
A change in the tire inflation pressure during
driving is taken into account.
A
correction is only necessary if this is indicated
by the TPM
Wheels, green
The tire inflation pressure is equal to the target
state.
One wheel is yellow
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
the indicated tire.
All wheels are yellow
▷ A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure
in several tires.
▷ The system was not reset after a wheel
change and thus warns based on the infla‐
tion pressures initialized last.
▷ A flat tire in one or more tires while the sys‐
tem is being reset.
Wheels, gray
The
system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons for
this may be:
▷ TPM is being reset.
▷ Disturbance by systems or devices with the
same radio frequency.
▷ Malfunction.
Seite 91
91
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
For Canadian models: additional
information
The status display additionally shows the cur‐
rent tire inflation pressures and tire tempera‐
tures.
When correcting the tire inflation pressures,
note the following:
The tire pressure increases as the tire temper‐
ature increases.
Therefore, only correct the tire inflation pres‐
sure
when the tire is at the ambient temperature.
Compare the displayed tire temperature with
the external temperature in the instrument clus‐
ter.
Resetting the system
Reset the system after each correction of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3.
"Reset"
4. Start the engine - do not drive away.
5. Reset the tire pressure using "Reset".
6. Drive away.
The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting
TPM..." is displayed.
After
driving for a few minutes, the set tire infla‐
tion pressures are applied as set values. The re‐
setting process is completed automatically dur‐
ing driving. The tires are shown in green and
"TPM active" is shown on the Control Display.
The trip can be interrupted at any time. If you
drive away again, the process resumes auto‐
matically.
If a flat tire is detected during a reset, all tires are
displayed in yellow.
Low tire pressure message
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
Check Control message is displayed.
▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
▷ The system was not reset after a wheel
change and thus warns based on the infla‐
tion pressures initialized last.
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with reg‐
ular tires* or run-flat tires*.
Run-flat
tires, refer to page 251, are labeled
with a circular symbol containing the letters
RSC marked on the tire sidewall.
When a low inflation pressure is indicated, DSC
Dynamic Stability Control is switched on if nec‐
essary.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires*
1. Identify the damaged tire.
Do this by checking the air pressure in all
four tires.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
If an identification is not possible, please
contact the service center.
2. Rectify the flat tire.
Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility System,
may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In
this case, have the electronics checked at
the next opportunity and have them re‐
placed if necessary.
Run-flat tires*
You
can continue driving with a damaged tire at
speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Do not continue driving without run-flat
tires
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not
equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving
may result in serious accidents.◀
Seite 92
92
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Safety
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the
next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
inflation pressure depends on the cargo load
and the driving style and conditions.
For a vehicle containing an average load, the
possible driving distance is approx. 50 miles/
80 km.
When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,
its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance, and altered self-steering
properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐
ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐
ing over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc.
Because
the possible driving distance depends
on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the
actual distance may be smaller or greater de‐
pending on the driving speed, road conditions,
external temperature, cargo load, etc.
Continued driving with a flat tire
Drive moderately and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance and altered self-steering prop‐
erties.◀
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed
and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could
come loose and cause an accident. Do not con‐
tinue
driving, and contact your service center.◀
Message when the system was not
reset
A Check Control message is displayed.
The system detected a wheel change but was
not reset.
Warnings regarding the current tire inflation
pressure are not reliable.
Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the
system.
Malfunction
The yellow warning lamp flashes and
then lights up continuously. A Check
Control message is displayed. No flat
tire can be detected.
Display in the following situations:
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted:
have the service center check it if necessary.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by
your service center.
▷ TPM could not be fully reset. Reset the sys‐
tem again.
▷ Disturbance by systems or devices with the
same radio frequency: after leaving the area
of the disturbance, the system automatically
becomes active again.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
System
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
flated
to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la‐
bel, you should determine the proper tire infla‐
tion pressure for those tires.) As an added safety
feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a
tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that il‐
luminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
Seite 93
93
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
or more of your tires is significantly under-in‐
flated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them
to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping
ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a sub‐
stitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached
the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been
equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not operating prop‐
erly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is com‐
bined with the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then re‐
main continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the mal‐
function indicator is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for
a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re‐
placement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Lane departure warning*
The concept
This system issues a warning at speeds above
approx. 40 mph/65 km/h if the vehicle is about
to leave the lane on roads with lane markings.
The steering wheel begins vibrating gently.
The system does not provide a warning if the
turn signal is set before leaving the lane.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The system can issue warnings at speeds above
approx. 40 mph/65 km/h.
The state is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Display
▷ Lines, arrow 1: the system is activated.
▷ Arrows, arrow 2: at least one lane marking
was detected and warnings can be issued.
Issued warning
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has
been detected, the steering wheel begins vi‐
brating.
If
the turn signal is set before changing the lane,
a warning is not issued.
End of warning
The warning ends:
▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.
▷ When returning to your own lane.
Seite 94
94
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Safety
▷ When braking hard.
▷ When using the turn signal.
System limits
Personal responsibility
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for
the driver's personal judgment of the course
of the road and the traffic situation.
In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steering
wheel, as you may lose control of the vehicle.◀
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In the event of worn, poorly visible, merging,
diverging,
or multiple lane markings such as
in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,
ice, dirt or water.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ When the lane markings are covered by ob‐
jects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered with stickers, etc.
Malfunctions
Steering wheel vibration
Frequent
activation of the steering wheel vibra‐
tion causes the system to overheat.
This causes the lane departure warning to be‐
come deactivated.
Let the system cool and reactivate it by pressing
the button.
Camera
The camera is located on the front of the interior
rearview mirror.
Keep the area in front of the interior rearview
mirror clear.
Active Blind Spot Detection
*
The concept
Two radar sensors below the rear bumper mon‐
itor the area behind and next to the vehicle at
speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.
The
system indicates whether there are vehicles
in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching from
behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2.
The lamp in the exterior mirror housing lights up
dimly.
Before you change lanes after setting the turn
signal, the system issues a warning in the situa‐
tions described above.
The lamp in the housing of the exterior mirror
flashes and the steering wheel vibrates.
Seite 95
95
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Switching on/off
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The system can issue warnings at speeds above
approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.
The state is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Display
Information stage
The dimmed lamp in the mirror housing indi‐
cates when there are vehicles in the blind spot
or approaching from behind.
Warning
If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the
critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly
and the lamp in the mirror housing flashes
brightly.
The warning stops when the turn signal is
switched
off, or the other vehicle leaves the crit‐
ical zone.
System limits
Personal responsibility
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic
situation.
In
the event of a warning, do not jerk the steering
wheel, as you may lose control over the vehi‐
cle.◀
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
Malfunctions
Steering wheel vibration
Frequent activation of the steering wheel vibra‐
tion causes the system to overheat.
This causes Active Blind Spot Detection to be‐
come deactivated.
Let the system cool and reactivate it by pressing
the button.
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located under the rear
bumper.
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ Dirty or icy bumper.
▷ Stickers on the bumper.
A Check Control message is displayed when the
system is not fully functional.
Seite 96
96
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Safety
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission
regulations. Operation is governed
by the following:
FCC ID:
▷ NBG009014A.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful interfer‐
ence, and
▷ this device must accept any interference re‐
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Brake force display*
The concept
▷ During normal brake application, the outer
brake lamps light up.
▷ During heavy brake application, the inner
brake lamps light up in addition.
Seite 97
97
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Driving stability control systems
Antilock Brake System ABS
ABS
prevents locking of the wheels during brak‐
ing.
The vehicle remains steerable even during full
brake applications, thus increasing active
safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the maximum braking
force boost. It thus helps to achieve the shortest
possible braking distance during full braking.
This system utilizes all of the benefits provided
by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the full braking.
Adaptive brake assistant
In combination with the Active Cruise Control,
this system ensures that the brakes respond
even more rapidly when braking in critical situa‐
tions. Refer also to Collision warning, refer to
page 110.
Drive-off assistant
This system supports driving away on gradients.
The parking brake is not required.
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive away with‐
out delay.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Depending on the vehicle load, the vehicle may
roll back slightly.
Driving off without delay
After
releasing the foot brake, start driving
without delay, since the drive-off assistant will
not hold the vehicle in place for more than ap‐
prox. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin rolling
back.◀
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
The concept
DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels
when driving away and accelerating.
DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐
tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Subject
to physical limits, DSC helps to keep the vehicle
on a steady course by reducing engine speed
and by applying brakes at individual wheels.
Adjust your driving style to the situation
An appropriate driving style is always the
responsibility of the driver.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even
with DSC.
Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety
margin by driving in a risky manner.◀
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
DSC can be deactivated. To do this, activate the
DSC OFF program.
This is performed via the Dynamic Driving Con‐
trol, refer to page 102.
Indicator/warning lamps
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐
trols the drive forces and brake forces.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has
failed.
Seite 98
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Driving stability control systems
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control
The concept
The
DTC system is a version of the DSC in which
forward momentum is optimized.
The system ensures maximum forward momen‐
tum on special road conditions, e.g., unplowed
snowy roads, but driving stability is limited.
It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri‐
ate caution.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC un‐
der the following special circumstances:
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,
snow-covered roads.
▷ When rocking the vehicle or driving off in
deep snow or on loose surfaces.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic
Traction Control
The
system can be deactivated/activated via the
TRACTION and SPORT+ programs of the Dy‐
namic Driving Control, refer to page 102.
xDrive*
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve‐
hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC
further optimize traction and driving dynamics.
The xDrive all-wheel-drive system variably dis‐
tributes the drive forces to the front and rear
axles as demanded by the driving situation and
road surface.
HDC Hill Descent Control*
The concept
HDC is a downhill driving assistant that auto‐
matically controls vehicle speed on steep down‐
hill gradients. Without requiring brake applica‐
tion, the vehicle moves at slightly more than
twice walking speed.
You can activate the Hill Descent Control at
speeds below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. When
driving downhill, the vehicle reduces its speed
to approx. twice walking speed and then keeps
its speed constant.
While you are actively braking, the system is on
standby.
The system does not brake the vehicle
during this time.
Increasing or decreasing vehicle speed
You can specify your desired speed in the range
from approx. 4 mph/6 km/h to approx. 15 mph/
25 km/h using the rocker switch of the cruise
control on the steering wheel. You can change
the vehicle speed by pressing on the accelerator
lightly.
▷ Press up the rocker switch to the point of
resistance: the speed increases gradually.
▷ Press up the rocker switch past the point of
resistance: the speed increases while the
rocker switch is pressed.
▷ Press down the rocker switch to the point of
resistance: the speed decreases gradually.
▷ Press down the rocker switch past the point
of resistance: when driving forward, the
speed
decreases to approx. 6 mph/10 km/h;
when reversing, the speed decreases to ap‐
prox. 4 mph/6 km/h.
Seite 99
99
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Activating HDC
Press the button; the LED above the but‐
ton lights up.
Deactivating HDC
Press the button again and the LED goes
out. HDC is automatically deactivated
above approx. 37 mph/60 km/h.
Display in the instrument cluster
The selected speed is displayed
in the speedometer.
▷ Green: the system is actively
braking the vehicle.
▷ Orange: the system is on
standby.
Malfunction
A message is displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter. HDC is not available, e.g., due to elevated
brake temperatures.
Adaptive Drive*
The concept
Adaptive
Drive* includes the following systems:
▷ Dynamic Drive, refer to page 100
▷ Dynamic Damping Control, refer to
page 100
The system increases driving stability and driv‐
ing comfort.
Dynamic Drive*
The concept
Dynamic Drive reduces the lateral inclination of
the vehicle that occurs during rapid driving in
curves or during quick evasive maneuvers.
Driving stability and driving comfort are in‐
creased
under all driving conditions. The system
utilizes active stabilizer bars on the front and rear
axles that react immediately to all driving situa‐
tions.
Programs
The system offers two different programs.
The programs can be selected via Dynamic Driv‐
ing Control, refer to page 102.
SPORT
Sporty tuning for greater driving agility.
NORMAL
Comfort-oriented tuning for optimal comfort.
Dynamic Damping Control*
The concept
This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐
tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐
eling on uneven road surfaces.
The system enhances driving dynamics and
comfort as required for the road surface and
driving style.
Programs
The system offers three different programs.
The programs can be selected via Dynamic Driv‐
ing Control, refer to page 102.
SPORT
Consistently sporty control of the shock absorb‐
ers for greater driving agility.
Seite 100
100
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Driving stability control systems
NORMAL
Balanced tuning between the COMFORT and
SPORT programs.
COMFORT
Comfort-oriented
tuning of the shock absorbers
for optimal traveling comfort.
Integral Active Steering*
The concept
Integral Active Steering is a combination of Ac‐
tive Steering and rear axle steering.
Active Steering varies the steering angle of the
wheels in relation to the steering wheel move‐
ment as a function of the speed.
At speeds up to approx. 37 mph/60 km/h, e.g.,
in curves, the steering angle is increased, i.e.,
steering becomes more direct.
The rear axle steering acts to increase maneu‐
verability by turning the rear wheels slightly in a
direction opposite to the front wheels.
At higher speeds, the steering angle is increas‐
ingly reduced.
The rear wheels are turned to the same angle as
the front wheels.
In critical situations, Integral Active Steering can
specifically steer the front and rear wheels to
stabilize the vehicle before the driver intervenes,
e.g., when braking where road conditions differ
on the left and right sides of the vehicle.
Initializing
In rare cases, it may become necessary to initi‐
alize the Integral Active Steering.
The warning lamp lights up. A Check
Control message is displayed.
1. With the engine running, turn the steering
wheel
all the way to the left and right several
times in a uniform manner until the warning
lamp disappears.
2. Have the system checked if the warning
lamp does not go out after moving the steer‐
ing wheel approx. 6 times or if the steering
wheel is at an angle.
Using snow chains
Ensure
that the rear axle steering is deactivated
when using snow chains, refer to page 252.
Programs
The system offers two different programs.
The programs can be selected via Dynamic Driv‐
ing Control, refer to page 102.
SPORT
Consistently sporty tuning of the Integral Active
Steering for greater driving agility.
NORMAL
Balanced tuning of the Integral Active Steering
for optimal traveling comfort.
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, the steering wheel
must be turned further, while the vehicle re‐
sponds more sensitively to steering wheel
movements in the higher speed range.
The stability-enhancing intervention may be de‐
activated.
Proceed cautiously and drive defensively.
Have the system checked.
Self-leveling suspension*
The concept
The self-leveling suspension keeps the vehicle
height and ground clearance constant. The
height of the vehicle at the rear axle is main‐
tained at a predefined level under all load con‐
ditions.
The system ensures consistent comfort by
keeping spring travel constant in all driving sit‐
uations.
Seite 101
101
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed. A mal‐
function has occurred in the self-leveling sus‐
pension. Vehicle handling may be altered and
driving
comfort may be noticeably reduced. Visit
your nearest service center.
Dynamic Driving Control*
The concept
Dynamic Driving Control can be used to adjust
the driving dynamics of the vehicle. Several pro‐
grams are available for this purpose; they can be
activated using the two Dynamic Driving Control
buttons.
Operating the programs
Press the button Program
DSC OFF
TRACTION
SPORT+
SPORT
NORMAL
COMFORT*
For Dynamic Damper Control*, the lower button
is labeled with COMFORT.
Automatic program change
The
system automatically switches to NORMAL
in the following situations:
▷ Failure of Integral Active Steering*.
▷ Failure of Dynamic Damping Control*.
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
DSC OFF
Driving stability is limited during acceleration
and when driving in bends.
Stabilizing interventions by the
Integral Active
Steering* system are only performed by the rear
axle steering.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
Activating DSC OFF
Press and hold the button, but not lon‐
ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the
indicator lamp for the DSC lights up in the in‐
strument cluster and DSC OFF is displayed in
the tachometer.
The DSC system is switched off.
Deactivating DSC OFF
Press the button.
DSC OFF and the DSC indicator lamp
go out.
Indicator/warning lamps
When DSC OFF is activated, DSC OFF is dis‐
played in the tachometer.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC OFF
is activated.
TRACTION
Maximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC
Dynamic Traction Control is switched on. Driv‐
ing stability is limited during acceleration and
when driving in bends.
Activating TRACTION
Press the button.
TRACTION
is displayed in the tachom‐
eter.
The DSC indicator lamp in the instrument clus‐
ter lights up.
Deactivating TRACTION
Press the button again.
TRACTION and the DSC indicator lamp
go out.
Indicator/warning lamps
When TRACTION is activated, TRACTION is
displayed in the tachometer.
Seite 102
102
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Driving stability control systems
The indicator lamp lights up: TRACTION
is activated.
SPORT+
Sporty driving with optimized chassis and sus‐
pension during limited driving stabilization.
Dynamic Traction Control is switched on.
The driver handles several of the stabilization
tasks.
Activating SPORT+
Press the button repeatedly until
SPORT+ appears in the tachometer
and the DSC indicator lamp lights up in the in‐
strument cluster.
Indicator/warning lamps
SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster.
The indicator lamp lights up: DTC Dy‐
namic Traction Control is activated.
SPORT
Consistently
sporty tuning of the suspension for
greater driving agility with maximum driving sta‐
bilization.
The program can be configured to individual
specifications.
The configuration is stored for the remote con‐
trol currently in use.
Activating SPORT
Press the button repeatedly until
SPORT appears in the tachometer.
Configuring SPORT
When the display is activated on the Control
Display, refer to page 104, the sport program
can be set to individual specifications.
After the sport program is activated, select
"Configure SPORT mode" on the displayed
panel and configure the program.
Optionally, the sport program can be configured
before it is activated:
1. "Settings"
2. "SPORT mode"
3. Configure the program.
This configuration is retrieved when the sport
program is activated.
NORMAL
For
a balanced tuning with maximum driving sta‐
bilization.
Activating NORMAL
Press the button repeatedly until the
program display in the tachometer
goes out.
In certain situations, the system automatically
changes to the NORMAL program, automatic
program change, refer to page 102.
COMFORT*
Comfort-oriented tuning of the shock absorbers
for optimal traveling comfort with maximum
driving stabilization.
Activating COMFORT
Press the button repeatedly until COM‐
FORT appears in the tachometer.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Selected program
The selected program is dis‐
played in the tachometer.
Seite 103
103
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Program selection
Pressing the button displays a list of the select‐
able programs.
Display on the Control Display
Program changes can be displayed briefly on
the Control Display.
To do so, make the following settings:
1. "Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Display driving settings"
Seite 104
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Driving stability control systems
Driving comfort
Active Cruise Control with
Stop & Go function, ACC*
The concept
This system can be used to select a desired
speed that the vehicle will maintain automati‐
cally on clear roads.
To
the extent possible, the system automatically
adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle ahead of
you.
The distance that the vehicle maintains to the
vehicle ahead of you can be varied.
For safety reasons, it depends on the speed.
To maintain a certain distance, the system au‐
tomatically decelerates, applies the brakes
lightly, or accelerates again if the vehicle ahead
begins moving faster.
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, the
system is able to detect this within the given
system limits. If the vehicle ahead of your drives
away again from a halt, your vehicle is able to
accelerate if operated accordingly.
Even if some time passes before the vehicle
drives away again, the BMW can still be accel‐
erated automatically and simply.
As soon as the road is clear, it accelerates to the
desired speed.
The speed is also maintained on downhill gra‐
dients, but may not be maintained on uphill
slopes if engine power is insufficient.
Buttons at a glance
1 System on/off, interrupt
2 Resume speed
3 Store speed*
4 Reduce distance
5 Store, maintain/change speed
6 Increase distance
Switching on/off and interrupting
cruise control
Switching on
Press
the button on the steering wheel.
The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
light up and the marking in the speedometer is
set to the current speed.
Cruise control can be used.
Switching off
Deactivated or interrupted system
If the system is deactivated or interrupted,
actively intervene by braking and, if necessary,
with evasive maneuvers; otherwise, there is the
danger of an accident occurring.◀
If switching off the system while stationary,
press on the brake pedal at the same time.
Press the button.
▷ If active: press twice.
▷ If interrupted: press once.
Seite 105
105
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
and distance are deleted.
Interrupting
When active, press the button.
If
interrupting the system while stationary, press
on the brake pedal at the same time.
The system is automatically interrupted if:
▷ The brakes are applied.
▷ The clutch pedal is depressed.
▷ Transmission position D is disengaged.
▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated
or DSC is deactivated.
▷ DSC is actively controlling stability.
▷ The safety belt and the driver's door are
opened when the vehicle is standing.
▷ The system has not detected objects for an
extended period, e.g., on a road with very lit‐
tle traffic without road edge line markings.
▷ Radar sensor is soiled.
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press the button*.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly
displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in
the instrument cluster, refer to page 107.
When cruise control is maintained or stored,
DSC
Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
necessary.
Changing, maintaining, and storing the
speed
The rocker switch can be pressed while the sys‐
tem is interrupted to maintain and store the cur‐
rent speed. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is
switched on, if necessary.
Adapting the desired speed
Adapt the desired speed to the road con‐
ditions
and be ready to brake at all times; other‐
wise, there is the danger of an accident occur‐
ring.◀
Speed differences
Great speed differences with vehicles
driving ahead of you, e.g., when rapidly ap‐
proaching a truck or when another vehicle
swerves into your own lane, cannot be compen‐
sated for by the system.◀
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is
clear.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the
point of resistance, the desired speed in‐
creases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/
1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by a maximum of
5 mph/10 km/h. max. adjustable speed:
110 mph/180 km/h.
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the
action.
Distance
Selecting a distance
Adjust
the distance according to the traffic
and weather conditions; otherwise, there is the
danger of an accident occurring. Maintain the
prescribed safety distance.◀
Seite 106
106
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Driving comfort
Reduce distance
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
The
selected distance, refer to page 108, is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Increase distance
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
The selected distance, refer to page 108, is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Calling up the desired speed and
distance
While driving
Press the button with the system
switched on.
In the following cases, the stored speed value is
deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
While standing
Before leaving the vehicle, secure it
against rolling.
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
ning, engage position P of the automatic trans‐
mission and apply the parking brake. Otherwise,
the vehicle may begin to roll.◀
The system brought the vehicle to a complete
standstill.
▷ Green mark in the speedometer during a
brief idle phase:
The vehicle ahead of you drives away while
the mark is green: your vehicle accelerates
without anything having to be done.
▷ Switch to orange of the mark in the speed‐
ometer after approx. 2 sec.:
The
vehicle ahead of you drives away, while
the mark is orange: in order to accelerate,
briefly press the accelerator or press the
RES button or SET button.
Rolling bars in the distance indicator mean that
the vehicle ahead of you has driven off.
You actively braked your vehicle to a halt by
pressing on the brake pedal and it is standing
behind another vehicle:
1. Press the button to call up a stored
desired speed.
2. Release the brake pedal.
3. Press on the accelerator briefly, or press the
RES button or the rocker switch when the
vehicle ahead of you drives away.
Displays in the instrument cluster
1 Display of desired speed
2 Distance to vehicle ahead of you
3 Vehicle symbol
4 Brief status display
Desired speed
Marking in the speedometer
▷ The marking lights up in
green: the system is active.
▷ The marking lights up in or‐
ange: the system has been
interrupted.
▷ The marking does not light up: the system is
switched off.
Brief status display
Selected desired speed.
If --- appears briefly on the display for Check
Control
messages, it is possible that the system
Seite 107
107
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
requirements for operation are currently not
met.
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
The selected distance to the vehicle driving
ahead of you is shown.
Distance display
Distance 1
Distance 2
Distance 3
Distance 4
This value is set after the system is
switched on.
The system has been interrupted or
distance control is deactivated be‐
cause the accelerator is being
pressed; a vehicle was not detected.
Distance control is deactivated be‐
cause the accelerator is being
pressed; a vehicle was detected.
Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven
away.
Indicator/warning lamps
Personal responsibility
The indicator and warning lamps do not
relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt
his
or her desired driving speed and style to the
traffic conditions.◀
The vehicle symbol lights up in orange:
A vehicle has been detected ahead of
you.
The vehicle symbol flashes orange:
The conditions are not adequate for op‐
erating the system.
The system was deactivated but applies the
brakes until you actively assume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator.
The vehicle symbol flashes red and an
acoustic signal sounds:
You
are requested to intervene by brak‐
ing or making an evasive maneuver.
System limits
Speed range
Best results are achieved when using the sys‐
tem on well-developed roads and highways.
The desired speed can be selected between
20 mph/30 km/h to 110 mph/180 km/h.
The system can also be activated when station‐
ary.
Comply with the legal speed limit in every situa‐
tion when using the system.
Detection range
The detection capacity of the system and the
automatic braking capacity are limited.
Two-wheeled vehicles driving ahead of you
for instance might not be detected.
Limited detection capacity
Because of the limits to the detection ca‐
pacity, you should be alert at all times so that you
can intervene actively, if necessary; otherwise,
there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀
Deceleration
The system does not decelerate when a sta‐
tionary obstacle is located in the same lane, e.g.,
a vehicle at a red traffic light or at the end of traffic
congestion.
The system also does not respond to:
▷ Pedestrians or similarly slow road users.
▷ Red traffic lights.
▷ Stationary objects.
▷ Cross traffic.
▷ Approaching traffic.
Seite 108
108
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Driving comfort
No warnings
A warning may not be issued when ap‐
proaching a stationary or very slow-moving ob‐
stacle.
You must react yourself; otherwise, there
is the danger of an accident occurring.◀
Swerving vehicles
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected
until it is completely within the same lane as your
vehicle.
Swerving vehicles
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
swerves into your lane, the system may not be
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐
tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐
ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g.,
when rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehi‐
cle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the
system requests that the driver intervene by
braking and carrying out evasive maneuvers, if
necessary. You must react yourself; otherwise,
there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀
Unexpected lane change
If a vehicle ahead of you unexpectedly moves
into another lane from behind a stopped vehicle,
you yourself must react, as the system does not
react to stopped vehicles.
Cornering
If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the
speed is reduced slightly in the curve, although
curves cannot be anticipated in advance. There‐
fore, drive into a curve at an appropriate speed.
In tight curves, situations may result due to the
restricted detection range of the system in
which a vehicle driving ahead of you may not be
detected at all, or not until after a considerable
delay.
When approaching a curve, the system may re‐
act briefly to the vehicles in the next lane due to
the bend of the curve. Any deceleration of the
vehicle by the system can be compensated for
by briefly accelerating. After the accelerator
pedal is released, the system becomes active
again and independently controls the speed.
Driving away
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive
away
automatically, e.g., on steep inclines or be‐
hind bumps in the road.
Automatic deactivation
For legal reasons, the system is deactivated at
speeds below 20 mph/30 km/h in the vicinity of
radio astronomy stations.
Radar sensor
Position
Radar sensor
Dirty or covered sensor
A
dirty or covered sensor may hinder the detec‐
tion of vehicles.
▷ If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re‐
move layers of snow and ice carefully.
▷ Do not cover the view field of the radar sen‐
sor.
Malfunction
The system cannot be activated if the sensor is
not aligned correctly. This may be caused by
damage incurred during parking, for example.
A Check Control message is displayed if the
system fails.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Seite 109
109
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Commission regulations. Operation is governed
by the following:
FCC ID:
▷ OAYARS3-A
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful interfer‐
ence, and
▷ this device must accept any interference re‐
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Note
To reduce electromagnetic effects, please use
properly.
The standard SAR value is 2.0 W/kg; the tested
value of this product is 0.751 W/kg.
NCC declaration:
1. Companies or persons without authoriza‐
tion should not change the frequency, in‐
crease the power, or change the character‐
istics or functions of the original design of
low-power radio frequency devices with
type approval.
2. Low-power radio frequency devices should
not impair legal communication or flight
safety.
If this type of impairment is detected,
the device should be switched off immedi‐
ately. In this case, please contact the man‐
ufacturer and only use the product after the
problem has been corrected.
3. The "legal communication" specified above
refers to communication in accordance with
telecommunication regulations. Low-power
devices should withstand interference from
legal communication and ISM devices.
Collision warning*
The concept
The system issues a two-phase warning of a
danger of collision at speeds above approx.
10 mph/15 km/h.
The collision warning is available even if cruise
control has been deactivated.
It responds to moving objects that are within the
detection range of the radar system.
When the vehicle is intentionally brought into
contact with an object, the collision warning is
delayed to avoid false warnings.
Warning stages
Prewarning
This
warning is issued, for example, when there
is the impending danger of a collision or the dis‐
tance to the vehicle ahead is too small.
Acute warning
Warning of the imminent danger of a collision
when the vehicle approaches another object at
a relatively high differential speed.
Switching the warning function on/off
Seite 110
110
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Driving comfort
Press the button
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The state is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Configuring the prewarning
After the warning function is switched on, the
following can be set via the iDrive:
▷ The prewarning can be switched on/off.
▷ The time of the prewarning can be set.
These settings have no effect on the time of the
warning from the Active Cruise Control* that
prompts the driver to intervene or brake.
Display
The collision warning can be issued in the in‐
strument cluster, in the Head-up Display*, and
acoustically.
Instrument cluster
The vehicle lights up in red: prewarning
The vehicle flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning
You
are requested to intervene by brak‐
ing or making an evasive maneuver.
Adapting your speed and driving style
The display does not relieve the driver of
the responsibility to adapt his or her driving
speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀
System limits
Be alert
Due to system limitations, warnings may
be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or
improperly. Therefore, always be alert and ready
to intervene; otherwise, there is the danger of an
accident occurring.◀
Detection range
The detection capacity of the radar sensor and
the collision warning has limitations.
This may result in the warning not being issued
or being issued late.
For
example, the following situations may not be
detected:
▷ Slow moving objects when you approach
them at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
your vehicle.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
▷ Pedestrians.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the radar sensor is dirty or covered.
Prewarning sensitivity
If the prewarning setting is too sensitive, there
may be an excess of false warnings.
Cruise control
The concept
The system is functional at speeds beginning at
approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
It maintains the speed that was set using the
control elements on the steering wheel.
The system brakes on downhill gradients if en‐
gine braking action is insufficient.
Unfavorable conditions
Do not use the system if unfavorable con‐
ditions make it impossible to drive at a constant
speed, for instance:
▷ On curvy roads.
▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or on
a loose road surface.
Seite 111
111
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle
and cause an accident.◀
Controls
Buttons at a glance
1 System on/off, interrupt
2 Resume speed
3 Store speed*
4 Store, maintain/change speed
Switching on
Press
the button on the steering wheel.
The marking in the speedometer is set to the
current speed.
Cruise control can be used.
Switching off
Deactivated or interrupted system
If the system is deactivated or interrupted,
actively intervene by braking and, if necessary,
with evasive maneuvers; otherwise, there is the
danger of an accident occurring.◀
Press the button.
▷ If active: press twice.
▷ If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
is deleted.
Interrupting
When active, press the button.
The system is automatically interrupted if:
▷ The brakes are applied.
▷ The clutch pedal is depressed.
▷ Transmission position D is disengaged.
▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated
or DSC is deactivated.
▷ DSC is actively controlling stability.
▷ HDC is activated.
Maintaining/storing the current speed
Press the button.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly
displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in
the speedometer, refer to page 113.
When cruise control is maintained or stored,
DSC
Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
necessary.
Change, maintain speed
The rocker switch can be pressed while inter‐
rupted to maintain and store the current speed.
Adapting the desired speed
Adapt the desired speed to the road con‐
ditions and be ready to brake at all times; other‐
wise, there is the danger of an accident occur‐
ring.◀
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
Seite 112
112
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Driving comfort
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is
clear.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the
point of resistance, the desired speed in‐
creases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/
1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by a maximum of
5 mph/10 km/h.
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance
point and holding it accelerates or deceler‐
ates the vehicle without requiring pressure
on
the accelerator. After the rocker switch is
released, the vehicle maintains its final
speed. Pressing the switch beyond the re‐
sistance point causes the vehicle to accel‐
erate more rapidly.
Resuming the desired speed
Press the button.
The stored speed is reached and maintained.
Displays in the instrument cluster
1 Display of desired speed
2 Indicator lamp
3 Brief status display
Desired speed
Display in the speedometer:
▷ The marking lights up in
green: the system is active.
▷ The marking lights up in or‐
ange: the system has been
interrupted.
▷ The marking does not light up: the system is
switched off.
Brief status display
Brief display in the speedometer:
Selected desired speed
If --- appears briefly, conditions may not be ad‐
equate to operate the system.
PDC Park Distance Control*
The concept
In
addition to the PDC Park Distance Control, the
backup camera*, refer to page 116, can be
switched on.
PDC supports you when parking. Objects that
you are approaching slowly in front of or behind
your vehicle are indicated with:
▷ Signal tones.
▷ Visual display.
Measurement
Measurements are made by ultrasound sensors
in the bumpers.
The range is approx. 6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given:
▷ By the front* sensors and the two rear cor‐
ner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm.
▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx. 5 ft/
1.50 m.
System limits
Check the traffic situation as well
PDC cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver's personal judgment of the traffic situa‐
tion. Check the traffic situation around the vehi‐
Seite 113
113
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
cle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident
could result from road users or objects located
outside of the PDC detection range.
Loud
noises from outside and inside the vehicle
may prevent you from hearing the PDC's signal
tone.◀
Avoid driving quickly with PDC
Avoid approaching an object quickly.
Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yet
active.
For technical reasons, the system may other‐
wise be too late in issuing a warning.◀
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
The detection of objects can reach the physical
limits of ultrasonic measurement, for instance:
▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With low objects.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
move into the blind area of the sensors before or
after a continuous tone sounds.
High, protruding objects such as ledges may not
be detected.
False warnings
PDC may issue a warning under the following
conditions even though there is no obstacle
within the detection range:
▷ In heavy rain.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered in
ice.
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
▷ On rough road surfaces.
▷ In large buildings with right angles and
smooth walls, e.g., in underground garages.
▷ In heavy exhaust.
▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,
sweeping machines, high pressure steam
cleaners or neon lights.
Switching on automatically
Select transmission position R with the engine
running.
Switching off automatically
The
system switches off and the LED goes out:
▷ After approx. 160 ft/50 m when driving for‐
ward.
▷ Above approx. 22 mph/36 km/h when driv‐
ing forward.
Switch on the system again if necessary.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Signal tones
When approaching an object, an intermittent
tone
is sounded that indicates the position of the
object. For example, if an object is detected to
the left rear of the vehicle, a signal tone sounds
from the left rear speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object becomes,
the shorter the intervals.
If the distance to a detected object is less than
approx. 12 in/30 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
If objects are located both in front of and behind
the vehicle, an alternating continuous signal is
sounded.
The intermittent tone is interrupted after approx.
3 seconds:
Seite 114
114
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Driving comfort
▷ If the vehicle stops in front of an object that
is detected by only one of the corner sen‐
sors.
▷ If moving parallel to a wall.
The signal tone is switched off:
▷ When the vehicle moves away from an ob‐
ject by more than approx. 4 in/10 cm.
▷ When transmission position P is engaged.
Volume
You can set the volume of the PDC signal tone,
refer to page 171.
The
setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object can be
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are
farther away are displayed on the Control Dis‐
play before a signal tone sounds.
A display appears as soon as Park Distance
Control (PDC) is activated.
If the backup camera image was selected last, it
again appears on the display. To switch to PDC:
1.
"Rear view camera" Select the symbol
on the Control Display.
2. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Zoom view*
On
the left part of the display screen, the vehicle
is shown enlarged.
▷ Transmission position D engaged: front
area of the vehicle.
▷ Transmission position R engaged: rear area
of the vehicle.
Display on the Control Display
Switching
on the backup camera via the
iDrive
With PDC activated:
"Rear view camera"
The
backup camera image is displayed. The set‐
ting is stored for the remote control currently in
use.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
On the Control Display, the areas in front of and
behind the vehicle are shaded. PDC has failed.
Have the system checked.
To ensure full operability:
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
▷ When using a pressure washer, keep the
sprayer moving and maintain a distance of
at least 12 in/30 cm from the sensors.
Surround View*
The concept
Surround View includes the following systems:
▷ Backup camera, refer to page 116.
▷ Side View, refer to page 118.
▷ Top View, refer to page 119.
It assists the driver when parking, maneuvering
and on blind driveways and intersections.
Seite 115
115
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Backup camera*
The concept
The
backup camera provides assistance in park‐
ing and maneuvering backwards. The area be‐
hind the vehicle is shown on the Control Display.
System limits
Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident
could result from road users or objects located
outside the picture area of the backup camera.◀
Detection of objects
High, protruding objects such as ledges
may not be detected by the backup camera.◀
Switching on automatically
Select transmission position R with the engine
running.
The backup camera image is displayed if the
system was switched on via the iDrive.
Switching off automatically
The system switches off and the LED goes out:
▷ After approx. 33 ft/10 m when driving for‐
ward.
▷ Above approx. 9 mph/15 km/h when driving
forward.
Switch on the system again if necessary.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The PDC is shown on the Control Display.
Switch
on the backup camera via the iDrive, refer
to page 117.
Assistance functions
Functional requirement
▷ The backup camera is switched on.
▷ The trunk lid is fully closed.
Pathway lines
▷ Can be shown in the backup camera image
when in transmission position R.
▷ Help you to estimate the space required
when parking and maneuvering on level
roads.
▷ Are dependent on the current steering angle
and are continuously adjusted to the steer‐
ing wheel movements.
Show the parking aid lines, refer to page 117.
Turning circle lines
▷ Can be shown in the backup camera image.
Seite 116
116
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Driving comfort
▷ Show the course of the smallest possible
turning circle on a level road.
▷ Only one turning circle line is displayed
when the steering wheel is turned.
Show the parking aid lines, refer to page 117.
Parking using pathway and turning
circle lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning circle
lines lead to within the limits of the parking
space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the pathway line covers the corresponding
turning circle line.
Obstacle marking
▷ Spatially-shaped markings can be shown in
the backup camera image.
Their colored steps match the markings of the
PDC. This simplifies estimation of the distance
to the object shown.
Activating the assistance functions
More
than one assistance function can be active
at the same time.
Showing the parking aid lines
"Parking aid lines"
Pathway and turning circle lines are displayed.
Showing the obstacle marking
"Obstacle marking"
Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.
Display on the Control Display
Switching on the backup camera via
iDrive
With PDC activated:
"Rear view camera"
The
backup camera image is displayed. The set‐
ting is stored for the remote control currently in
use.
Brightness
With the backup camera switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Contrast
With the backup camera switched on:
1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Seite 117
117
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Camera
The camera lens is located in the handle of the
trunk lid. The image quality may be impaired by
dirt.
Clean the lens, refer to page 273.
Side View*
The concept
Side View provides an early look at cross traffic
at
blind driveways and intersections. Road users
concealed by obstacles to the left and right of
the vehicle can only be detected relatively late
from the driver's seat. To improve visibility, two
cameras in the front of the vehicle record the
traffic situation on each side.
System limits
The maximum recording range of the camera is
330 ft/100 m.
Display
The images from both cameras are shown si‐
multaneously on the Control Display.
Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle on blind driveways and intersections with
your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could re‐
sult from road users or objects located outside
the picture area of the Side View cameras.◀
Switching off automatically
System switches off: above approx. 9 mph/
15 km/h.
Switch on the system again if necessary.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
Display on the Control Display
The traffic area to the left and right is displayed
on the Control Display.
Guidelines at the bottom of the image show the
position of the front of the vehicle.
Brightness
With the Side View switched on:
1. "Brightness"
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Contrast
With the Side View switched on:
1. "Contrast"
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Seite 118
118
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Driving comfort
Cameras
The two camera lenses are located on the sides
of the bumper.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt.
Clean the lens, refer to page 273.
Top View*
The concept
Top
View assists you in parking and maneuver‐
ing. The area around the doors and the road area
around the vehicle are shown on the Control
Display for this purpose.
Capturing the image
The image is captured by two cameras
integrated in the exterior mirrors and by the
backup camera.
The range equals:
▷ approx. 10 ft/3 m to the side.
▷ approx. 7 ft/2 m to the rear.
In this way, obstacles up to the height of the ex‐
terior mirrors are detected early.
System limits
Top View cannot be used in the following situa‐
tions:
▷ With a door open.
▷ With the trunk lid open.
▷ With an exterior mirror folded in.
▷ In poor light.
A Check Control message is displayed in some
of these situations.
Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident
could result from road users or objects located
outside the picture area of the cameras.◀
Switching on automatically
Select transmission position R with the engine
running.
The Top View and PDC images are displayed if
the system is switched on via iDrive.
Switching off automatically
The system switches off and the LED goes out:
▷ After approx. 160 ft/50 m when driving for‐
ward.
▷ Above approx. 22 mph/36 km/h when driv‐
ing forward.
Switch on the system again if necessary.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
If Top View is displayed, switch on the backup
camera via the iDrive, refer to page 120.
Visual warning
The
approach of the vehicle to an object can be
shown on the Control Display.
When the distance to an object is small, a red bar
is shown in front of the vehicle, as it is in the PDC
display.
Seite 119
119
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
The display appears as soon as Top View is ac‐
tivated.
If
the backup camera image was selected last, it
again appears on the display. To switch to Top
View:
"Rear view camera" Select the symbol on
the Control Display.
The
setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Display on the Control Display
Switching on the backup camera via
iDrive
With Top View switched on:
"Rear view camera"
The
backup camera image is displayed. The set‐
ting is stored for the remote control currently in
use.
Brightness
With Top View switched on:
1.
"Brightness"
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Contrast
With Top View switched on:
1. "Contrast"
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Displaying the turning circle and
pathway lines
▷ The static, red turning circle line shows the
space needed to the side of the vehicle
when the steering wheel is turned all the
way.
▷ The variable, green pathway line assists you
in assessing the amount of space actually
needed to the side of the vehicle.
The pathway line is dependent on the cur‐
rent steering angle and is continuously ad‐
justed with the steering wheel movement.
"Parking aid lines"
Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed.
Cameras
The objectives of the Top View cameras are lo‐
cated at the bottom of the exterior mirror hous‐
ings.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt.
Clean the lens, refer to page 273.
Night Vision with pedestrian
detection*
The concept
Night Vision with pedestrian detection is a night
vision system.
An infrared camera records the area in front of
the vehicle and displays the image on the Con‐
trol Display.
The picture is a heat image. The system has an
integrated pedestrian detection function that
detects pedestrians and cyclists. Warm objects
that are similar in shape to human beings are
detected by the system.
Seite 120
120
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Driving comfort
Personal responsibility
Night Vision cannot replace the driver's
personal judgment of the visibility conditions
and
the traffic situation. The view ahead and the
actual visibility conditions must always be the
basis on which the vehicle speed is adjusted;
otherwise, there is a risk to road safety.◀
Heat image
The image shows the heat radiated by objects
in the field of view of the camera.
Warm objects have a light appearance and cold
objects, a dark appearance.
The ability to detect an object depends on the
temperature
difference between the object and
the background and on the level of heat radiation
emitted by the object. Objects that are similar in
temperature to the environment or that radiate
very little heat are difficult to detect.
For safety reasons, when driving at speeds
above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and in low ambient
light, the image is only displayed when the low
beams are switched on.
A still image is displayed at regular intervals for
a fraction of a second.
Pedestrian detection
The pedestrian detection and warning system
only
operates in darkness and only when a heat
image is displayed.
Warm objects that are similar in shape to human
beings are detected by the system.
People detected by the system are displayed
with a slight yellow hue.
Under good ambient conditions, the pedestrian
detection system operates within a range of ap‐
prox. 50 ft/15 m to approx. 330 ft/100 m.
Environmental influences can limit the availabil‐
ity of pedestrian detection.
If
pedestrian detection is not available, a symbol
is displayed in the heat image.
This symbol disappears when the function be‐
comes available again.
Seite 121
121
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Warning of people in danger
If the system detects a person in the defined
area
in front of the vehicle and if there is the dan‐
ger of a collision with this person, a warning
symbol appears in the Control Display and
Head-up Display*.
Although both the shape and the heat radiation
are analyzed, false warnings cannot be ruled out.
Warning area in front of the vehicle
The warning area in front of the vehicle is divided
into two areas.
▷ Central area 1 directly in front of the vehicle.
▷ Expanded area 2 to the right and left.
The entire area moves along with the vehicle in
the direction of the steering angle and changes
with
the vehicle speed. As the vehicle speed in‐
creases, the area becomes longer and wider, for
example.
Symbols
This symbol is displayed when a person
is detected in the central area, arrow 1,
immediately in front of the vehicle.
This symbol is displayed when a person
detected in the extended area, arrow 2,
is moving from the right or left to the central area.
Display in the Head-up Display
*
The warning is simultaneously dis‐
played in the Head-up Display and in the
Control Display. The displayed symbol
can vary with the people detected. For people
located in the central area, the distance to the
person is indicated by the size of the symbol.
System limits
Basic limits
System operation is limited in situations such as
the following:
▷ On steep hills, in steep depressions or in
tight curves.
▷ When the camera is dirty or the protective
glass is damaged.
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ At very high external temperatures.
Limits of pedestrian detection
Animals are not detected by the pedestrian de‐
tection
function, even if they are clearly visible in
the image.
Limited pedestrian detection:
▷ When people are fully or partially covered,
especially when their heads are covered.
▷ When people are not in an upright position,
e.g., when lying down.
▷ Cyclists on unconventional bicycles (e.g.,
recumbent bicycles).
▷ After physical damage to the system, e.g.,
after an accident.
Seite 122
122
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Driving comfort
Activation/deactivation
Press the button.
Display
Night Vision with pedestrian detection is not
available on the
rear screen*.
Settings via iDrive
With Night Vision switched on:
1. Activate Night Vision with pedestrian detec‐
tion.
2. Press the controller.
3. Open the desired menu item.
▷
"Brightness"
▷ "Contrast"
▷ "Pedestrian detection"
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Camera
Rain, dirt, snow, or ice can impair camera oper‐
ation.
The camera is automatically heated when the
external temperatures are low.
The camera is automatically cleaned together
with the headlamps.
Clean the lens, refer to page 273.
Head-up Display
*
The concept
This system projects important information into
the driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed.
In this way, the driver can get information with‐
out averting his or her eyes from the road.
Display visibility
The
visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis‐
play is influenced by:
▷ Certain sitting positions.
▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐
play.
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
▷ Wet roads.
▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
If the image is distorted, check the basic set‐
tings.
Switching on/off
Seite 123
123
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Press the button.
Display
1 Lane departure warning*
2 Active Cruise Control*
3 Desired speed
4 Navigation system*
5 Speed
The collision warning*, Night Vision* pedestrian
warning, or Check Control messages are dis‐
played briefly if needed.
Selecting displays in the Head-up
Display
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-up display"
3. "Displayed information"
4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up
Display.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Setting the brightness
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient light.
The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-up display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller.
The brightness is adjusted.
When the low beams are switched on, the
brightness
of the Head-up Display can be addi‐
tionally influenced using the instrument lighting,
refer to page 87.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Adjusting the height
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-up display"
3. "Height"
4. Turn the controller.
The height is adjusted.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system.
The shape of the windshield makes it possible
to display a precise image.
A film in the windshield prevents double images
from being displayed.
Therefore, have the special windshield replaced
by a service center only.
Seite 124
124
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Driving comfort
Climate control
Automatic climate control
*
1 Air distribution, left
2 Temperature, left
3 AUTO program, left
4 Air volume, AUTO intensity, residual heat,
left
5 Remove ice and condensation
6 Maximum cooling
7 Display
8 Air volume, AUTO intensity, right
9 AUTO program, right
10 Temperature, right
11 Air distribution, right
12 Seat heating*, right 50
13 Active seat ventilation*, right 51
14 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐
lated-air mode
15 Cooling function
16 Rear window defroster
17 ALL program
18 Active seat ventilation*, left 51
19 Seat heating*, left 50
Climate control functions in detail
Manual air distribution
Press the button repeatedly to select a
program:
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Upper body region and footwell.
▷ Footwell.
▷ Windows and footwell: driver's side only.
▷ Windows, upper body region and footwell:
driver's side only.
If the windows are fogged over, press the AUTO
button
on the driver's side to utilize the conden‐
sation sensor.
Seite 125
125
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Temperature
Turn
the wheel to set the desired
temperature.
The automatic climate control achieves this
temperature as quickly as possible, if necessary
with the maximum cooling or heating capacity,
and then keeps it constant.
Avoid rapidly switching between different tem‐
perature settings. The automatic climate control
will not have sufficient time to adjust the set
temperature.
AUTO program
Press the button.
Air volume, air distribution, and tem‐
perature are controlled automatically.
Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO
intensity, and outside influences, the air is di‐
rected to the windshield, side windows, upper
body, and into the footwell.
The cooling function, refer to page 127, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
trols the program so as to prevent window con‐
densation as much as possible.
Intensity of the AUTO program
With the AUTO program switched on, automatic
control of the air volume and air distribution can
be adjusted.
Press the left or right side of the button:
decrease or increase the intensity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
Air volume, manual
To be able to manually adjust the air volume,
switch off the AUTO program first.
Press the left or right side of the button:
decrease or increase air volume.
The selected air volume is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
The air volume of the automatic climate control
may be reduced automatically to save battery
power.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Press the button.
Ice and condensation are quickly re‐
moved from the windshield and the front side
windows.
The air volume can be adjusted when the pro‐
gram is active.
If the windows are fogged over, additionally
switch on the cooling function or press the
AUTO
button to utilize the condensation sensor.
Maximum cooling
Press the button.
The system is set to the lowest tem‐
perature, maximum air volume and recirculated-
air mode.
Air flows out of the vents for the upper body re‐
gion. Open them for this purpose.
Air is cooled as quickly as possible:
▷ At an external temperature of approx. 32 ℉/
0 ℃.
▷ When the engine is running.
The air volume can be adjusted when the pro‐
gram is active.
Automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated-air mode
You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air currently within
the vehicle.
Press the button repeatedly to select
an operating mode:
▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
Seite 126
126
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Climate control
▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air con‐
trol: a sensor detects pollutants in the out‐
side air and controls the shut-off automati‐
cally.
▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the
supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐
manently blocked.
If the windows are fogged over, switch off the
recirculated-air
mode and press the AUTO but‐
ton on the driver's side to utilize the condensa‐
tion sensor. Make sure that air can flow onto the
windshield.
Continuous recirculated-air mode
The recirculated-air mode should not be
used for an extended period of time, as the air
quality inside the vehicle deteriorates steadily.◀
Cooling function
The passenger compartment can only be
cooled with the engine running.
Press the button.
The air is cooled and dehumidified and
– depending on the temperature setting –
warmed again.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog up briefly when the engine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control, con‐
densation water, refer to page 146, develops
that exits underneath the vehicle.
Rear window defroster
Press the button.
The rear window defroster switches off
automatically after a certain period of time.
ALL program
The current settings on the driver's side
for temperature, air volume, air distri‐
bution, and AUTO program are transferred to
the front passenger side and to the left and right
rear.
The program is switched off if the settings on
the front passenger side or in the rear are
changed.
Residual heat
The
heat stored in the engine is used to heat the
interior.
Functional requirement
▷ Up to 20 minutes after the engine has been
switched off.
▷ Warm engine.
▷ The battery is sufficiently charged.
▷ External temperature below 77 ℉/25 ℃.
Switching on
1. Switch off the ignition.
2.
Press the right side of the button on
the driver's side.
is shown on the display of the automatic cli‐
mate control.
The
interior temperature, air volume and air dis‐
tribution can be adjusted with the ignition
switched on.
Switching off
At the lowest fan speed, press the left side of the
button on the driver's side.
on the display of the automatic climate control
goes out.
Switching the system on/off
Switching off
▷ Complete system:
At the lowest fan speed, press the
left
side of the button on the driver's
side.
▷ On the front passenger side:
At the lowest fan speed, press the
left side of the button on the front
passenger side.
Seite 127
127
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Switching on
Press any button.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter removes dust and pollen from
the incoming air.
The activated-charcoal filter removes gaseous
pollutants from the outside air that enters the
vehicle.
This combined filter should be replaced during
scheduled
maintenance of your vehicle., refer to
page 258
Ventilation
Front ventilation
▷ Thumbwheels for adjusting the tempera‐
ture, arrows 1.
Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐
row 2.
▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the
vents continuously, arrows 3.
Ventilation levels
▷ Draft-free ventilation:
Thumbwheel, arrow 3, in level : the air
current is fanned out.
▷ Maximum air volume:
Thumbwheel,
arrow 3, in level
: the air is
partially fanned out and partially bundled.
This maximizes the air supply.
▷ Direct ventilation:
Thumbwheel, arrow 3, in level :
the air is
bundled and can be directed to a specific
point.
Adjusting the ventilation
▷ Ventilation for cooling:
Adjust the vent to direct the air in your di‐
rection, e.g., if the vehicle interior is hot from
the sun.
▷ Draft-free ventilation:
Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.
Ventilation in rear, center
▷ Thumbwheels* for adjusting the tempera‐
ture, arrows 1.
Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐
row 2.
▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the
vents continuously, arrow 3.
Lateral ventilation
▷ Thumbwheel for opening and closing the
vents continuously, arrow 1.
Seite 128
128
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Climate control
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐
row 2.
Rear automatic climate
control*
At a glance
1 Temperature
2 AUTO program
3 Vent settings
4 Air volume, AUTO intensity
5 Display
6 Maximum cooling
7 Seat heating* 53
8 Active seat ventilation* 53
Note
The air volume of the automatic climate control
may be reduced automatically to save battery
power.
Switching the rear automatic climate
control on/off
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Rear climate control"
The rear automatic climate control is not opera‐
tional if the automatic climate control is
switched off or if the function for defrosting or
defogging the windows is active.
AUTO program
Press the button.
Air volume, air distribution, and temperature are
controlled automatically:
Depending
on the selected temperature, AUTO
intensity, and outside influences, the air is di‐
rected to the upper body and into the footwell.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
Intensity of the AUTO program
With the AUTO program switched on, automatic
control of the air volume and air distribution can
be adjusted.
Press the left or right side of the button:
decrease or increase the intensity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
Temperature
Turn the wheel to set the desired
temperature.
The automatic climate control achieves this
temperature as quickly as possible, if necessary
with the maximum cooling or heating capacity,
and then keeps it constant.
Avoid rapidly switching between different tem‐
perature settings. The automatic climate control
will not have sufficient time to adjust the set
temperature.
Manual air distribution
The air distribution can be adjusted to individual
needs.
Press the button repeatedly to select a
program:
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Upper body region and footwell.
▷ Footwell.
Air volume, manual
To be able to manually adjust the air volume,
switch off the AUTO program first.
Seite 129
129
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Press the left or right side of the button:
decrease or increase air volume.
The
selected air volume is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
Switching the system on/off
Switching off
At the lowest fan speed, press the left
side of the button on the driver's side.
Switching on
Press any button.
Maximum cooling
Press the button.
The system is set to the lowest tem‐
perature, maximum air volume and recirculated-
air mode.
Air flows out of the vents for the upper body re‐
gion. Open them for this purpose.
Air is cooled as quickly as possible:
▷ At an external temperature of approx. 32 ℉/
0 ℃.
▷ When the engine is running.
Climate control operation on the
headliner*
Temperature
Turn
the wheel to set the desired
temperature.
Air volume
Press the left or right side of the button:
decrease or increase air volume.
LEDs indicate the intensity of the air supply.
The air volume may be reduced automatically to
save battery power.
Ventilation
Thumbwheel for changing the air flow direction,
arrow.
Parked-car ventilation
The concept
The
parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehicle
interior and lowers its temperature, if necessary.
The system can be switched on and off directly
or by using two preset switch-on times. It re‐
mains switched on for 30 minutes.
They can be operated via iDrive.
Parked-car ventilation
Using the preset switch-on time or when oper‐
ated directly: any external temperature.
Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Switching on/off directly
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate parked-car vent."
The symbol on the automatic climate control
flashes if the system is switched on.
Seite 130
130
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Climate control
The system continues to run for some time after
being switched off.
Preselecting the switch-on time
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
4. Set the desired time.
Activating the switch-on time
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate Timer 1" or "Activate Timer 2"
The symbol on the automatic climate control
lights up when the switch-on time is activated.
The symbol on the automatic climate control
flashes
when the system has been switched on.
The system will only be switched on within the
next 24 hours. After that, it needs to reactivated.
Seite 131
131
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Interior equipment
Integrated universal remote
control*
The concept
This system can replace up to three different
hand-held transmitters for various types of re‐
mote-controlled equipment, such as garage
doors or lighting systems.
The hand-held transmitter signal can be pro‐
grammed on one of the three memory buttons.
The
corresponding device can then be operated
using the programmed memory button.
The LED indicates that a signal is being trans‐
mitted.
When selling the vehicle, delete the stored pro‐
grams for security reasons.
During programming
During programming and before activat‐
ing a device using the universal remote control,
ensure that there are no people, animals, or ob‐
jects in the range of movement of the remote-
controlled device; otherwise, there is a risk of
injury or damage.
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-
held transmitter.◀
Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packaging
or in the instructions of the hand-held
transmitter, the remote-controlled de‐
vice is generally compatible with the universal
remote control.
If you have any questions, please contact:
▷ Your service center.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
Programming
▷ LED, arrow 1.
▷ Memory buttons, arrow 2.
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Initial setup:
Press
both outer buttons 1 and 3 for approx.
20 seconds until the LED flashes.
All programs of the three memory buttons,
arrow 2, are cleared.
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter a distance of
approx. 2 to 8 in/5 to 20 cm from the memory
buttons.
4. Simultaneously press the transmit button of
the hand-held transmitter and the memory
button of the universal remote control.
The LED flashes slowly.
5. Release both buttons when the LED flashes
rapidly.
If the LED does not flash rapidly after approx.
15 seconds, change the distance and repeat
the step.
The device can be operated using the memory
button with the engine running or the ignition
switched on.
Malfunction
If the device cannot be used after repeated at‐
tempts at programming, please check whether
the hand-held transmitter is equipped with an
alternating code system.
Seite 132
132
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Interior equipment
To do so:
▷ Read the instructions of the hand-held
transmitter.
▷ Press the memory button of the universal
remote control for an extended period.
If the LED flashes rapidly for a brief period and
then lights up continuously for approx. 2 sec‐
onds, the hand-held transmitter is equipped
with an alternating code system.
In this case, program the memory buttons as
described under Alternating-code hand-held
transmitters.
Alternating-code hand-held
transmitters
Please obtain information on synchronizing the
device
in the operating manual of the device be‐
ing set up.
Programming will be easier with the aid of a sec‐
ond person.
1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-
controlled device.
2. Program the universal remote control as de‐
scribed above under Fixed-code hand-held
transmitters.
3. Press and hold the programmed button on
the interior rearview mirror for approx. 5 sec‐
onds until the device to be adjusted is acti‐
vated.
If the device does not become activated,
press and hold the button and watch the
LED:
▷ If the LED lights up continuously, the
programming is completed. The device
should become activated when the but‐
ton is pressed briefly.
▷ If the LED flashes for approx. 2 seconds
and then lights up continuously, con‐
tinue the programming procedure be‐
ginning with step 4.
4. Locate the button on the receiver of the de‐
vice to be set, e.g., on the drive.
5. Press the button on the receiver of the de‐
vice to be set. You have approx. 30 seconds
for the next step.
6. Press the programmed memory button of
the universal remote control three times.
The device can be operated when the engine is
running or the ignition is switched on.
Reassigning individual programs
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Hold the hand-held transmitter a distance of
approx. 2 to 8 in/5 to 20 cm from the memory
buttons.
3. Press the memory button of the universal
remote control.
4. If the LED flashes slowly after approx.
20 seconds, press the transmit button on
the hand-held transmitter.
5. Release both buttons when the LED flashes
rapidly.
If the LED does not flash rapidly after approx.
15 seconds, change the distance and repeat
the step.
Deleting all stored programs
Press the left and right memory buttons for ap‐
prox. 20 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly.
All stored programs are deleted.
The programs cannot be deleted individually.
Seite 133
133
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Ashtray/cigarette lighter*
Front
Opening
Press on the cover.
Emptying
Place your finger in the depression next to the
ashtray, arrow, and push up at the same time.
The ashtray can be removed.
Lighter
Push in the lighter.
The lighter can be removed as
soon as it pops back out.
Danger of burns
Only hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of getting burned.
Switch
off the ignition and take the remote con‐
trol with you when leaving the vehicle so that
children cannot use the lighter and burn them‐
selves.◀
Rear
Opening
Press on the cover.
Emptying
Take out the insert.
Lighter
Push in the lighter.
Danger of burns
Only hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of getting burned.
Take the remote control with you when leaving
the vehicle so that children cannot use the
lighter and burn themselves.◀
The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops
back out.
Connecting
electrical devices
Sockets
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment while the engine is running
or when the ignition is switched on. The total
Seite 134
134
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Interior equipment
load of all sockets must not exceed 140 Watt at
12 V.
Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable
connectors.
Front center console
Press on the cover.
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter*.
Rear center console
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter*.
In the cargo area*
Remove the cover.
Rear cooler*
Behind the center armrest
The cooler is located behind the center armrest
in the rear.
Fold the center armrest down.
Opening
Pull on the opener and fold the cooler forward.
Switching on
The cooler can be operated at two levels.
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the button once for each cool‐
ing level.
The highest cooling power is active when
two LEDs are lit.
If the cooler was switched on the last time the
ignition was switched on, it will likewise be
switched on the next time the ignition is
switched on.
Switching off
Press the button repeatedly until the LEDs go
out.
Seite 135
135
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Malfunction
The cooler cannot be switched on or switches
off, e.g., when the cooling system overheats or
if the battery voltage is low. One of the LEDs
flashes.
Remedy the problem
1. If necessary, allow the refrigerator cooling
system to cool down.
2. Starting the engine.
3. Switch on cooler.
If the LED flashes even after a short time, have
the cooler checked by the service center.
Folding table* in the rear
A
folding table is contained in the backrest of the
front seat.
Folding down
Pinch hazard during folding out and in
Make sure that the area of movement
around the folding table and the side hinges is
clear; otherwise, injuries can occur.◀
Pulling on the handle, draw the table up and out
and fold it down.
Close the folding table when driving
Keep the folding table closed as much as
possible
to prevent the any danger of injury dur‐
ing driving through objects on the folding table
or the folding table itself.◀
Ski bag*
Capacity
The
ski bag can be used to transport up to three
pairs of skis with a length of up to 6 ft/2.10 m or
a snowboard of up to 5 ft/1.60 m.
Preparing and loading the ski bag
1. Fold open the center arm rest and the lid on
the inside.
2. Open the inside cover and cargo area by
pressing the button.
3. Lay out the ski bag.
4. Load the ski bag. If necessary, wrap the
sharp edges of the skis.
If
necessary, open the ski bag zipper to ease
loading or to dry the ski bag.
Seite 136
136
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Interior equipment
5. Insert the tongue plate into the belt buckle.
6. Tighten the retaining strap.
Securing the ski bag
Secure the ski bag by tightening the re‐
taining strap; otherwise, the contents could
present a source of danger to the passengers,
for example during braking or evasive maneu‐
vers.◀
Removing the ski bag
The
ski bag can be removed entirely, e.g., to dry
quickly or to use other inserts.
1. Pull the handle forward and lift the ski bag
out.
2. Close the cover in the cargo area.
More information on the various inserts available
can be obtained from your service center.
Seite 137
137
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Storage compartments
Storage compartments
The following storage compartments are avail‐
able in the vehicle interior:
▷ Glove compartment on the driver's and front
passenger side, refer to page 138.
▷ Storage compartment in the center armrest,
refer to page 139, in the front and rear.
▷ Compartments in the doors.
▷ Pockets on the backrests of the front seats*.
▷ Net in the front passenger footwell*.
No loose objects in the passenger com‐
partment
Do not stow any objects in the passenger com‐
partment without securing them; otherwise,
they may present a danger to occupants for in‐
stance during braking and avoidance maneu‐
vers.◀
Glove compartment
Front passenger side
Opening
Pull the handle.
The
light in the glove compartment switches on.
Close the glove compartment again im‐
mediately
Close the glove compartment immediately after
use while driving; otherwise, injury may occur
during accidents.◀
Closing
Fold up the cover.
Opening the top cover
Press the button.
The top cover opens automatically.
Closing the top cover
Press the cover closed.
USB interface for data transfer
Connection for importing and exporting data on
USB devices, e.g.:
▷ Personal Profile settings, refer to page 33.
▷ Music collection, refer to page 186.
Observe the following when connecting:
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect USB hard drives.
▷ Do not use the USB interface to recharge
external devices.
Seite 138
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Storage compartments
Driver's side
Opening
Pull the handle.
Close the glove compartment again im‐
mediately
Close
the glove compartment immediately after
use while driving; otherwise, injury may occur
during accidents.◀
Closing
Fold up the cover.
Center armrest
Front
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the front seats.
Opening
Press the buttons next to the lock.
Locking the storage compartment
The storage compartment in the armrest can be
locked with an integrated key to separately se‐
cure
the trunk lid, refer to page 41, for example.
After the storage compartment is locked, the re‐
mote control can be handed out without the
integrated key, refer to page 32, for instance at
a hotel.
This prevents access to the storage compart‐
ment and to the cargo area.
Connection for an external audio
device
This can be used to connect an external audio
device, such as a CD or MP3 player.
▷ AUX-IN port, refer to page 190.
▷ USB audio interface*, refer to page 191.
Rear
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the seats.
Opening
Depending
on the equipment in your vehicle, the
button is in the depression at the front of the
center armrest or on top of the center armrest.
Seite 139
139
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Cupholders
Notes
Shatter-proof containers and no hot
drinks
Use light and shatter-proof containers and do
not
transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is the
increased danger of injury in an accident.◀
Unsuitable containers
Do not forcefully push unsuitable contain‐
ers into the cupholders. This may result in dam‐
age.◀
Front
To open: press on the cover.
Rear
In the front of the center armrest.
To open: press the button.
To close: slide back.
Clothes hooks
The clothes hooks are located next to the grab
handles in the rear and on the door pillar in the
rear.
Do not obstruct view
When suspending clothing from the
hooks,
ensure that it will not obstruct the driver's
vision.◀
No heavy objects
Do not hang heavy objects from the hooks;
otherwise, they may present a danger to pas‐
sengers during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers.◀
Cargo area
Net
Smaller objects can be stored in the net on the
side of the cargo area.
To transport larger objects, it can be pushed
down.
Storage compartment under the cargo
floor panel
Raise the cargo floor panel.
Seite 140
140
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Storage compartments
Storage compartment on the side
Under the cover on the side of the cargo area is
a
storage compartment that can be used to store
the printed Owner's Manual, for example.
Remove the cover.
Lashing eyes
To secure the cargo, refer to page 147, there
are lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Seite 141
141
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Driving tips
This chapter provides you with information useful
in dealing with specific driving and operating
modes.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Things to remember when driving
Breaking-in period
General information
Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to
each other.
The following instructions will help achieve a
long vehicle life and good economy.
Engine and differential
Always obey the official speed limit.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
speed:
▷ For gasoline engine, 4500 rpm and
100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the
transmission's kickdown mode for the initial
miles.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.
Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture,
tires do not achieve their full trac‐
tion potential until after an initial breaking-in pe‐
riod.
Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/
300 km.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐
prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake pads
and discs. Drive moderately during this break-in
period.
Clutch
The function of the clutch reaches its optimal
level only after a distance driven of approx.
300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,
engage the clutch gently.
Following part replacement
The same breaking in procedures should be ob‐
served if any of the components mentioned
above have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
General driving notes
Closing the trunk lid
Drive with the trunk lid closed
Only drive with the tailgate closed; other‐
wise, in the event of an accident or braking or
evasive maneuvers, passengers or other road
users may be injured or the vehicle may be dam‐
aged. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter the
passenger compartment.◀
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
avoided:
▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof*.
▷ Greatly increase the blower speed.
▷ Drive moderately.
Hot exhaust system
Hot exhaust system
High temperatures are generated in the
exhaust system.
Do not remove the heat shields installed and
never apply undercoating to them. When driv‐
ing,
standing at idle and while parking, take care
to avoid possible contact between the hot ex‐
haust system and any highly flammable materi‐
als such as hay, leaves, grass, etc. Such contact
could lead to a fire, and with it the risk of serious
personal injury as well as property damage.
Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise, there
is the danger of getting burned.◀
Seite 144
144
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Things to remember when driving
Climate control windshield*
The marked area is not covered with heat re‐
flective coating.
Use this area for garage door openers, devices
for electronic toll collection, etc.
Climate
control laminated tinted safety
glass*
The vehicle glass provides full protection
against the harmful effects of UV radiation on the
skin.
Mobile communication devices in the
vehicle
Mobile communication devices in the ve‐
hicle
It is advised that you do not use mobile commu‐
nication devices, e.g., mobile phones, inside the
vehicle without connecting them directly to the
external antenna. Otherwise, the vehicle elec‐
tronics and mobile communication devices can
interfere with each other. In addition, there is no
assurance that the radiation generated during
transmission will be discharged from the vehicle
interior.◀
Hydroplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
loss of contact between the tires and the road
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle.
Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads, re‐
duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.
◀
Driving through water
Drive though calm water only if it is not deeper
than 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this height, no
faster than walking speed, up to 6 mph/10 km/h.
Adhere to water depth and speed limita‐
tions
Do not exceed this water depth and walking
speed; otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the elec‐
trical systems and the transmission may be
damaged.◀
Braking safely
Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standard
feature.
Applying the brakes fully is the most effective
way of braking in situations when this is neces‐
sary.
The vehicle maintains steering responsiveness.
You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum
of steering effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its
active mode.
Objects in the area around the pedals
No objects in the area around the pedals
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;
otherwise, the function of the pedals could be
impeded while driving
Do not place additional floor mats over existing
mats or other objects.
Only use floor mats that have been approved for
the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened
again after they were removed for cleaning, for
example.◀
Seite 145
145
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Driving in wet conditions
When
roads are wet or there is heavy rain, briefly
exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every
few miles.
Ensure that this action does not endanger other
road users.
The heat generated in this process helps dry the
brake discs and pads.
In this way braking efficiency will be available
when you need it.
Hills
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear
in which the least braking is required. Otherwise,
the brake system may overheat, resulting in a
reduction in the brake system efficiency.
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
shifting down in the manual mode of the auto‐
matic transmission, refer to page 72.
Avoid load on the brakes
Avoid placing excessive load on the brake
system. Light but consistent brake pressure can
lead to high temperatures, brake wear and pos‐
sibly even brake failure.◀
Do not drive in neutral
Do not drive in neutral or with the engine
stopped, as doing so disables engine braking. In
addition, steering and brake assist is unavailable
with the engine stopped.◀
Brake disc corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and contamination
on the brake pads are furthered by:
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure
that must be exerted by the pads during brake
applications to clean the discs is not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef‐
fect that generally cannot be corrected.
Condensation under the parked vehicle
When
using the automatic climate control, con‐
densation water develops that exits underneath
the vehicle.
Therefore, traces of condensed water under the
vehicle are normal.
Loading
Overloading the vehicle
To avoid exceeding the approved carrying
capacity of the tires, never overload the vehicle.
Overloading can lead to overheating and in‐
creases the rate at which damage develops in‐
side the tires. This could result in a sudden loss
of tire inflation pressure.◀
No fluids in the trunk
Make sure that fluids do not leak into the
trunk; otherwise, the vehicle may be damaged.◀
Determining the load limit
1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐
hicle’s placard*:
▷ The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the ve‐
hicle
and unstable driving situations may
result.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY
pounds.
Seite 146
146
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Things to remember when driving
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount
of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the YYY amount equals
1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs pas‐
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail‐
able cargo and luggage load capacity is
400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs = 400 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.
Load
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing cargo
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward and as low
as
possible, ideally directly behind the cargo
area separating wall.
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners.
Securing cargo
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
To secure the cargo, there are four lashing eyes
in the cargo area
Securing cargo
▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐
taining straps or with a
cargo net* or draw
straps.
▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with cargo
straps*.
Cargo straps, cargo netting, retaining straps or
draw straps on the lashing eyes in the cargo
area.
Seite 147
147
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Securing cargo
Always position and secure the cargo as
described
above; otherwise, it can endanger the
car's occupants if sudden braking or swerving
becomes necessary.
Heavy or hard objects should not be carried
loose inside the car; otherwise, they could be
thrown around as a result of hard braking, sud‐
den swerves, etc., and endanger the occu‐
pants.◀
Roof-mounted luggage rack
Note
Installation only possible in roof drip molding
with flaps*. Your service center will be glad to
advise you.
Roof racks are available as special accessories.
Attachment
Follow the installation instructions of the roof
rack.
Roof drip rail with flaps*
On the roof drip rail, press on the outside of the
flap.
Mounting
The preparation for the mounting plate is lo‐
cated
below the roof drip rail. Have the mounting
plate installed by the service center before in‐
stallation of a roof rack.
Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained
for raising and opening the glass sunroof*.
Magnetic roof-mounted luggage rack
Because of the aluminum roof, magnetic roof-
mounted luggage racks cannot be mounted.
Loading
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of
gravity
when loaded, they have a major effect on
vehicle handling and steering response.
Therefore, note the following when loading and
driving:
▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
▷ The roof load should not be too large in area.
▷ Always load the heaviest pieces on the bot‐
tom.
▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., tie with
ratchet straps.
▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
path of the trunk lid.
▷ Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration
and braking maneuvers. Take corners gen‐
tly.
Saving fuel
General information
Your vehicle contains advanced technology for
the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐
sions.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors.
The implementation of certain measures, driv‐
ing style and regular maintenance can have an
influence on fuel consumption and on the envi‐
ronmental impact.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove attached parts following use
Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear luggage
racks which are no longer required following
use.
Seite 148
148
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Things to remember when driving
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
Close the windows and glass sunroof
*
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
open results in increased air resistance and
raises fuel consumption.
Check the tire inflation pressure
regularly
Check and, if necessary, correct the tire inflation
pressure at least twice a month and before start‐
ing on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
tire wear.
Drive away without delay
Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the
vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right
away, but at moderate engine speeds.
This is the fastest way for the cold engine to
reach its operating temperature.
Look well ahead when driving
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle
driving ahead of you.
Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces
fuel consumption.
Use coasting conditions
When approaching a red light, take your foot off
the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt.
On a downhill gradient, take your foot off the ac‐
celerator and let the vehicle roll.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
Switch off the engine during longer
stops
Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,
at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic
congestion.
Fuel savings are achieved after the vehicle is
switched off for only approx. 4 seconds.
Switch off any functions that are not
currently needed
Functions
such as seat heating and the rear win‐
dow defroster require a lot of energy and con‐
sume additional fuel, especially in city and stop-
and-go traffic.
Therefore, switch off these functions if they are
not actually needed.
Have maintenance carried out
Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve
optimal vehicle economy and operating life.
Have the maintenance carried out by your serv‐
ice center.
Please also note the BMW Maintenance Sys‐
tem.
Seite 149
149
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Navigation
This chapter contains various examples of how
the navigation system can guide you reliably to
your destination.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Navigation*
Navigation system
General information
The navigation system can determine the pre‐
cise position of the vehicle, with the aid of sat‐
ellites and vehicle sensors, and can reliably
guide you to every entered destination.
Navigation
data are stored in the vehicle and can
be updated.
Entries in stationary vehicle
Enter data only when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary, and always give priority to the applicable
traffic regulations in the event of any contradic‐
tion between traffic and road conditions and the
instructions issued by the navigation system.
Failure to take to this precaution can place you
in violation of the law and put vehicle occupants
and other road users in danger.◀
Destination input
Manual destination entry
General information
The system supports you in entering street
names and house numbers by automatically
completing the entry and providing entry com‐
parisons, refer to page 24.
Stored town/city and street names can be called
up quickly.
▷ If the existing entries should not be changed,
the entries for the state/province and town/
city can be skipped.
▷ Destination guidance is started to the town/
city center if no street is entered.
Entering a state/province
1. Press the MENU button.
2. "Navigation"
3. "Enter address"
4. Select "State/Province" or the displayed
state/province.
Entering a town/city
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis‐
played town/city.
2. Select letters, if necessary.
The list is narrowed down further with each
entry.
3. Move the controller to the right.
4. Select the town/city name from the list.
If there are several towns/cities with the same
name:
1. Change to the list of town/city names.
2. Highlight the town/city.
3. Select the town/city.
Entering the postal code*
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis‐
played town/city.
2. Select the symbol.
Seite 152
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Navigation
3. Select the numbers.
4. Change to the list of postal codes and towns/
cities.
5. Highlight the entry.
6. Selecting an entry.
Entering a street and intersection
1. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
2. Enter a street and intersection in the same
way as you would enter a town/city.
If there are several streets with the same name:
1. Change to the list of street names.
2. Highlight the street.
3. Select the street.
Alternative: enter the street address
and house number
1. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
2. Enter the street as you would the town/city.
3. "House number"
4. Select the numbers.
5. Change to the list of house numbers.
6. Select a house number or range of house
numbers.
Street does not exist in the destination
city/town
The
desired street does not exist in the specified
city/town because it belongs to another part of
the city/town.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
4. Change to the list of street names.
5. Select "In" the displayed country.
All streets of the selected state/province are
offered. The associated town/city is dis‐
played after the street name.
6. Select the letters.
7. Change to the list of street names.
8. Highlight the street.
9. Select the street.
Starting destination guidance after
entering the destination
1. "Accept destination"
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Add a destination as a further destination,
refer to page 158.
Address book
Selecting a destination from the
address book
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
Contacts with addresses are displayed if
these have been checked as destinations.
If the mobile phone* does not display the
contacts with addresses, they must first be
Seite 153
153
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
checked as a destination, refer to
page 233.
3. Select a contact in the list or, if desired, with
"A-Z search".
4. "Business address" or "Home address"
Storing the destination in the address
book
After entering the destination, store the desti‐
nation in the address book.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
3. Select an existing contact, if available.
4. "Business address" or "Home address"
5. Enter "Last name" and, if necessary, "First
name".
6. "Store in vehicle"
Storing the position
The current position can be stored in the ad‐
dress book.
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store
position as contact" or "Add position
to contact"
4. Depending on the selection, choose an ex‐
isting contact from the list. Select the type
of
address and enter the first and last name.
5. "Store in vehicle"
Editing or deleting an address
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
3. Highlight the entry.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry"
Using the home address as the
destination
The home address must be stored. Specify the
home address, refer to page 232.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
3. "Home"
4. "Start guidance"
Seite 154
154
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Navigation
Last destinations
At a glance
The destinations previously entered are stored
automatically.
The
destinations can be called up and used as a
destination for destination guidance.
Calling up the last destination
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
Starting destination guidance
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Select the destination.
4. "Start guidance"
Editing the destination
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit destination"
Deleting the last destinations
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last
destinations"
Special destinations
Opening the search for special
destinations
To select special destinations, e.g., hotels or
tourist attractions:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Points of Interest"
3. Select the search function.
Online Search*
1. "Google™ Search"
2. Select a special destination.
3.
Select the symbol.
4. "Start guidance"
A-Z search
1. "A-Z search"
2. "Town/City"
Select or enter the town/city.
3. "Category"
4. Select the category.
5. "Category details"
For
some special destinations, multiple cat‐
egory details can be selected. Move the
controller to the left to leave the category
details.
6. "Keyword"
7. Enter the keyword.
A list of the special destinations is displayed.
8. Select a special destination.
Details are displayed.
If multiple details are stored, you can leaf
through the pages.
If a phone number is available, a connection
can be established if necessary.
9.
Select the symbol.
"Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Add a destination as a further destination,
refer to page 158.
Seite 155
155
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
"Start search": if a search term is not entered,
the
search is repeated with the previous search
term.
Category search
1. "Category search"
2. "Town/City"
Select or enter the town/city.
3. "Category"
4. Select the category.
5. "Category details"
For some special destinations, multiple cat‐
egory details can be selected. Move the
controller to the left to leave the category
details.
6. "Start search"
A list of the special destinations is displayed.
7. Select a special destination.
Details are displayed.
If multiple details are stored, you can leaf
through the pages.
If a phone number is available, a connection
can be established if necessary.
8.
Select the symbol.
"Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Add a destination as a further destination,
refer to page 158.
Display of special destinations
List
of special destinations: special destinations
are organized by distance and are displayed with
a directional arrow to the special destination.
on the split screen, special destinations of the
selected category are displayed in the map view
as symbols. The display depends on the scale
of the map and the category.
Destination entry via BMW Assist*
A connection is established to the Concierge
service, refer to page 235.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Open "Options".
4. "BMW Assist dest. entry"
Displaying special destinations in the
map
To display symbols of the special destinations
in the map view:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display Points of Interest"
5. Select the setting.
Destination entry by map
Selecting the destination
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
The current position of the vehicle is indi‐
cated on the map.
3.
"Interactive map"
4. Select the destination with crosshairs.
▷ To change the scale: turn the controller.
▷ To shift the map: move the controller in
the required direction.
▷ To shift the map diagonally: move the
controller in the required direction and
turn it.
Seite 156
156
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Navigation
Specifying the street
If
the system does not recognize a street, one of
the following is displayed:
▷ The name of a street in the vicinity.
▷ The county.
▷ The coordinates of the destination.
Additional functions
Additional functions are available on the inter‐
active map after the controller is pressed.
▷ Select the symbol.
"Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Add a destination as a further destination,
refer to page 158.
▷ "Exit interactive map": return to the map
view.
▷ "View in northern direction" or "View in
driving direction"
▷ "Display destination": the map section
around the destination is displayed.
▷ "Display current location": the map section
around your current location is displayed.
▷ "Find
points of interest": the search for spe‐
cial destinations is started.
Destination entry by voice*
General information
▷ Instructions for voice activation system, re‐
fer to page 25.
▷ When making a destination entry by voice,
you can change between voice operation
and iDrive.
▷ To have the available spoken instructions
read out loud: ›Voice commands
‹
Saying the entries
▷ the town/city, street, and house number can
be entered as a single command*.
▷ Countries, towns and cities, streets, and in‐
tersections can be said as whole words* or
spelled in the language of the system, refer
to page 81.
Example: to enter a town/city in a US state
as a whole word, the language of the system
must be English.
▷ Spell the entry if the spoken language and
the language of the system differ.
▷ Say the letters smoothly, and avoid exag‐
gerating the pronunciation and inserting
lengthy pauses between the letters.
▷ The options available for entering data de‐
pend on the navigation data and the country
and language settings.
entering an address using a command*
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. ›Enter address‹
3. Wait for a request from the system.
4. Say the address in the suggested order.
5. Continue making the entry as prompted by
the system.
If necessary, individually name the separate
components of the address, e.g., the town/city.
Entering a town/city separately
The name of the town/city can be said as a
word* or spelled out.
With the destination entry menu displayed:
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. ›City‹ or ›Spell city‹.
3. Wait for the system to prompt you for the
town/city.
Seite 157
157
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
4. Say the name of the town/city, or say at least
the first three letters.
Depending
on the entry, up to 20 towns/cit‐
ies may be suggested.
5. Select the town/city.
▷ To select a recommended town/
city: ›Yes‹
▷ To select a different town/city: ›New
entry‹
▷ Select an entry: ›Entry ...‹ e.g., entry 2
▷ To spell an entry: ›Spell city‹
6. Continue making the entry as prompted by
the system.
If there are several towns/cities with the same
name:
Towns/cities of the same name are grouped in a
list and displayed as one location followed by an
ellipsis.
1. Select an entry: ›Yes‹ or ›Entry ...‹ e.g., En‐
try 2.
2. Select the desired town/city.
Entering a street or intersection
separately
Enter a street and intersection in the same way
as you would enter a town/city.
Entering a house number separately
Depending
on the data in the navigation system,
house numbers up to number 2000 can be en‐
tered.
1. ›House number‹
2. Say the house number.
Say each digit separately.
3. Continue making the entry as prompted by
the system.
Planning a trip with intermediate
destinations
New trip
A trip can be planned with several intermediate
destinations.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Move the controller to the left if necessary.
4.
"Guidance"
5. "Enter new destination"
6. Select the type of destination entry.
7. Enter the intermediate destination.
8. "Start guidance"
Entering intermediate destinations
For
a trip, a max. of 30 intermediate destinations
can be entered.
1. "Enter new destination"
2. Select the type of destination entry.
3. Enter the intermediate destination.
4. "Add as another destination"
The intermediate destination is entered in
the destination list and is highlighted.
5. Turn the controller until the intermediate
destination
is located in the desired position
in the list.
6. Press the controller.
Starting the trip
1. After all intermediate destinations are en‐
tered, highlight the first destination.
If the second destination, for example, is
highlighted when destination guidance is
started, the first destination is skipped.
2. "Start guidance"
This symbol marks the active leg of the
trip.
Seite 158
158
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Navigation
Store the trip
Up to 30 trips can be stored in the trip list. If
necessary, delete existing trips to be able to
store new trips.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Store trip"
3. Enter the name.
4. "OK"
Select the stored trip
1. "Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
3. Select a stored trip.
4. "Start guidance"
Reversing the direction of travel
Intermediate destinations are displayed in re‐
verse order in the list.
1. "Map"
2.
"Guidance"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Reverse order of trip dest."
Intermediate destination options
1. "Map"
2. "Guidance"
3. "Display all trip destinations"
4. Select an intermediate destination.
▷ "Edit destination"
▷ "Reposition dest. in the trip": move an
intermediate destination to another po‐
sition in the list.
▷ "Delete dest. in the trip"
▷ "Go to next dest. in the trip"
Some options are not available for certain trips.
Delete the stored trip
1. "Stored trips"
2. Highlight the desired trip.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete all trips" or "Delete trip"
Open the last trip
1. "Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
3. "Last trip"
4. "Start guidance"
Destination guidance
Starting destination guidance
1. "Navigation"
2. Make a destination entry, refer to page 152.
3. "Accept destination"
4. "Start guidance"
▷ The route is shown on the Control Display.
▷ The distance to the destination/intermedi‐
ate
destination and the estimated time of ar‐
rival are displayed in the map view.
▷ The arrow view is shown in the instrument
cluster, in the Head-up Display*, and on the
Control Display where appropriate.
Terminating destination guidance
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3.
"Guidance"
4. "Stop guidance"
Continuing destination guidance
If
the destination was not reached during the last
trip, destination guidance can be resumed.
"Resume guidance"
Route criteria
General information
▷ The route calculated can be influenced by
selecting certain criteria.
▷ The route criteria can be changed when the
destination is entered and during destina‐
tion guidance.
Seite 159
159
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
▷ Road types are part of the navigation data
and
are taken into consideration when plan‐
ning a route, e.g., avoid highways.
▷ The recommended route may differ from the
route you would take based on personal ex‐
perience.
▷ The settings are stored for the remote con‐
trol currently in use.
▷ Destination guidance with traffic bulletins,
refer to page 165.
Changing the route criteria
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3.
"Route preference"
4. Select the criterion:
▷ "Fast route": time-optimized route,
being
a combination of the shortest pos‐
sible route and the fastest roads.
▷
"Efficient route": optimized combi‐
nation of the fastest and shortest route.
▷ "Short route": short distance, irre‐
spective
of how fast or slow progress will
be.
▷ "Alternative routes": if available, alter‐
native routes are suggested during ac‐
tive route guidance. The individual sug‐
gestions are highlighted in color.
5. Specify additional criteria for the route, if
necessary:
▷ "Avoid highways": highways are
avoided wherever possible.
▷ "Avoid
toll roads": toll roads are avoided
wherever possible.
▷ "Avoid ferries": ferries are avoided
where possible.
Route
Different views of the route are available during
destination guidance:
▷ Arrow view in the instrument cluster and on
the Control Display.
▷ List of route sections.
▷ Map view, refer to page 161.
▷ Arrow view in the Head-up Display*, refer to
page 123.
Arrow view
The following information is displayed during
destination guidance:
▷ Large arrow: current direction of travel.
▷ Small arrow: indicates the next change in di‐
rection.
▷ Intersection view.
▷ Lane information.
▷ Traffic bulletins.
▷ Distance to the next change in direction.
▷ Street name at the next change in direction.
Lane information
On multi-lane roads, the recommended lanes
are marked in the arrow view by a triangle.
▷ Solid triangle: best lane.
▷ Empty triangle: possible lane. However, an‐
other lane change may be needed shortly.
Displaying list of route sections
When the destination guidance is started, a list
of route sections can be displayed. The driving
distances and traffic bulletins are displayed for
each route section.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. Mark route section.
The route section is displayed on the split
screen.
Seite 160
160
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Navigation
Bypassing a section of the route
Calculate a new route for a route section.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "New route for"
4. Turn the controller. Enter the number of kilo‐
meters
within which you would like to return
to the original route.
5. Press the controller.
Resuming the original route
If the route section should no longer be by‐
passed:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "New route for:"
4. "Remove blocking"
Gas station recommendation
The remaining range is calculated, and if nec‐
essary gas stations along the route are dis‐
played.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "Recommended refuel"
A list of the gas stations is displayed.
4. Highlight a gas station.
The position of the gas station is displayed
on the split screen.
5. Select the gas station.
6.
Select the symbol.
7. "Start guidance": destination guidance to
the selected gas station is started.
"Add as another destination"
: the gas sta‐
tion is added to the route.
Switching spoken instructions on/off
The
setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3.
"Voice instructions"
Repeating spoken instructions
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Highlight the symbol.
4. Press the controller twice.
Volume of spoken instructions
Turn
the volume button while giving an instruc‐
tion until the desired volume is set.
Saving the spoken instructions on the
programmable memory buttons
The function for switching the spoken instruc‐
tions on/off can be stored on a programmable
memory button, refer to page 23, for quick ac‐
cess.
Map view
Selecting the map view
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
Seite 161
161
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
At a glance
1 Function bar
2 Route section with traffic obstruction
3 Traffic sign for traffic obstruction
4 Planned route
5 Current location
6 Upper status field
7 Lower status field
Lines in the map
Streets
and routes are displayed in different col‐
ors and styles depending on their classification.
Dashed lines represent railways and ferry con‐
nections. Country borders are indicated by thin
lines.
Traffic obstructions
Small triangles along the planned route indicate
route sections with traffic obstructions, depend‐
ing on the map scale. The direction of the trian‐
gles indicates the direction of the obstruction.
The traffic signs indicate the significance of the
obstruction.
▷ Red traffic sign: the obstruction affects the
planned route or direction.
▷ Gray traffic sign: the obstruction does not
affect the planned route or direction.
Traffic bulletins, refer to page 163.
Planned route
After destination guidance is started, the plan‐
ned route is displayed on the map.
Status fields
Show/hide: press the controller.
▷ Upper status field: time, telephone, and en‐
tertainment details.
▷ Lower status field: symbol for active desti‐
nation guidance, status of traffic bulletins,
time of arrival, and distance to destination.
Function bar
The following functions are available in the func‐
tion bar:
Symbol Function
Start/end destination guidance.
Switch spoken instructions on/
off.
Change the route criteria.
Search for a special destination.
Display the traffic bulletins.
Interactive map.
Set the map view.
Change the scale.
To change to the function bar, move the con‐
troller to the left.
Changing the map section
"Interactive map"
▷ To shift the map: move the controller in the
required direction.
▷ To shift the map diagonally: move the con‐
troller in the required direction and turn it.
Changing the scale
1. Select the symbol.
2. To change the scale: turn the controller.
Automatically scaled map scale
In the map view facing north, turn the controller
in any direction until the AUTO scale is dis‐
played. The map shows the entire route be‐
tween the current location and the destination.
Seite 162
162
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Navigation
Settings for the map view
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Settings"
Set the map view.
▷ "Day/night mode"
Select and create the necessary settings
depending on the light conditions.
"Traffic conditions/gray map" active: the
setting is disregarded.
▷ "Satellite images"
Depending on availability and resolution,
satellite images* are displayed in a scale of
approx. 1 mile to 600 miles/2 km to
1,000 km.
▷ "Perspective view in 3D"
Prominent areas that are contained in the
navigation data are displayed on the map in
3D.
▷ "Traffic conditions/gray map"
The map is optimized for displaying traffic
bulletins,
refer to page 163. Symbols for the
special destinations are no longer displayed.
Map view for split screen
The map view can be selected for the split
screen independently from the main screen.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Split screen"
3. Move the controller to the right repeatedly
until the split screen is selected.
4. Select "Split screen content" or the scale.
5. Select the map view.
▷ "Arrow display"
▷ "Map facing north"
▷ "Map direction of travel"
▷ "Map view with perspective"
▷ "Position"
▷ "Exit ramp view": selected blind drive‐
ways are displayed three dimensionally.
Setting in some cases will affect the dis‐
play in the Head-Up Display*.
▷ "Traffic conditions/gray map"
6. To change the scale: select the split screen
and turn the controller.
Traffic bulletins*
At a glance
▷ Display the traffic bulletins from radio sta‐
tions that broadcast the TI Traffic Informa‐
tion of a traffic information service. Informa‐
tion on traffic obstructions and hazards is
updated continuously.
Certain BMW models equipped with navi‐
gation have the capability to display real-
time traffic information. If your system has
this capability the following additional terms
and conditions apply:
An End-User shall no longer have the right
to use the Traffic Data in the event that the
End-User is in material breach of the terms
and conditions contained herein.
A. Total Traffic Network, a division of Clear
Channel Broadcasting, Inc. (“Total Traffic
Network”) holds the rights to the traffic in‐
cident data and RDS-TMC network through
which it is delivered. You may not modify,
copy, scan or use any other method to re‐
produce, duplicate, republish, transmit or
distribute in any way any portion of traffic in‐
cident data. You agree to indemnify, defend
and hold harmless BMW of North America,
LLC. (“BMW NA”) and Total Traffic Net‐
work, Inrix, Inc (and their affiliates) against
any and all claims, damages, costs or other
expenses that arise directly or indirectly out
of (a) your unauthorized use of the traffic in‐
cident data or the RDS-TMC network, (b)
your violation of this directive and/or (c) any
unauthorized or unlawful activities by you in
connection herewith.
Seite 163
163
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is infor‐
mational only. User assumes all risk of use.
Total Traffic Network, BMW NA, and their
suppliers make no representations about
content, traffic and road conditions, route
usability, or speed.
C. The licensed material is provided to li‐
censee
“as is,” and “where is”. Total Traffic
Network, including, but not limited to, any
and all third party providers of any of the li‐
censed material, expressly disclaims, to the
fullest extent permitted by law, all warranties
or representations with respect to the li‐
censed material (including, without limita‐
tion, that the licensed material will be error-
free, will operate without interruption or that
the traffic data will be accurate), express, im‐
plied or statutory, including, without limita‐
tion, the implied warranties of merchanta‐
bility, non-infringement fitness for a
particular purpose, or those arising from a
course of dealing or usage of trade.
D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. or
BMW NA will be liable to you for any indirect,
special, consequential, exemplary, or inci‐
dental damages (including, without limita‐
tion, lost revenues, anticipated revenues, or
profits relating to the same) arising from any
claim relating directly or indirectly to use of
the traffic data, and even if Total Traffic Net‐
work, Inrix, Inc., or BMW NA are aware of the
possibility of such damages. These limita‐
tions apply to all claims, including, without
limitation, claims in contract and tort (such
as negligence, product liability and strict li‐
ability). Some states do not allow the exclu‐
sion or limitation of incidental or consequen‐
tial damages, so those particular limitations
may not apply to you.
▷ The traffic bulletins are indicated on the map
by symbols.
▷ The traffic bulletins for the surrounding area
are stored in a list.
The symbol in the function bar of the map
view turns red if there are traffic bulletins
that affect the calculated route.
Switching the reception on/off
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Receive Traffic Info"
Open the traffic bulletins
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Traffic Info"
First the traffic bulletins for the calculated
route are displayed.
The traffic bulletins are sorted by their dis‐
tance from the current position of the vehi‐
cle.
4. Select a traffic bulletin.
"More information": display additional
information.
5. Scroll to the next or previous traffic bulletin
if required.
Traffic bulletins on the map
"Traffic conditions/gray map"
Active: indication
on the control display is switched to shades of
gray. This enables a better view of the traffic
bulletins. The day/night mode is disregarded in
this setting. Symbols and special destinations
are not displayed.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Settings"
5. "Traffic conditions/gray map"
Symbols in the map view
Depending on the scale of the map and the lo‐
cation of the traffic obstruction along the route,
the symbols for the traffic obstructions are dis‐
played.
Additional information in the map view
Depending on the map scale, a traffic obstruc‐
tion's length, direction, and impact are displayed
Seite 164
164
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Navigation
in the map using triangles or gray bars along the
calculated route.
▷ Red: congestion.
▷ Orange: stop-and-go traffic.
▷ Yellow: heavy traffic.
▷ Green: clear roads.
▷ Gray: general traffic bulletins, e.g., construc‐
tion site.
The displayed information depends on the par‐
ticular traffic information service.
Filtering traffic bulletins
You
can set which traffic bulletins appear on the
map.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Traffic Info categories"
5. Select the desired categories.
Traffic bulletins of the selected category are dis‐
played on the map.
▷ Traffic bulletins that are relevant to the route
are always shown.
▷ For your own safety, traffic bulletins that no‐
tify you of potentially dangerous situations,
such as wrong-way drivers, cannot be hid‐
den.
Destination guidance with traffic
bulletins
Semi-dynamic destination guidance
When traffic bulletin reception is switched on,
semi-dynamic destination guidance is active.
The destination guidance system takes the
available
traffic information into account. A mes‐
sage is displayed depending on the route, the
traffic bulletins, and the possible detour routes.
A detour is suggested in the event of a traffic
obstruction. In addition, distance and time dif‐
ferences between the original route and the de‐
tour are displayed.
To accept the detour:
"Detour"
In the event of special hazards, e.g., objects on
the road, a message is displayed without a de‐
tour suggestion.
Detours
can also be accepted if the traffic mes‐
sages are called up in the list.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3.
"Traffic Info"
4. "Detour information"
5. "Detour"
Dynamic destination guidance
The
route is automatically changed in the event
of traffic obstructions.
▷ The system does not point out traffic ob‐
structions along the original route.
▷ Traffic bulletins continue to be displayed on
the map.
▷ Depending on road type and the kind and
extent of the traffic obstruction, the calcu‐
lated route may lead through the traffic ob‐
struction.
▷ Dangerous situations are displayed regard‐
less of the setting.
To activate dynamic destination guidance:
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Dynamic guidance"
Seite 165
165
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Navigation data
Information on the navigation data
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Navigation
system version": information on
the data version is displayed.
Updating the navigation data
General information
Navigation data and authorization codes are
available from your service center. Navigation
data are stored in the vehicle and can be up‐
dated.
▷ Depending on the data volume, a data up‐
date may take several hours.
▷ Update during the trip to preserve battery.
▷ During the update, only the basic functions
of the navigation system are available.
▷ The status of the update can be viewed.
▷ The system restarts after the update.
▷ The data carrier with the navigation data can
be removed after the update is complete.
Perform an update
1. Insert the navigation DVD into the DVD
player with the labeled side facing up.
2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
3. Enter the authorization code of the naviga‐
tion DVD and change the DVD if needed.
After interrupting your trip, follow the instruc‐
tions on the Control Display.
Viewing the status
1.
Press the button.
2. "Navigation update"
What to do if...
▷ The current transmission position cannot be
displayed?
The vehicle is located in an unrecognized
region, is in a poor reception area, or the
system is currently determining the posi‐
tion. Reception is usually best when you
have an unobstructed view of the sky.
▷ The destination without street information is
not used for route guidance?
When
city has been input, no downtown can
be determined.
Input any street in the selected city and start
destination guidance.
▷ The destination is not used for route guid‐
ance?
The destination data is not contained in the
navigation data. Select a destination that is
as close as possible to the original.
▷ Letters for destination input cannot be se‐
lected?
The stored data do not contain the data of
the destination.
Select a goal that is as close as possible to
the original.
▷ Is the map displayed in shades of gray?
"Traffic conditions/gray map" Active: indi‐
cation on the control display is switched to
shades of gray. This enables a better view of
the traffic bulletins.
▷ Spoken instructions are no longer output
during route guidance in front of intersec‐
tions?
The area has not yet been fully recorded, or
you have left the recommended route and
the system requires a few seconds to cal‐
culate a new route suggestion.
Seite 166
166
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Navigation
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Entertainment
The chapter helps assure your enjoyment when
receiving radio and television stations and playing
CDs, DVDs and tracks from the music collection.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Tone
General information
The sound settings are stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Treble, bass, balance, and
fader
▷ "Treble": treble adjustment.
▷ "Bass": depth adjustment.
▷ "Balance": left/right volume distribution.
▷ "Fader": front/rear volume distribution.
Setting treble, bass, balance, and fader
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. Select the desired tone settings.
4. To adjust: turn the controller.
5. To store: press the controller.
Equalizer*
Setting for individual audio frequency ranges.
Adjusting the equalizer
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Equalizer"
4. Select the desired setting.
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.
Multi-channel playback,
surround*
Choose
between stereo and multi-channel play‐
back, surround.
Setting multi-channel playback,
surround
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Surround"
Seite 170
170
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Tone
When surround is activated, multi-channel play‐
back is simulated when a stereo audio track is
played.
Volume
▷ "Speed
volume": speed-dependent volume
control.
▷ "PDC": volume of the PDC signal* com‐
pared to the entertainment sound output.
▷ "Gong": volume of the signal, such as the
safety belt reminder, compared to the en‐
tertainment sound output.
▷ "Microphone": volume of the microphone*
during a phone call.
▷ "Loudspeak.": volume of the loudspeakers*
during a phone call.
The following volumes are only stored for the
respective paired telephone: "Microphone",
"Loudspeak.".
Adjusting the volume
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
4. Select the desired volume setting.
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.
Resetting the tone settings
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Reset"
Opening the tone settings in
the Options menu
*
1. "CD/Multimedia" or "Radio"
2. If necessary, select additional entries, for ex‐
ample, "FM" or
"CD/DVD".
3. Open "Options".
4. "Tone"
5. Set the desired tone.
Seite 171
171
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Radio
Controls
1 Change entertainment sources
2 Change station/track
3 Programmable memory buttons
4 Volume, on/off
5 Change wave band
Sound output
Switching on/off
When
the ignition is switched off: press ON/OFF
button on the radio.
Muting
When the ignition is switched on or the engine
is running: press the ON/OFF button on the
radio.
AM/FM station
Selecting a station
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Select the desired station.
All saved stations are stored for the remote con‐
trol currently in use.
Changing the station via the button
Press the button.
Storing a station
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Highlight the desired station.
4. Press the controller for an extended period.
5. Select the desired memory location.
The stations are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
The
stations can also be stored on the program‐
mable memory buttons, refer to page 23.
Selecting a station manually
Station selection via the frequency.
Seite 172
172
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Radio
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. "Manual"
4. To select the frequency: turn the controller.
To store the station: press the controller for an
extended period.
RDS*
RDS
broadcasts additional information, such as
the station name, in the FM wave band. When
playing a station with multiple frequencies, the
system automatically switches to the frequency
with the best reception, if needed.
Switching the RDS on/off
1. "Radio"
2. "FM"
3. Open "Options".
4. "RDS"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
HD Radio™ reception
*
Many stations broadcast both analog and digital
signals.
License conditions
HD Radio™ technology manufactured under li‐
cense from iBiquity Digital Corp. U. S. and For‐
eign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD and HD
Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiq‐
uity Digital Corp.
Activating/deactivating digital radio
reception
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Open "Options".
4. "HD Radio Reception"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
This symbol is displayed in the status line
when the audio signal is digital.
In areas in which the station is not continuously
received in digital mode, the playback switches
between analog and digital reception. Due to
time delayed broadcasting, there may be repe‐
titions or interruptions. In this case, switch off
digital radio reception.
Displaying additional information
Some
stations broadcast additional information
on the current track, such as the name of the ar‐
tist.
1. Select the desired station.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Station info"
Selecting a substation
This symbol indicates that a main station also
broadcasts additional substations. The station
name of the main station ends in HD1. Station
names
of the substations end in HD2, HD3, etc.
1. Select the desired station.
2. Press the controller.
3. Select the substation.
When reception is poor, the substation is muted
for several seconds. If reception is interrupted
for an extended period, it switches back to the
main station.
Seite 173
173
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Weather Band*
General information
The availability of the Weather Band and the
number of available channels can vary depend‐
ing on the region.
Switching on the Weather Band
1. "Radio"
2. "Weather band"
3. Select the desired channel.
Additional information
Weather Band is a service of the National Oce‐
anic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA).
Additional information on the Internet:
www.nws.noaa.gov.
Satellite radio
*
General information
The channels are offered in predefined pack‐
ages. The packages must be enabled by tele‐
phone.
Navigation bar overview
Symbol Function
Change the list view.
Select the category.
Direct channel entry
Timeshift
Open the My Favorites category/
open a favorite.
Manage the favorites.
Traffic Jump
The functions of the navigation bar symbols can
also be stored on the programmable memory
buttons, refer to page 23.
Managing a subscription
To be able to enable or unsubscribe from the
channels, you must have reception. It is usually
at
its best when you have an unobstructed view
of the sky. The channel name is displayed in the
status line.
Enabling channels
The Unsubscribed Channels category contains
all disabled channels.
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3.
"Category"
4. Select the Unsubscribed Channels cate‐
gory.
5. Select the desired channel.
The phone number and an electronic serial
number, ESN, are displayed.
6. Select the phone number to have the chan‐
nel enabled.
You can unsubscribe from the channels again
via this phone number.
Unsubscribing from channels
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
Seite 174
174
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Radio
3. Open "Options".
4. "Manage subscription"
5. The phone number and an electronic serial
number, ESN, are displayed.
6. Call Sirius to unsubscribe from the chan‐
nels.
Selecting channels
You can only listen to enabled channels.
The selected channel is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Via iDrive
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Select "All channels" or the desired cate‐
gory.
4. Select the desired channel.
Via the buttons on the center console
Press the button.
The next channel is selected.
Via direct channel entry
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3.
"Set channel"
4. Turn the controller until the desired channel
is reached and press the controller.
Storing a channel
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de‐
sired category.
4. Select the desired channel.
5. Press the controller again.
6. Press the controller again to confirm the
highlighted channel.
7. Select the desired memory location.
The channels are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
The channels can also be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons, refer to page 23.
Changing the list view
The
list view changes every time the first symbol
on the navigation bar is pressed.
Information on the channel is displayed.
Symbol Meaning
Channel name
Artist
Track
Seite 175
175
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Selecting a category
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3.
"Category"
4. Select the desired category.
Timeshift
Approx. one hour of the program being broad‐
cast on the channel currently being listened to
is
stored in a buffer. Prerequisite: the signal must
be available.
The stored audio track can be played with a de‐
lay following the live broadcast. When the buffer
is full, the older tracks are overwritten. The buf‐
fer is cleared when a new channel is selected.
Opening the timeshift function
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3.
"Replay - Time shift"
▷ The red arrow shows the current playback
position.
▷ The time difference to the live broadcast is
displayed next to the buffer bar.
For live transmissions: "live".
Timeshift menu
Symbol Function
Go to the live broadcast
Playback/pause
Next track
Previous track
Symbol Function
Fast forward
Reverse
Automatic timeshift deactivated/ac‐
tivated
Automatic timeshift
When the function is activated, audio playback
is stopped automatically in the event of:
▷ Incoming and outgoing telephone calls.
▷ Activation of the voice activation system.
▷ Muting.
The audio playback then continues with a time
delay.
To activate:
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3.
"Replay - Time shift"
4. "Automatic time shift"
To deactivate: "Automatic time shift".
Storing favorites
Up
to 30 favorites can be stored in the favorites
list. Available favorites are artist, track, game,
league, and team.
Storing the artist, track, or game
It is only possible to store favorites that are cur‐
rently being broadcast. The channel information
must be available.
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de‐
sired category.
4. Select the desired channel.
5. Press the controller again.
6. Select the artist, track, or game.
Seite 176
176
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Radio
Storing the league or team
Leagues
or teams can be added to the favorites
from a selection list.
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3.
"Manage favorites"
4. "Add sports information"
5. Select the league.
6. Select "Add all teams" or the desired team.
Opening the favorites
If an activated favorite is played back, the fol‐
lowing message appears for approx. 20 sec‐
onds: "Favorite alert!".
"Favorites"
Select the symbol while the message is shown.
The displayed favorite is played.
If there is no message, the system changes to
the
My Favorites category. All favorites currently
being broadcast can be selected from a list.
Managing the favorites
Activating/deactivating the favorites
Favorites can be activated and deactivated
globally and individually.
1. "Satellite radio"
2.
"Manage favorites"
3. Select "Activate alert" or the desired favor‐
ites.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Deleting favorites
1. "Satellite radio"
2. "Manage favorites"
3. Highlight the desired favorite.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry"
Traffic Jump
Traffic and weather information for a selected
region is broadcast every few minutes.
Selecting a region
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Set jump"
5. Select the desired region.
The region is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Activating/deactivating the jump
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Jump to:"
Information for the selected region is broadcast
as soon as it is available.
A new panel opens.
Canceling the Traffic Jump: "Cancel".
Symbol Meaning
Information will be broadcast shortly.
Information is currently being broad‐
cast.
Seite 177
177
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Select one of the symbols to deactivate Traffic
Jump.
Automatic update
About
twice a year, Sirius performs an update of
the channel names and positions. The update
takes place automatically and may take several
minutes.
Notes
▷ Reception may not be available in some sit‐
uations, such as under certain environmen‐
tal or topographic conditions. The satellite
radio has no influence on this.
▷ The signal may not be available in tunnels or
underground garages next to tall buildings
or near trees, mountains or other powerful
sources of radio interference.
Stored stations
General information
It is possible to store up to 40 stations.
Calling up a station
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Select the desired station.
Storing a station
The station currently selected is stored.
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. "Store station"
4. Select the desired memory location.
The list of stored stations is stored for the re‐
mote control currently in use.
The
stations can also be stored on the program‐
mable memory buttons, refer to page 23.
Deleting a station
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Select the desired station.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry"
Seite 178
178
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Radio
CD/multimedia
Controls
1 Change the entertainment source
2 CD/DVD* drive
3 Eject CD/DVD
4 Change station/track
5 Programmable memory buttons
6 Volume, on/off
Sound output
Switching on/off
When
the ignition is switched off: press ON/OFF
button on the radio.
Muting
When the ignition is switched on or the engine
is running: press the ON/OFF button on the
radio.
CD/DVD*
Playback
Filling the CD/DVD* player
Insert the CD/DVD with the printed side up.
Playback begins automatically.
Reading can take a few minutes with com‐
pressed audio files.
Starting playback
A CD/DVD is located in the CD/DVD player or
DVD changer*.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
Symbol Meaning
CD/DVD* player
... DVD changer*
CD/DVD player, rear*
Playable formats
▷ DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-
RW,
DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, DVD
audio (video part only), DVD video*.
▷ CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA,
VCD*, SVCD*.
▷ Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC*,
M4A*.
Audio playback
Selecting the track using the button
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired track is played.
Seite 179
179
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Selecting a track via iDrive
Audio CDs
Select the desired track to begin playback.
CDs/DVDs* with compressed audio files
Depending on the data, some letters and num‐
bers of the CD/DVD may not be displayed cor‐
rectly.
1. Select the directory if necessary.
To change to a higher level directory: move
the controller to the left.
2. Select the desired track to begin playback.
Displaying information on the track
If information about a track has been stored, it is
displayed automatically:
▷ Interpret.
▷ Album track.
▷ Number of tracks on the CD/DVD*.
▷ File name of track.
Random playback
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD*.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Random"
CDs/DVDs* with compressed audio files: All
tracks in the selected directory are played in
random order.
Random mode is switched off when the audio
source is changed and the ignition is switched
off.
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button.
Seite 180
180
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
CD/multimedia
Automatic repeat*
The selected CDs or DVDs are repeated auto‐
matically.
Video playback*
Country codes
Only
DVDs with the code of the home region can
be played back; also refer to the information on
the DVD.
Code Region
1 USA, Canada
2 Japan, Europe, Middle East, South Af‐
rica
3 Southeast Asia
4 Australia, Central and South America,
New Zealand
5 Northwest Asia, North Africa
6 China
0 All regions
Playback
The video image is displayed on the front Con‐
trol
Display up to a speed of approx. 2 mph/3 km/
h; in some countries, it is only displayed if the
parking brake is set or if the automatic trans‐
mission is in position P.
DVD video
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select a DVD with video content.
4.
"DVD menu"
VCD/SVCD
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select a CD with video content.
4. "Select track"
5. Select the desired track.
Video menu
To
open the video menu: turn the controller dur‐
ing playback.
Press the controller when "Back" is displayed.
Symbol Function
Open the DVD menu.
Start playback.
Pause
Stop
Next chapter
Previous chapter
Fast forward
Reverse
In fast forward/reverse: the speed increases ev‐
ery
time the controller is pressed. To stop, start
playback.
DVD menu
1. If necessary, turn the controller to open the
video menu.
Seite 181
181
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
2. "DVD menu"
The
DVD menu is displayed. The display de‐
pends on the contents of the DVD.
3. To select menu items: move the controller
and press it.
To change to the video menu: turn the controller
and press it.
DVD/VCD settings
For some DVDs, settings can only be made via
the DVD menu; refer also to the information on
the DVD.
Selecting the language*
The languages that are available depend on the
DVD.
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Audio/language"
4. Select the desired language.
Selecting the subtitles*
The subtitles that are available depend on the
DVD.
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Subtitles"
4. Select the desired language or "Do not
display subtitles".
Setting the brightness, contrast and color
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Display settings"
4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Color"
5. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
Selecting the zoom
Display the video image on the entire screen.
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
Seite 182
182
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
CD/multimedia
3. "Additional options"
4. "Zoom mode"
Selecting a track
DVD video:
1. Turn the controller when the DVD menu is
displayed.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Select title"
5. Select the desired track.
VCD/SVCD:
1. "Select track"
2. Select the desired track.
Selecting the camera angle*
The availability of a different camera angle de‐
pends on the DVD and the current DVD track.
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Viewing angle"
5. Select the desired camera angle.
Opening the main menu, back
These functions are not contained on every
DVD. Therefore, they may not be available for
use.
DVD changer*
Above the glove compartment
Press the button.
The cover opens automatically.
To close: press the cover closed.
Controls and displays
1 Empty DVD compartments
2 LED on DVD slot
3 Buttons for DVD compartments
4 DVD slot
5 Fill DVD compartments
Filling the DVD compartments
individually
1. Press the button.
The LED on the first empty compartment
flashes.
2. Select another compartment if necessary.
3. Wait for the LEDs on the DVD slot to flash.
4. Insert a single CD or DVD in the middle.
The CD/DVD is drawn in automatically and
placed into the selected compartment.
Seite 183
183
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Sliding in CDs/DVDs
Do not insert the CD/DVD until the LEDs
on
the DVD slot are flashing; otherwise, the CD/
DVD or the DVD changer could be damaged.
Do not continue to push on the CD/DVD; this
may cause it to jam and prevent it from being
able to eject again.◀
Filling all empty DVD compartments
1.
Hold the button down.
The LEDs on the empty CD compartments
flash.
2. Wait for the LEDs on the DVD slot to begin
flashing
and then insert each CD or DVD into
the center of the slot.
The CDs/DVDs are drawn in automatically
and placed into the vacant compartments.
Sliding in CDs/DVDs
Do not insert the CD/DVD until the LEDs
on the DVD slot are flashing; otherwise, the CD/
DVD or the DVD changer could be damaged.
Do not continue to push on the CD/DVD; this
may cause it to jam and prevent it from being
able to eject again.◀
After they are inserted, it may take several mi‐
nutes for the CDs/DVDs to be read in.
Removing a single CD/DVD
1.
Press the button.
2. Select the DVD compartment.
The CD/DVD is partially ejected.
3. Remove the CD/DVD.
Removing all CDs/DVDs
1. Hold the button down.
2. Remove the CDs/DVDs.
Malfunctions
If
all LEDs on the DVD changer are flashing rap‐
idly, a malfunction has occurred.
To eliminate the malfunction:
1. Press one of the buttons:
▷
▷
The CD/DVD last inserted is ejected.
2. Remove the CD/DVD.
The DVD changer is functional again after the
LEDs stop flashing rapidly.
Audio playback*
The audio track of a DVD can be played back
even if video playback is not possible in the ve‐
hicle.
Only
the main film without the previews or extras
can be played back.
Starting playback
A DVD is located in the DVD changer.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired DVD.
Selecting a chapter using the button
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired chapter is played.
Selecting a chapter using iDrive
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired DVD.
4. Select the desired chapter.
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button.
Selecting the language*
The languages that are available depend on the
DVD.
Seite 184
184
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
CD/multimedia
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired DVD.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Audio/language"
6. Select the desired language.
Notes
CD/DVD player and changer
Do not remove the cover
BMW CD/DVD players and changers are
officially designated Class 1 laser products. Do
not operate if the cover is damaged; otherwise,
severe eye damage may occur.◀
CDs and DVDs
Use of CDs/DVDs
▷ Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs
with labels applied, as these can be‐
come detached during playback due
to
heat buildup and can cause irrepar‐
able damage to the device.
▷ Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard
diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play
CDs/DVDs with an adapter, e.g., single CDs;
otherwise, the CDs or the adapter may jam
and no longer eject.
▷ Do not use combined CDs/DVDs, e.g., DVD
Plus, as the CDs/DVDs can jam and will no
longer eject.◀
General malfunctions
▷ CD/DVD changers and players have been
optimized for performance in vehicles. In
some instances they may be more sensitive
to faulty CDs/DVDs than stationary devices
would be.
▷ If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check
whether it has been inserted correctly.
Humidity
High
levels of humidity can lead to condensation
on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens, and
temporarily prevent playback.
Malfunctions involving individual CDs/
DVDs
If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/
DVDs, this can be due to one of the following
causes:
Home-recorded CDs/DVDs
▷ Possible reasons for malfunctions with
home-recorded CDs/DVDs are inconsistent
data creation or recording processes, or
poor quality or old age of the blank CD/DVD.
▷ Only label CDs/DVDs on the upper side with
a pen intended for this purpose.
Damage
▷ Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and
moisture.
▷ Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve.
▷ Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures
over 122 ℉/50 ℃, high humidity or direct
sunlight.
CDs/DVDs with copy protection
CDs/DVDs are often provided with a copy pro‐
tection feature by the manufacturer. This can
mean that some CDs/DVDs cannot be played or
can only be played to a limited extent.
MACROVISION
This product contains copyrighted technology
that is based on multiple registered US patents
and the intellectual property of the Macrovision
Corporation and other manufacturers. The use
of this copy protection must be approved by
Macrovision. Media protected by this product -
unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision - may
only be used for private purposes. Copying of
this technology is prohibited.
Seite 185
185
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
DTS Digital Surround™
Manufactured
under license under U.S.
Patent Numbers: 5,451,942;
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 &
and other patents granted and registered in the
USA and worldwide. DTS and the logo are reg‐
istered trademarks & DTS Digital Surround and
the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS Inc. ©
DTS, Inc. All rights reserved.
Music collection*
Storing music
General information
Music tracks from CDs/DVDs and USB devices
can be stored in the music collection on a hard
disc in the vehicle and played from there.
▷ Audio CD: tracks are converted into a com‐
pressed audio format. If available, informa‐
tion on the album, such as the artist, is
stored as well.
▷ CD/DVD or USB device with compressed
audio
files: the entire content of the CD/DVD
or the USB device is stored in the vehicle as
an album. The WMA, MP3, M4A*, and
AAC* formats are stored. Individual tracks
and directories can be deleted later, Delet‐
ing a track and directory, refer to page 189.
Tracks with DRM copy protection can be
stored but cannot be played back.
Backing up music data
Regularly back up the music data; other‐
wise, it could be lost if there is a fault on the hard
disk.◀
Music recognition technology and re‐
lated data are provided by Gracenote®.
Gracenote is the industry standard in music rec‐
ognition technology and related content deliv‐
ery. For more information, please visit
www.gracenote.com.
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc.,
copyright © 2000-2009 Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright © 2000-2009 Gracenote.
This product and service may practice one or
more
of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525;
#6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132,
#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459,
#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pend‐
ing. Some services supplied under license from
Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.
Storing from a CD/DVD
1. Insert a CD or DVD into the CD/DVD player.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "CD/DVD"
4.
Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player.
5. "Store in vehicle"
The music collection is displayed and the first
track of the CD/DVD is played back. During the
storage process, the tracks are played in se‐
quence.
Observe the following during the storage proc‐
ess:
Do not switch to the CD/DVD player and do not
remove
the CD/DVD from the CD/DVD player as
this will interrupt the storage process. You can
switch to the other audio sources without inter‐
rupting the storage process. Tracks from the
current CD/DVD that have already been stored
can be called up.
Interrupting storage
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
Seite 186
186
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
CD/multimedia
3. "Storing..."
4. "Cancel storing"
The storage process is interrupted and can be
continued at any time.
Continuing the storage process
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player.
4. "Continue storing"
Storage of the CD/DVD continues at the begin‐
ning of the track at which storage was inter‐
rupted.
Album information
During
storage, information such as the name of
the artist is stored with the track, if this informa‐
tion is available in the vehicle database or on the
CD.
To update the database, contact your service
center.
Storing from a USB device
To store music, a suitable device must be con‐
nected to the USB interface in the glove com‐
partment.
▷ Suitable devices: USB mass storage devi‐
ces, such as USB flash drives or MP3 players
with a USB interface.
▷ Unsuitable devices: USB hard drives, USB
hubs, USB memory card readers with mul‐
tiple inserts, Apple iPod/iPhone. Music from
the Apple iPod/iPhone can be played via the
USB audio interface in the center armrest.
1. Connect the USB device to the USB inter‐
face in the glove compartment, refer to
page 138.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "Music collection"
4. Open "Options".
5. "Music data import/export"
6. "Import music (USB)"
Playing music
Music search
All tracks for which additional information has
been stored can be accessed by the music
search. Tracks without additional information
can be called up via the corresponding album,
refer to page 188.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Music search"
Seite 187
187
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
4. Select the desired category.
5. Select the desired entry:
▷ Select "A-Z search", refer to page 24,
and input the desired entry.
▷ Select the desired entry from the list.
6. Select other categories if you wish.
The tracks found are listed in alphabetical
order.
Not all categories need to be selected. For
example,
to search for all tracks by a certain
artist, call up that artist only. All of the tracks
by that artist are then displayed.
7. "Start play"
The list of tracks is repeated automatically.
Restarting the music search
"New search"
Music search using spoken instructions*
Instructions for the voice activation system, re‐
fer to page 25.
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. ›Music search‹
3. Open the desired category, e.g., ›Select
artist‹.
4. Say the desired entry in the list.
5. Select other categories if you wish.
To select a track directly: ›Title ...‹.
Say the voice command and the name of the
desired track in a single command.
Current playback
The
list of tracks that was generated last by the
music search, or the album that was selected
last.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Current playback"
4. Select the desired track, if necessary.
Top 50
The 50 most frequently played tracks.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Top 50"
4. Select the desired track, if necessary.
Albums
All
stored albums, listed in order of their storage
dates.
Symbol Format
Audio CD
Compressed audio files
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Select the desired album.
Depending on the album, the tracks or the
subdirectories of the album are displayed.
Seite 188
188
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
CD/multimedia
The first track is played automatically, if pos‐
sible.
4. Change directories if needed to select
tracks.
To go up a level in the directory: move the
controller to the left.
Random playback
All
tracks of the selection are played back in ran‐
dom order.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Random"
Managing music
Albums
Renaming an album
*
The name of the album, if available, is automat‐
ically entered when the album is stored. If the
name is not available, it can be changed later if
desired.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the desired album.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Rename album"
6. Select the letters individually.
Deleting an album
An album cannot be deleted while a track from
that album is being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the desired album.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete album"
Deleting a track and directory
A track cannot be deleted while it is being
played.
A
directory cannot be deleted while a track from
that directory is being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the directory or track.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete folder" or "Delete track"
Free memory capacity
Display the free memory capacity in the music
collection.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Free memory"
Seite 189
189
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Music collection
Backing up the music collection
The entire music collection can be stored on a
USB device. Make sure there is enough free
memory capacity on the USB device.
Depending
on the number of tracks, backing up
the music collection may take several hours.
Therefore, it is best to perform the backup dur‐
ing a long trip.
1. Starting the engine.
2. Connect the USB device to the USB inter‐
face in the glove compartment.
3. "CD/Multimedia"
4. "Music collection"
5. Open "Options".
6. "Music data import/export"
7. "Backup music on USB"
Storing the music collection in the vehicle
When
storing from the USB device, the existing
music collection in the vehicle is replaced.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Music data import/export"
5. "Restore music from USB"
Deleting the music collection
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete music collection"
External devices
At a glance
Symbol Meaning
AUX-IN port
USB audio interface*
Mobile phone audio interface*
Bluetooth audio*
Rear AUX-IN port* on the left
Rear AUX-IN port* on the right
AUX-IN port
At a glance
▷ For connecting audio devices, e.g., MP3
player. The sound is output on the vehicle
loudspeakers.
▷ Recommendation: use medium tone and
volume settings on the audio device. The
tone depends on the quality of the audio
files.
Seite 190
190
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
CD/multimedia
Connecting
The AUX-IN port is in the center armrest.
Connect the headphones or line-out connector
of the device to the jack plug.
Playback
1. Connect the audio device, switch it on and
select a track on the audio device.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. If necessary "External devices".
4. "AUX front"
Volume
The volume of the sound output is dependent
on the audio device. If this volume differs mark‐
edly
from the volume of the other audio sources,
it is advisable to adjust the volumes.
Adjusting the volume
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. If necessary "External devices".
3.
"AUX front"
4. "Volume"
5. Turn the controller until the desired volume
is set and press the controller.
USB audio interface*/mobile phone
audio interface
*
At a glance
It is possible to connect external audio devices.
They can be operated via iDrive. The sound is
output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
Connectors for external devices
▷ Connection via USB audio interface: Apple
iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g., MP3 play‐
ers,
USB flash drives, or mobile phones that
are supported by the USB audio interface.
▷ Connection via snap-in adapter when equip‐
ped with extended connectivity of the music
player in the mobile phone: Apple iPhone or
mobile phones.
Due to the large number of different audio devi‐
ces available on the market, it cannot be ensured
that every audio device/mobile phone is opera‐
ble on the vehicle.
Ask your service center about suitable audio de‐
vices/mobile phones.
Audio files
Standard audio files can be played back:
▷ MP3.
▷ WMA.
▷ WAV (PCM).
▷ AAC*, M4A*.
▷ Playback lists: M3U, WPL, PLS.
Connection of Apple iPod/iPhone via
USB audio interface
The USB audio interface is in the center armrest.
Seite 191
191
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Connect using a flexible adapter cable.
Connect the Apple iPod/iPhone
to the USB interface.
The Apple iPod/iPhone menu
structure is supported by the
USB audio interface.
Connection of a USB device via the
USB audio interface
The USB audio interface is in the center armrest.
Connect
using a flexible adapter cable to protect
the USB audio interface and the USB device
against physical damage.
Connect the USB device to the
USB interface.
After connecting for the first time
Information on all music tracks, e.g. artist or type
of music, as well as playback lists are transmit‐
ted into the vehicle. This may take some time,
depending on the USB device and the number
of tracks.
During transmission, the tracks can be called up
via the file directory.
Number of tracks
Information from up to four USB devices or for
approx. 36,000 tracks can be stored in the ve‐
hicle. If a fifth device is connected or if more than
36,000 tracks are stored, information on exist‐
ing music tracks may be deleted.
Copy protection
Music
tracks with integrated Digital Rights Man‐
agement (DRM) cannot be played.
Playback
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the
or symbol.
The playback starts with the first track.
On
the split screen*, the CD cover for the music
track might be displayed after a few seconds.
Track search
Selection is possible via:
▷ Playback lists.
▷ Information: type of music, artist, and, if
available, composer, album, track.
▷ In addition, for USB devices: file directory
and, if available, composer.
Tracks are displayed if they have been saved in
the Latin alphabet.
Starting the track search
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the
or symbol.
4. "Search"
5. Select the desired category, e.g., "Genre"
or
"Artist".
All entries are displayed in a list.
▷ Open "A-Z search" and input the de‐
sired entry. When a letter is entered, the
results are filtered using this letter as the
first letter. If multiple letters are entered,
Seite 192
192
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
CD/multimedia
all results that contain that sequence are
displayed.
▷ Select the desired entry from the list.
6. Select other categories if you wish.
Not all categories need to be selected. For
example,
if all of the tracks by a certain artist
are to be displayed, call up that artist only.
All of the tracks by that artist are then dis‐
played.
7. "Start play"
Restarting a track search
"New search"
Playback lists
Calling up playback lists.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the
or symbol.
4. "Playlists"
Current playback
List of tracks currently being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
4. "Current playback"
Random playback
The current list of tracks is played back in ran‐
dom order.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Random"
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button.
Video playback*
At a glance
Video playback via snap-in adapter possible.
They can be operated via iDrive. The sound is
output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
Playback
The video image is displayed on the front Con‐
trol
Display up to a speed of approx. 2 mph/3 km/
h; in some countries, it is only displayed if the
parking brake is set or if the automatic trans‐
mission is in position P.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3.
Select the symbol.
4. "Video"
5. Select the directory if necessary.
To change to a higher level directory: move
the controller to the left.
6. Select the desired video file to begin play‐
back.
Video menu
Symbol Function
Next video file
Previous video file
Double-click on an icon to play back
previous video file.
Notes
Do not expose the audio device to extreme en‐
vironmental conditions, such as very high tem‐
peratures; refer to the audio device operating
instructions.
Seite 193
193
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Depending on the configuration of the audio
files, e.g., bit rates greater than 256 kbit/s, the
files may not play back correctly in each case.
Information on connection
▷ The connected audio device is supplied with
a
max. power of 500 mA if supported by the
device. Therefore, do not additionally con‐
nect the device to a socket in the vehicle;
otherwise, playback may be compromised.
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB audio interface.
▷ Do not connect USB hard drives.
▷ Do not use the USB audio interface to re‐
charge external devices.
Bluetooth audio*
At a glance
▷ Music files on external devices such as audio
devices or mobile phones can be played
back via Bluetooth.
Use of a mobile phone as an audio source,
refer to page 213.
▷ The sound is output on the vehicle loud‐
speakers.
▷ The volume of the sound output is depend‐
ent on the device. If necessary, adjust the
volume on the device.
▷ Up to four external devices can be paired
with the vehicle.
Requirements
▷ The device is suitable. Information under
www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.
▷ The device is ready for operation.
▷ The ignition is switched on.
▷ Bluetooth is activated on the vehicle, refer to
page 213, and on the device.
▷ Bluetooth presettings must be made on the
device, such as for a connection without
confirmation or visibility; refer to the device
operating instructions.
▷ A number with at least four and a maximum
of 16 digits is defined as the Bluetooth pass‐
key. It is only required once for pairing.
Pairing and connecting
Pairing a device
To
avoid becoming distracted and posing
an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehi‐
cle's occupants and to other road users, only
pair the device while the vehicle is stationary.◀
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio".
4. "Add new phone"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐
played.
5. Perform additional steps on the device, refer
to the device operating instructions: for in‐
stance, search for or connect the Bluetooth
device or a new device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the device display.
6. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the device display.
Prompt via iDrive or the device to enter the
same Bluetooth passkey.
Seite 194
194
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
CD/multimedia
7. Enter the passkey and confirm.
8. Select the desired functions with which the
device is to be connected, for instance
"Audio".
9. "OK"
If pairing was successful, the device is displayed
as connected.
White
symbol
: the device is active as an audio
source.
If
pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., refer
to page 196.
Connecting a specific device
A device that has already been paired can be
connected as an active audio source.
Connecting is not possible when data is ex‐
changed via a mobile phone connected via Blue‐
tooth.
Requirements
If necessary, activate the audio connection of
the desired device from the list of paired devi‐
ces.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio".
4. Select the desired device from the list of
paired devices.
5. Open "Options".
6. "Configure phone"
7. "Audio"
8. "OK"
Connecting the device
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio".
4. Select the desired device from the list of
paired devices.
White symbol : the device is active as an audio
source.
Playback
General information
▷ The display of music track information de‐
pends on the device.
▷ Operation can takes place on the device or
iDrive.
▷ Playback is interrupted when data is ex‐
changed via a mobile phone connected via
Bluetooth.
Starting playback
1. Connect the device.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "External devices"
Seite 195
195
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
4. Select the symbol.
5. Select the desired track from the list, if nec‐
essary.
Playback menu*
Depending
on the particular device, some of the
functions may not be available.
Symbol Function
Next track
Fast forward: press and hold the
symbol.
Previous music track
Reverse: press and hold the symbol.
Disconnecting the audio connection
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. Highlight the desired device.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Configure phone"
6. "Audio"
7. "OK"
Unpairing a device
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio".
4. Highlight the device that is to be unpaired.
5. Open "Options".
6. "Remove phone from list"
What to do if...
Information
on suitable devices can be found at
www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.
Suitable mobile phones, refer to page 212.
The device is not supported by the vehicle.
▷ Perform a software update*, refer to
page 197, if needed.
The device could not be paired or connected.
▷ Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the device
and the vehicle match? Enter the same
passkey on the device and via iDrive.
▷ Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter
the
passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure.
▷ Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
to the device or vehicle? Delete connections
with other devices if necessary.
▷ Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or
does it have only a limited remaining battery
life? Charge the mobile phone in the snap-
in adapter or via the charging cable.
▷ Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi‐
ble that only one device can be connected
to the vehicle. Unpair the connected device
from the vehicle and pair and connect only
one device.
▷ The device no longer reacts? Switch the de‐
vice off and on again.
▷ Repeat the pairing procedure.
Music cannot be played back.
▷ Start the program for playing back music
data on the device and select a track on the
device if necessary.
▷ Switch the radio off and on again.
Music files can only be played back softly.
Seite 196
196
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
CD/multimedia
▷ Adjust the volume settings on the device.
Playback is disturbed when buttons are pressed
or by other messages on the device.
▷ Switch off the button tones and other signal
tones on the device.
Playback is interrupted by a telephone call or
traffic
bulletin and is not resumed automatically.
▷ Switch the radio off and on again.
Playback is not possible if the mobile phone is
connected both via Bluetooth Audio and via the
extended connectivity of the music player in the
mobile phone*.
▷ Disconnect one of the two connections; for
example, disconnect the audio connection,
refer to page 196, and restart playback.
If all points in this list have been checked and the
required function is still not available, please
contact the hotline or service center.
Software Update*
The vehicle supports various external devices
depending on the current software version. With
a software update, the vehicle can support new
cell phones* or new external devices*.
The updating of the software is done via:
▷ USB*.
Updates and related current information is
available at www.bmw.com/update.
▷ TeleService*.
Existing software can be updated directly via
the vehicle.
Displaying the current version
The currently installed software is displayed.
1. "Settings"
2. "Software update"
3. "Show current version"
SelectDesired version* to displayAdditional in‐
formation*.
Updating software via USB*
The software may only be updated when the ve‐
hicle is stationary.
1. Store the file for the software-update in the
main director of a USB flash drive.
2. Insert the USB flash drive into the USB in‐
terface of the USB audio interface in the
center armrest. An update via the USB in‐
terface in the glove compartment is not pos‐
sible.
3. "Settings"
4. "Software update"
5. "Update software"
6. If necessary. "USB".
7. "Start update"
8. "OK"
All listed software updates are installed.
Updating software via
TeleService*
The software may only be updated when the ve‐
hicle is stationary.
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. "Settings"
3. "Software update"
4. "Update software"
5. If necessary "TeleService".
6. If necessary, "Start update".
7. "Start update"
8. "OK"
All listed software updates are installed.
To interrupt updating: "Cancel".
Restoring the previous version
If it should become necessary, the software ver‐
sion prior to the last software update can be re‐
stored.
Seite 197
197
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
The previous version may only be restored when
the vehicle is stationary.
1. "Settings"
2. "Software update"
3. "Restore previous version"
4. "OK" Double-click.
All listed software updates are removed.
Note
While the software is being updated or a previ‐
ous version is being restoredBMW Assist*, Of‐
fice functions* and the connected devices are
temporarily unavailable. Wait several minutes
for the functions to become available again.
Rear audio remote control*
The concept
The rear audio remote control can be used to
control
the following audio functions in the front:
▷ "Radio"
▷ "CD/Multimedia"
The unit is operated in the same manner as the
corresponding buttons on the CD/DVD* player.
In the center armrest in the rear
Storage is possible in a vertical or horizontal po‐
sition in the center armrest.
Menu navigation
Press the button Function
Turn the wheel: adjusts the
volume.
Press the center knob:
switches the sound on/off.
Changes the entertainment
source.
Changes the station, track
or chapter.
Press and hold the button:
fast forward/reverse.
The transmission time of the remote control is
limited by law. To execute a function again,
press or turn the required button again.
Replacing the batteries
No rechargeable batteries
Do not use rechargeable batteries, as
damage may result from the substances in the
batteries.◀
1. Remove the cover. Press on the cover, ar‐
row 1, and push forward, arrow 2.
2. Insert batteries of the same type.
3. Close the cover.
Take the used battery to a recycling cen‐
ter or to your service center.
Seite 198
198
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
CD/multimedia
Rear entertainment*
Controls
1 Screen, left
2 Screen, right
3 Center armrest, remote control
4 CD/DVD player
Rear CD/DVD player
1 CD/DVD slot
2 Eject CD/DVD
3 On/off, right
4 Headphone connection, right
5 RCA sockets
6 Headphone connection, left
7 On/off, left
Switching the system on/off
Press
the left or right side of the button
on the CD/DVD player in the rear for the
respective page.
Rear entertainment and screens are switched
on/off.
After
switching off the ignition, the system must
be switched on again.
Screens
Adjusting
Danger of burns when screen is folded out
Do not reach behind the screen; other‐
wise, there is the danger of getting burned. The
back of the screen can become very hot.◀
▷ To fold out: pull at the bottom edge.
▷ To fold in: press against the bottom edge.
Notes
▷ Do not cover lower screen edge, since this
is where the sensors and the infrared inter‐
face are installed.
▷ When loading the rear seats and adjusting
the backrest of the front seat, fold in the
screens.
▷ When cleaning the screen, follow the care
instructions, refer to page 273.
Seite 199
199
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Remote control
In the center armrest in the rear
Storage is possible in a vertical or horizontal po‐
sition in the center armrest.
Menu navigation
Press the but‐
ton
Function
Operating concept as for the
front controller.
Turn the wheel: highlight a
menu item.
Press the center knob: con‐
firm the selection.
Pressing arrow keys corre‐
sponds to moving controller:
switching between panels.
Open the main menu.
Displays the previous menu.
Opens the "Options" menu.
Changes the station, track or
chapter.
Press and hold the button:
fast forward/reverse.
Adjusts the volume.
Switches the volume adjust‐
ment to the left/right.
The transmission time of the remote control is
limited by law. To execute a function again,
press or turn the required button again.
Replacing the batteries
No rechargeable batteries
Do not use rechargeable batteries, as
damage may result from the substances in the
batteries.◀
1. Remove the cover. Press on the cover, ar‐
row 1, and push forward, arrow 2.
2. Insert batteries of the same type.
3. Close the cover.
Take the used battery to a recycling cen‐
ter or to your service center.
Controls
Almost
all functions can be operated in the same
manner as they are in the front. Special features
of operating the system in the rear are described
here.
Audio/video playback
Audio
Audio can be played back via rear entertainment
from any source in the vehicle.
Operation is the same as for the front audio play‐
back, refer to page 179.
Video
Video can be played back in the rear from the
following sources:
Seite 200
200
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Rear entertainment
▷ DVD changer*.
▷ Rear CD/DVD player.
▷ External device in rear.
If a video image is being played back in the rear,
the rear CD/DVD player cannot be selected in
the front.
Operation
is the same as for the front video play‐
back, refer to page 181.
Radio
When the same radio source is selected in the
front and rear (e.g., FM/AM), the same radio sta‐
tion is played.
Operation is the same as for the front radio, refer
to page 172.
CD/multimedia
CD/DVD
When the same audio source (front CD/DVD
player, rear CD/DVD player, DVD changer) is se‐
lected in the front and rear, the same material is
played.
Operation is the same as for the front CD/DVD,
refer to page 179.
Notes on CDs/DVDs, refer to page 185.
Music collection*
Music can only be stored and data can only be
exported and imported via the front CD/DVD
player or the USB interface in the glove com‐
partment.
When music collections are selected in the front
and rear, they are played back separately.
Operation is the same as for the front music col‐
lection, refer to page 186.
Tone
Only treble and bass can be set in the rear. The
settings are made separately for the left and
right headphones.
Operation is the same as for the front tone, refer
to page 170.
Adjusting
The following settings are available:
▷ "Rear displays"
▷ "Language/Units": language can be set
globally for all screens.
▷ "Tone"
Options menu
The split screen is not available and there is no
Integrated Owner's Manual.
Operation
is the same as for the front menu op‐
tions, refer to page 21.
Enabling
Enabling operation in the rear
Only possible via the iDrive in the front.
1. "Settings"
2. "Allow rear control"
3. Select the desired priority.
Priority options
The driver has priority
▷ The source selected via iDrive in the front is
output
on the vehicle loudspeakers and can
be selected but not operated from the rear.
Other audio or video sources can be oper‐
ated.
▷ Sound can only be output in the rear via
headphones.
▷ The source that is to be displayed in the rear
can be set via the iDrive in the front.
Seite 201
201
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
To set the source in the rear via the iDrive in the
front:
1. "CD/Multimedia" or"Radio"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Select rear source"
4. Select the desired audio or video source.
Same priority
▷ All audio and video sources can be operated
via the iDrive in the front and rear.
▷ Sound is output in the rear via headphones:
the
source selected via the iDrive in the front
is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
▷ Sound is output via loudspeakers: the
source selected last via the iDrive in the front
or rear is output via the vehicle loudspeak‐
ers.
The rear has priority
▷ When the source selected in the rear is
played on headphones, it can be selected
but not operated via iDrive in the front. Other
audio or video sources can be operated.
▷ Sound is output in the rear via headphones:
the source selected via the iDrive in the front
is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
▷ Sound is output via loudspeakers: the
source selected in the rear is output on the
vehicle loudspeakers. Audio or video sour‐
ces cannot be selected via the iDrive in the
front.
Switching off the rear DVD
▷ Rear entertainment is switched off.
▷ To switch rear entertainment back on: select
a different priority via the iDrive in the front
and switch on the system, refer to
page 199.
Headphones, vehicle
loudspeakers
Connecting the headphones
Normal headphones
Connect via the jack 1/8"/3.5 mm, refer to
page 199, on the rear CD/DVD player.
Infrared headphones
Connection via the infrared interface on the
lower edge of the screen.
Fitting infrared headphones and information on
which headphones are supported can be ob‐
tained from your service center.
When using infrared headphones, ensure that
the connection between the headphones and
the infrared interface is not disrupted:
▷ Do not place an obstacle between the inter‐
face and headphones.
▷ Do not cover the interface.
▷ Do not scratch the interface.
Fold up display screens for interference-free re‐
ception.
Unfavorable light conditions such as bright am‐
bient light can impair reception.
Sound output on the headphones or
vehicle loudspeakers
Operation is only possible in the rear.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Headphones" or "Loudspeakers"
With the following setting, sound output in the
rear is not possible via the vehicle speakers:
"Driver control".
External devices
General information
External audio and video devices and digital
cameras can be connected to cinch sockets, re‐
fer to page 199, on the CD/DVD player. Opera‐
tion takes place on the external device.
Seite 202
202
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Rear entertainment
Due to the large number of different audio and
video devices available on the market, it cannot
be ensured that every audio and video device
will be displayed correctly on the screen.
Connecting an external device
1. Fold down the cover in front of the cinch
sockets on the CD/DVD player.
2. Connect the external device to the RCA
sockets.
▷ Video: yellow socket.
▷ Audio: white and red socket.
Starting playback
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
Volume
The volume of the sound output is dependent
on the audio device. If this volume differs mark‐
edly
from the volume of the other audio sources,
it is advisable to adjust the volumes.
Adjusting the volume
The volume can only be adjusted if no external
video device is connected.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the
or symbol.
4. "Volume"
5. Turn the controller until the desired volume
is set and press the controller.
What to do if...
Only a black screen is visible.
▷ Switch on the system.
There are no options available on the screen.
▷ Replace remote control batteries.
Radio stations or TV channels are grayed out
and cannot be selected.
▷ Function is limited due to the selected pri‐
ority. Change priority.
The DVD does not play.
▷ Playback does not begin automatically.
Start DVD manually, refer to page 181.
The volume of the rear vehicle speakers cannot
be adjusted.
▷ Sound in the rear is output via the head‐
phones. Change priority if necessary and
output sound via vehicle speakers.
Seite 203
203
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Professional rear entertainment*
Controls
1 Screen, left
2 Screen, right
3 Controller with buttons
4 CD/DVD player
Rear CD/DVD player
1 CD/DVD slot
2 Eject CD/DVD
3 On/off, right
4 Headphone connection, right
5 RCA sockets
6 Headphone connection, left
7 On/off, left
Switching the system on/off
Press
the left or right side of the button
on the CD/DVD player in the rear for the
respective page.
Rear entertainment and screens are switched
on/off.
After
switching off the ignition, the system must
be switched on again.
Screens
Adjusting
Danger of burns when screen is folded out
Do not reach behind the screen; other‐
wise, there is the danger of getting burned. The
back of the screen can become very hot.◀
▷ To fold out: pull at the bottom edge.
▷ To fold in: press against the bottom edge.
Notes
▷ Do not cover lower screen edge, since this
is where the sensors and the infrared inter‐
face are installed.
▷ When loading the rear seats and adjusting
the backrest of the front seat, fold in the
screens.
▷ When cleaning the screen, follow the care
instructions, refer to page 273.
Seite 204
204
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Professional rear entertainment
iDrive in the rear
Operation is the same as for the iDrive in the
front, refer to page 19.
▷ To adjust the volume: turn, arrows 1.
▷ To activate the controller and switch be‐
tween the screens: press the buttons, ar‐
rows 2.
A
green LED indicates which screen is active
and can be operated via the iDrive in the rear.
Controls
Almost
all functions can be operated in the same
manner as they are in the front. Special features
of operating the system in the rear are described
here.
Audio/video playback
Audio
Audio can be played back via rear entertainment
from any source in the vehicle.
Operation is the same as for the front audio play‐
back, refer to page 179.
Video
Video can be played back in the rear from the
following sources:
▷ DVD changer*.
▷ Rear CD/DVD player.
▷ External device in rear.
If a video image is being played back in the rear,
the rear CD/DVD player cannot be selected in
the front.
Operation is the same as for the front video play‐
back, refer to page 181.
Radio
When the same radio source is selected in the
front
and rear (e.g., FM/AM), the same radio sta‐
tion is played.
Operation is the same as for the front radio, refer
to page 172.
CD/multimedia
CD/DVD
When the same audio source (front CD/DVD
player, rear CD/DVD player, DVD changer) is se‐
lected in the front and rear, the same material is
played.
Operation is the same as for the front CD/DVD,
refer to page 179.
Notes on CDs/DVDs, refer to page 185.
Music collection*
Music can only be stored and data can only be
exported and imported via the front CD/DVD
player or the USB interface in the glove com‐
partment.
When music collections are selected in the front
and rear, they are played back separately.
Operation is the same as for the front music col‐
lection, refer to page 186.
Tone
Only treble and bass can be set in the rear for
headphones. The settings are made separately
for the left and right headphones.
Operation is the same as for the front tone, refer
to page 170.
Navigation*
Route planning can be performed separately on
the left and right sides in the rear. Destination
guidance can only be started from the front.
Operation is the same as for the front navigation,
refer to page 152.
Seite 205
205
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Suggesting a destination
A destination or trip can be sent to the front as
a suggestion. The suggestion can be adopted,
stored, or declined in the front. This function is
not available with the following setting:
"Driver
control".
1. Enter the destination.
2. "Suggest destination"
Contacts
Operation is the same as for the front contacts.
BMW Assist
Operation is the same as for BMW Assist in the
front, refer to page 234.
Adjusting
The following settings are available:
▷ "Rear display"
▷ "Language/Units": language can be set
globally for all screens.
▷ "Tone"
▷ "Climate"
Vehicle information
Computer content can be displayed. Operation
is only possible in the front.
Options menu
The split screen is not available and there is no
Integrated Owner's Manual.
Operation is the same as for the front menu op‐
tions, refer to page 21.
Enabling
Enabling operation in the rear
Only possible via the iDrive in the front.
1. "Settings"
2. "Allow rear control"
3. Select the desired priority.
Priority options
The driver has priority
▷ The source selected via iDrive in the front is
output
on the vehicle loudspeakers and can
be selected but not operated from the rear.
Other audio or video sources can be oper‐
ated.
▷ Sound can only be output in the rear via
headphones.
▷ The source that is to be displayed in the rear
can be set via the iDrive in the front.
To set the source in the rear via the iDrive in the
front:
1. "CD/Multimedia" or"Radio"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Select rear source"
4. Select the desired audio or video source.
Same priority
▷ All audio and video sources can be operated
via the iDrive in the front and rear.
▷ Sound is output in the rear via headphones:
the source selected via the iDrive in the front
is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
▷ Sound is output via loudspeakers: the
source selected last via the iDrive in the front
or rear is output via the vehicle loudspeak‐
ers.
Seite 206
206
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Professional rear entertainment
The rear has priority
▷ When the source selected in the rear is
played on headphones, it can be selected
but
not operated via iDrive in the front. Other
audio or video sources can be operated.
▷ Sound is output in the rear via headphones:
the source selected via the iDrive in the front
is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
▷ Sound is output via loudspeakers: the
source selected in the rear is output on the
vehicle loudspeakers. Audio or video sour‐
ces cannot be selected via the iDrive in the
front.
Switching off the rear DVD
▷ Rear entertainment is switched off.
▷ To switch rear entertainment back on: select
a different priority via the iDrive in the front
and switch on the system, refer to
page 204.
Headphones, vehicle
loudspeakers
Connecting the headphones
Normal headphones
Connect via the jack 1/8"/3.5 mm, refer to
page 204, on the rear CD/DVD player.
Infrared headphones
Connection via the infrared interface on the
lower edge of the screen.
Fitting infrared headphones and information on
which headphones are supported can be ob‐
tained from your service center.
When using infrared headphones, ensure that
the connection between the headphones and
the infrared interface is not disrupted:
▷ Do not place an obstacle between the inter‐
face and headphones.
▷ Do not cover the interface.
▷ Do not scratch the interface.
Fold up display screens for interference-free re‐
ception.
Unfavorable light conditions such as bright am‐
bient light can impair reception.
Sound output on the headphones or
vehicle loudspeakers
Operation is only possible in the rear.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Headphones" or "Loudspeakers"
With the following setting, sound output in the
rear is not possible via the vehicle speakers:
"Driver control".
External devices
General information
External audio and video devices and digital
cameras can be connected to cinch sockets, re‐
fer to page 204, on the CD/DVD player. Opera‐
tion takes place on the external device.
Due to the large number of different audio and
video devices available on the market, it cannot
be ensured that every audio and video device
will be displayed correctly on the screen.
Connecting an external device
1. Fold down the cover in front of the cinch
sockets on the CD/DVD player.
2. Connect the external device to the RCA
sockets.
▷ Video: yellow socket.
▷ Audio: white and red socket.
Starting playback
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the
or symbol.
Volume
The volume of the sound output is dependent
on the audio device. If this volume differs mark‐
Seite 207
207
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
edly from the volume of the other audio sources,
it is advisable to adjust the volumes.
Adjusting the volume
The volume can only be adjusted if no external
video device is connected.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
4. "Volume"
5. Turn the controller until the desired volume
is set and press the controller.
What to do if...
Only a black screen is visible.
▷ Switch on the system.
There are no options available on the screen.
▷ Switch over between the display screens.
Radio stations or TV channels are grayed out
and cannot be selected.
▷ Function is limited due to the selected pri‐
ority. Change priority.
The DVD does not play.
▷ Playback does not begin automatically.
Start DVD manually, refer to page 181.
The volume of the rear vehicle speakers cannot
be adjusted.
▷ Sound in the rear is output via the head‐
phones. Change priority if necessary and
output sound via vehicle speakers.
Seite 208
208
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Professional rear entertainment
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Communication
All of the options available to you for mobile
communication with family, friends, business
partners, and service providers are described in
this chapter.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Telephone*
At a glance
The concept
Mobile
phones or other external devices such as
audio players can be connected to the vehicle
via Bluetooth.
After these devices are paired once, they are
recognized automatically when the ignition is
switched on as soon as they are inside the ve‐
hicle and can be operated via iDrive, the buttons
on the steering wheel, and via voice activation*.
Depending on their functionality, external devi‐
ces can be used via the vehicle as a telephone
or as an audio source.
The telephone functions are described in the
following. Operating the audio functions, refer to
page 194.
Up to four external devices can be paired.
Certain functions may need to be enabled by the
mobile phone provider or service provider.
Using the mobile phone while driving
Make entries only when traffic and road
conditions allow. Do not hold the mobile phone
in your hand while you are driving; use the
hands-free system instead. If you do not ob‐
serve this precaution, you can endanger the ve‐
hicle occupants and other road users.◀
Snap-in adapter*
The snap-in adapter is used to:
▷ Hold the mobile phone.
▷ Recharge the battery.
▷ Connect the mobile phone to an outside an‐
tenna of the vehicle.
This provides for better network reception
and consistent sound quality.
Approved mobile phones
Details on which mobile phones and external
devices with a Bluetooth interface are sup‐
ported by the mobile phone preparation pack‐
age can be obtained at www.bmwusa.com/blue‐
tooth.
Displaying the vehicle identification
number and software part number
The vehicle identification number and software
part
number are needed to determine which mo‐
bile phones are supported by the mobile phone
preparation package. The software version of
the mobile phone may also be required.
1. "Telephone"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Bluetooth® info"
4. "Display system information"
These approved mobile phones with a certain
software version, support the vehicle functions
described below.
Malfunctions may occur with other mobile
phones or software versions.
Do not operate a mobile phone that is connected
to the vehicle on the mobile phone keypad, as
this may lead to a malfunction.
A software update can be performed if neces‐
sary.
Pairing/unpairing the mobile
phone
General information
The following functions are available:
▷ Use of a mobile phone as a telephone.
▷ Use of a mobile phone as an additional tele‐
phone.
▷ Use of a mobile phone as an audio source.
▷ Use of an audio device as an audio source,
refer to page 194.
Requirements
▷ The mobile phone is suitable.
Seite 212
212
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Telephone
▷ The mobile phone is ready for operation.
▷ Bluetooth is activated in the vehicle and on
the mobile phone.
▷ Bluetooth presettings may need to be made
on the mobile phone, e.g., for a connection
without
confirmation or visibility, refer to the
mobile phone operating instructions.
▷ Deactivate Bluetooth audio if necessary.
▷ A number with at least four and a maximum
of 16 digits was defined as the Bluetooth
passkey. It is only required once for pairing.
▷ The ignition is switched on.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth
Bluetooth
is not permitted everywhere. Comply
with all safety guidelines and regulations.
1. "Telephone"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Bluetooth®"
Additional functions
General information
Activate the functions before pairing to be able
to use them in the vehicle. Information on suit‐
able mobile phones, refer to page 212, that sup‐
port these functions.
Additional telephone
A mobile phone can be used as an additional
telephone.
The additional telephone can be used to accept
incoming calls, refer to page 216. While a call is
active on the additional telephone, incoming
calls are displayed on the Control Display.
Audio source
A mobile phone can be used as an audio source.
Activating/deactivating the additional
functions
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. Open "Options".
4. Select the desired additional function.
▷ "Additional telephone"
▷ "Office"
▷ "Bluetooth® audio"
Pairing and connecting a device
Pairing a device
To avoid becoming distracted and posing
an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehi‐
cle's occupants and to other road users, only
pair the device while the vehicle is stationary.◀
Pair the vehicle entirely on the front or rear Con‐
trol Display.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. "Add new phone"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐
played.
4. To perform additional steps on the mobile
phone, refer to the mobile phone operating
instructions:
for instance, search for or con‐
nect the Bluetooth device or a new device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile phone display.
5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the mobile phone display.
Prompt via iDrive or the mobile phone to en‐
ter the same Bluetooth passkey.
6. Enter the passkey and confirm.
7. Select the functions for which the mobile
phone is to be used.
8. "OK"
Seite 213
213
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
If the pairing was successful, the mobile phone
appears at the top of the list of mobile phones.
The functions supported by the mobile phone
and
audio device are displayed as symbols when
paired.
White symbol: the function is active.
Gray symbol: the function is inactive.
Symbol Function
Telephone.
Additional telephone.
Audio source.
Four devices can be paired with the vehicle at
once.
Three devices can be connected with the
vehicle at once.
If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., refer
to page 214.
Following the initial pairing
▷ The mobile phone is detected/connected in
the vehicle within a short period of time
when the engine is running or the ignition is
switched on.
▷ The phone book entries of the telephone
stored on the SIM card* or mobile phone are
transmitted to the vehicle after detection,
depending on the mobile phone.
▷ Four devices can be paired.
▷ Specific settings may be necessary in some
mobile phones, e.g., authorization or a se‐
cure connection; refer to the mobile phone
operating instructions.
Connecting a specific device
If
more than one device is detected by the vehi‐
cle, the device at the top of the list is connected.
A different device can be connected by select‐
ing it.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. Select the device that is to be connected.
The functions that were assigned to the device
before unpairing are assigned to the device
when it is reconnected. If the device is already
connected, these functions are deactivated.
Configuring the devices
Additional functions can be activated or deacti‐
vated for paired and connected devices.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. Highlight the device to be configured.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Configure phone"
6. At least one function must be selected.
▷ "Telephone"
▷ "Additional telephone"
▷ "Audio"
7. "OK"
If a function is assigned to a device, the function
will be deactivated where appropriate for a de‐
vice
that is already connected and the device will
be unpaired.
Swapping the telephone and additional
telephone
The function of the telephone and additional tel‐
ephone can be swapped automatically.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. "Swap phone/addit. phone"
Unpairing a device
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
3. Highlight the device that is to be unpaired.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Remove phone from list"
What to do if...
Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to
page 212.
Seite 214
214
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Telephone
The mobile phone could not be paired or con‐
nected.
▷ Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and on
the
mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth in the
vehicle and on the mobile phone.
▷ Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile
phone and the vehicle match? Enter the
same passkey on the mobile phone and via
iDrive.
▷ Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter
the passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure.
▷ Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
to the mobile phone or vehicle? Delete con‐
nections with other devices if necessary.
▷ Is the audio connection activated? Deacti‐
vate the audio connection.
▷ Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or
does it have only a limited remaining battery
life? Charge the mobile phone in the snap-
in adapter* or via the charging cable.
▷ Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi‐
ble that only one device can be connected
to the vehicle. Unpair the connected device
from the vehicle and pair and connect only
one device.
▷ The mobile phone no longer reacts? Switch
the mobile phone off and on again. Repeat
the pairing procedure.
The telephone functions are not available.
▷ Is the mobile phone paired as an additional
telephone and is the additional telephone
function deactivated? Activate the function.
▷ Is an outgoing call not possible? Connect
the mobile phone as a telephone.
No or not all phone book entries are displayed,
or they are incomplete.
▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is
not yet complete.
▷ It is possible that only the phone book en‐
tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card*
are transmitted.
▷ It may not be possible to display phone book
entries with special characters.
▷ The number of phone book entries being
stored is too high.
▷ Is the data volume of the contact too large,
e.g., due to stored information such as
notes? Reduce the data volume of the con‐
tact.
▷ Is the mobile phone connected as an audio
source or additional telephone? The mobile
phone must be connected as a telephone.
The phone connection quality is poor.
▷ The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the
mobile phone can be adjusted, depending
on the mobile phone.
▷ Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in
adapter* or place it in the area of the center
console.
▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone and
loudspeakers separately.
If all points in this list have been checked and the
required function is still not available, please
contact the hotline or service center.
Controls
Adjusting the volume
Turn the knob until the desired volume is se‐
lected. The setting is stored for the remote con‐
trol currently in use.
The vehicle automatically adjusts the volume of
the microphone on the telephone and the vol‐
ume of the called party. Depending on the mo‐
bile phone, the volumes may need to be ad‐
justed. The settings can only be created during
a call and must be adjusted separately for each
telephone. The settings are deleted when the
telephone is unpaired.
1. "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
4. Select the desired setting: "Microphone" or
"Loudspeak."
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.
Seite 215
215
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Incoming call
Receiving calls
If
the number of the caller is stored in the phone
book and is transmitted by the network, the
name of the contact is displayed. Otherwise,
only the phone number is displayed.
If more than one phone number is assigned to a
contact, only the name of the contact is dis‐
played.
For calls on the additional telephone, the num‐
ber is only displayed if it is transmitted by the
network.
An incoming call to the additional telephone is
automatically rejected if there is an active call on
the other telephone.
Accepting a call
Via iDrive
"Accept"
Via the button on the steering wheel
Press the button.
Via the instrument cluster
*
"Accept"
Rejecting a call
Via iDrive
"Reject"
Via the instrument cluster
*
"Reject"
Ending a call
Via iDrive
"End call"
Via the button on the steering wheel
Press the button.
Via the instrument cluster
*
"End call"
Entering a phone number
Dialing a number
1. "Telephone"
2. "Dial number"
3. Select the digits individually.
4.
Select the symbol.
The phone number can also be entered by voice.
Calls with multiple participants
General information
You can switch between calls or connect two
calls
to a single conference call. These functions
Seite 216
216
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Telephone
must be supported by the mobile phone and
service provider.
Accepting a call while speaking to
another party
This function might have to be activated by the
service provider and the mobile phone must be
adjusted accordingly.
If
a second call comes in during an ongoing call,
a call waiting signal is sounded where appropri‐
ate.
"Accept"
The call is accepted and the existing call is put
on hold.
Establishing a second call
Establish
an additional call during an active call.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3.
"Hold"
The existing call is put on hold.
4. Dial the new phone number or select it from
a list.
"Return"
The call on hold is resumed.
Switching between two calls, hold call
The active call is displayed in color.
The call on hold is displayed in gray.
"Swap calls"
The call on hold is resumed.
Establishing a conference call
Two calls can be connected to a single tele‐
phone conference call.
1. Establish two calls.
2. "Conference call"
When terminating a conference call, both calls
are ended. If one call is terminated by another
party, the other call can be continued.
Switching the microphone to mute
When a call is active, the microphone can be
muted.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. "Microphone mute"
A microphone that has been switched to mute
is automatically reactivated:
▷ When a new connection is established.
▷ When switching between call parties.
DTMF suffix dialing
DTMF suffix dialing can be used for gaining ac‐
cess
to network services or for controlling devi‐
ces, e.g., to make a remote inquiry of an answer‐
ing machine. The DTMF code is needed for this
purpose.
1. "Telephone"
2. Select the contact from a list or "Dial
number".
3.
"Keypad dialing"
4. Enter the DTMF code via iDrive.
Phone book
Displays
The phone book accesses the contacts and
shows all contacts for which a phone number
has
been stored. The entries can be selected to
make a call.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Phone book"
Seite 217
217
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts.
Calling a contact
Symbol Meaning
Contact with one stored phone num‐
ber.
Contact with more than one stored
phone number.
Call not possible; mobile phone with‐
out reception or network, or Service
Request* is active.
For contacts with one stored phone number: se‐
lect
the required contact. The connection is be‐
ing established.
For contacts with more than one stored phone
number: select the required contact and the
phone number. The connection is being estab‐
lished.
Editing a contact
Changing the entries in "Contacts". When a
contact is changed, the changes are not stored
on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is
stored in the vehicle.
1. Highlight the contact.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Edit entry"
The contact can be edited.
Redialing
General information
The list of dialed numbers in the mobile phone
is transmitted to the vehicle depending on the
mobile phone. The 20 phone numbers dialed
last are displayed. The sorting order of the
phone numbers depends on the particular mo‐
bile phone.
Dialing the number via the instrument
cluster
This is possible when there is no active call.
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Select the desired phone number.
The connection is established.
Dialing a number via iDrive
1. "Telephone"
2. "Redial"
3. Select the desired entry and the phone num‐
ber if necessary.
The connection is established.
Saving an entry in the contacts
1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
4. Select
"New
phone number" or contact.
5. Select the type of number: "Home",
"Business", "Mobile" or "Other"
6. Complete the entries if necessary.
7. If necessary, "Store contact in vehicle".
Received calls
Displaying calls
The 20 calls that were last received are dis‐
played.
1. "Telephone"
Seite 218
218
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Telephone
2. "Received calls"
Calling a number from the list
Selecting an entry.
The connection is established.
Saving an entry in the contacts
1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
4. Select
"New
phone number" or contact.
5. Select the type of number: "Home",
"Business", "Mobile" or "Other"
6. Complete the entries if necessary.
7. If necessary, "Store contact in vehicle".
Hands-free system
General information
Calls that are being made on the hands-free
system can be continued on the mobile phone
and vice versa.
From the mobile phone to the hands-
free system
Calls that were begun outside of the Bluetooth
range of the vehicle can be continued on the
hands-free system with the ignition switched
on.
Depending
on the mobile phone, the system au‐
tomatically switches to the hands-free system.
If the system does not switch over automatically,
follow the instructions on the mobile phone dis‐
play; refer also to the mobile phone operating
instructions.
From the hands-free system to the
mobile phone
Calls that are made on the hands-free system
can in some cases be continued on the mobile
phone; this depends on the mobile phone.
Follow
the instructions on the mobile phone dis‐
play; refer also to the mobile phone operating
instructions.
Voice operation*
Vehicles equipped with the voice activation sys‐
tem: operation, refer to page 25.
Vehicles not equipped with the voice activation
system: depending on the equipment, the mo‐
bile phone can be voice operated as described
below.
The list of short commands in the operating
manual does not apply to this type of voice op‐
eration.
The concept
▷ The mobile phone can be operated without
taking your hands from the steering wheel.
▷ In many cases, the entries are accompanied
by announcements or questions.
▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions for voice operation.
Using voice activation
Activating the voice activation system
1.
Briefly press the button on the
steering wheel.
2. Say the command.
Terminating the voice activation
system
Briefly
press the button on the steering
wheel or ›Cancel‹.
Seite 219
219
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Possible commands
Having possible commands read aloud
Press the button. ›Help‹. Possible commands
are announced.
The
digits from zero to nine are recognized. The
digits can be spoken separately or combined in
a sequence to accelerate the entry.
Using alternative commands
The system often recognizes a number of dif‐
ferent commands to run a function; for instance:
›Dial name‹ or ›Name‹
Example: dialing a phone number
1.
Briefly press the button on the
steering wheel.
2. ›Dial number‹
The system says: »Please say the number«
3. E.g., ›123 456 790‹
The
system says: »123 456 790. Continue?
«
4. ›Dial‹
The system says: »Dialing number«
Calling
Dialing a phone number
1. ›Dial number‹
2. Say the phone number.
3. ›Dial‹
Correcting the phone number
The
sequence of digits can be deleted after the
system has repeated the digits.
›Correct number‹
The command can be repeated as often as nec‐
essary.
Deleting a phone number
›Delete‹
All digits entered up to that point are deleted.
Redialing
›Redial‹
Voice phone book*
Depending on how your vehicle is equipped, it
may be necessary to create your own voice
phone book.
The entries must be entered using voice activa‐
tion and are separate from the memory in the
mobile phone. Up to 50 entries can be set up.
Saving an entry
1. ›Save name‹
2. Say the name. Do not exceed the speaking
duration of approx. 2 seconds.
3. Say the phone number after being prompted
to do so by the system.
4. ›Save‹
Deleting an entry
1. ›Delete name‹
2. Say the name after being prompted to do so.
3. Confirm the query with ›Yes‹.
Deleting all entries
1. ›Delete phonebook‹
The dialog for deleting the phone book is
opened.
2. Confirm the query with ›Yes‹.
3. Confirm the query again with ›Yes‹.
Reading and selecting entries
1. ›Read phonebook‹
The dialog for reading the phone book is
opened.
2. Say ›Dial number‹ when the desired entry is
read.
Selecting an entry
1. ›Dial name‹
2. Say the name after being prompted to do so.
3. Confirm the query with ›Yes‹.
Seite 220
220
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Telephone
Adjusting the volume
Turn the knob during an announcement.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Notes
Do not use the voice operation to initiate an
Emergency
Request. In stressful situations, the
voice and vocal pitch can change. This can un‐
necessarily delay the establishment of a tele‐
phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button*, refer to
page 266, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the system. The language for the mobile
phone voice operation is preset and cannot
be changed in the Control Display.
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐
roof* closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Snap-in adapter*
Installation position
In the center armrest.
Inserting the snap-in adapter
1. Press the button and remove the cover.
2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front, ar‐
row 1, and press down, arrow 2, until it en‐
gages.
Inserting the mobile phone
1. Depending on the mobile phone, remove
the protective cap from the antenna con‐
nector of the mobile phone.
2. Slide the mobile phone with the buttons fac‐
ing up in the direction of the electrical con‐
nections, arrow 1, and push downward, ar‐
row 2 until it engages.
Seite 221
221
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Removing the mobile phone
Press the button and remove the mobile phone.
Seite 222
222
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Telephone
Office*
At a glance
General information
Contacts,
appointments, tasks, notes, text mes‐
sages, and e-mails from the mobile phone can
be displayed on the Control Display if the mobile
phone provides compatible support of these
functions and the necessary Bluetooth stand‐
ards.
Information about which mobile phones support
the Office functions can be found at
www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth. A limited number
of compatible mobile phones is available for Of‐
fice.
Contents are only displayed in full length when
the vehicle is stationary.
The mobile phone has read-access only.
Do not use Office while driving
To avoid becoming distracted and posing
an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occu‐
pants and to other road users, never attempt to
use the controls or enter information unless traf‐
fic and road conditions allow this.◀
Requirements
▷ A suitable mobile phone is paired with the
vehicle and connected. In some mobile
phones, data access must be confirmed on
the mobile phone.
▷ The time, time zone, and date, refer to
page 80, are correctly set on the Control
Display
and on the mobile phone to correctly
display appointments, for example.
▷ Office is activated, refer to page 213.
Updating
Data are updated every time the mobile phone
is connected to the vehicle. Appointment en‐
tries,
tasks, notes and reminders can be updated
separately.
1. "Office"
2. "Current office", "Calendar", "Tasks",
"Notes" or "Reminders"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Update data"
Cell
phone data are transmitted again to the
vehicle.
Office information
The number of unread messages and active
tasks
as well as the upcoming appointments are
displayed.
1. "Office"
2. "Current office"
3. Select the desired entry to display details.
Contacts
At a glance
Contacts can be created and edited. The con‐
tacts from the mobile phone* are displayed as
well if this function is supported by the mobile
phone. Addresses can be adopted as destina‐
tions
for navigation and the phone numbers can
be dialed.
Displaying contacts
General information
1. "Office"
Seite 223
223
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
2. "Contacts"
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. De‐
pending on the number of contacts, an A-Z
search is offered, refer to page 24.
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts:
Symbol Storage location
No symbol In the vehicle; the address has not
been checked as a destination.
In the vehicle; the address has
been checked as a destination.
Mobile phone.
Dialing phone numbers*
1. Select the desired contact.
2. Select the phone number.
The connection is established.
Editing a contact
1. Select the desired contact.
2. "Edit contact"
3. Change the entries.
4. "Store contact in vehicle"
When a contact is edited, the changes are not
stored
on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry
is stored in the vehicle.
Selecting the contact as a navigation
destination*
1. Select the desired contact.
2. Select the address.
When contacts from the mobile phone are
used, the address may need to be matched
to the navigation data contained in the vehi‐
cle. In this case:
Correct the address.
3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Checking the address as a destination*
An address that is to be used for destination
guidance must match the navigation data con‐
tained in the vehicle. The address can be
checked for this purpose.
1. Select the desired contact and highlight the
address.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Check as destination"
4. Correct and store the address if necessary.
If the address is corrected and stored, a copy of
it is stored in the vehicle. The address is not
changed on the mobile phone.
New contact
General information
A contact can have up to 8 phone numbers,
2 addresses, 3 e-mail addresses and one Inter‐
net address.
1. "Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Open "Options".
Seite 224
224
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Office
4. "New contact"
5. The entry fields are still filled with the previ‐
ous entries: "Delete input fields"
6. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next
to the entry field.
7. Enter the text and assign the contact type.
8. If the vehicle is equipped with a navigation
system: Enter the address. Only addresses
contained
in the navigation data in the vehi‐
cle can be entered. This ensures that desti‐
nation guidance is possible for all ad‐
dresses.
If necessary, "Accept address".
9. "Store contact in vehicle"
Contact types
Various
contact types can be assigned to phone
numbers and addresses.
Symbol Meaning
Home phone number.
Business phone number.
Mobile phone number.
Other phone number.
Home address.
Business address.
Specifying the home address
A
home address can be stored. It appears at the
top of the contact list.
1. "Home"
2. Create a contact.
3. "Store contact in vehicle"
Selecting the sorting order of the
names*
Names can be displayed in a different order.
1. "Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
last name"
Depending on how the contacts were stored on
the
mobile phone, the sorting order of the names
may differ from the selected sorting order.
Show contact pictures
Pictures stored with the contacts are stored in
the vehicle when the mobile phone is connected
to the vehicle. The number of transmitted pic‐
tures depends on the mobile phone. The mobile
phone must support this function.
1. "Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Show images"
Display of all contact pictures is activated or de‐
activated.
Exporting/importing contacts
Contacts can be exported and imported via the
Personal Profile, refer to page 33. The contacts
stored in the vehicle are exported, but not those
from the mobile phone.
Deleting contacts
Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are
deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone*
cannot be deleted.
1. "Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Highlight the contact.
4. Open "Options".
Seite 225
225
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
5. "Delete contact"or "Delete all contacts".
6. If necessary. "Yes"
Messages
General information
Whether
or not text messages and e-mails from
the mobile phone are displayed depends on
whether transmission from the mobile phone to
the vehicle is supported. Text messages and e-
mails may not be supported by the service pro‐
vider, or the function may need to be enabled
separately. After the mobile phone is first paired,
transmission may take several minutes. Mes‐
sages are only displayed in full length when the
vehicle is stationary. Messages from the addi‐
tional telephone are not transmitted.
Display of different messages:
▷ Text messages.
▷ My Info* messages from the BMW Assist
Portal.
▷ Messages from the BMW Assist Concierge
service*.
▷ Messages from BMW Info*.
▷ E-mails from the mobile phone.
Displaying messages
1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
A symbol identifies the type of message.
Symbol Message type
Text messages.
My Info
Message from the Concierge serv‐
ice.
Message from BMW Info.
E-mail from mobile phone.
Filtering the message list
The message list can be filtered, when more
than one type of message exists.
1. "Filter:"
2. Select the type of message.
▷ "All"
All messages are displayed.
▷ "E-mail"
Only e-mails from the mobile phone are
displayed.
▷ "Service message"
Only messages from the BMW Assist
Concierge service, My Info and BMW
Info are displayed.
▷ "Text message"
Only text messages from the mobile
phone are displayed.
Deleting messages
Messages from the Concierge service, My Info,
and BMW Info can be deleted.
Delete a message:
1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
3. Select the desired message.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete message"
Delete all messages:
1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
Seite 226
226
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Office
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete all messages" or "Delete service
messages"
Text messages
Calling the sender of a text message
1. Select the desired message.
2. Select the symbol.
Saving the sender in the contacts
1. Highlight the desired message.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact"
Reading the text message out loud*
Read the text messages out loud, refer to
page 230.
My Info
Starting destination guidance
1. Select the message.
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Dialing the number in the message
Up
to 4 phone numbers can be transmitted with
a message.
1. Select the desired message.
2.
"Call":
If the message contains a number, the con‐
nection is established.
"Select phone number":
If
the message contains more than one num‐
ber, select the desired number from the list.
The connection is established.
Message from the Concierge service
Starting destination guidance
1. Select the desired message.
2.
"Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
3. Start destination guidance, if necessary.
Dialing the number in the message
Up
to 4 phone numbers can be transmitted with
a message.
1. Select the desired message.
2.
"Call":
If the message contains a number, the con‐
nection is established.
"Select phone number":
If
the message contains more than one num‐
ber, select the desired number from the list.
The connection is established.
Storing an address
1.
Select the desired message.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store contact in vehicle"
Displaying additional information
1. Select the desired message.
2. "Further information"
BMW Info
Starting destination guidance
1. Select the desired message.
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Dialing the number in the message
Up
to 4 phone numbers can be transmitted with
a message.
Seite 227
227
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
1. Select the desired message.
2. "Call":
If the message contains a number, the con‐
nection is established.
"Select phone number":
If
the message contains more than one num‐
ber, select the desired number from the list.
The connection is established.
E-mail*
Displaying e-mails
1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
3. Select the desired e-mail.
Displaying e-mail contacts
If
the sender and recipient of an e-mail are trans‐
mitted by the mobile phone, this information is
displayed in the e-mail.
"Sender/Recipient"
If the e-mail addresses are stored in the con‐
tacts, the contact is displayed. Select the con‐
tact to display details.
If
the e-mail addresses are not stored in the con‐
tacts, only the e-mail address is displayed.
Using contact data
Contact data from appointments, e-mails and
notes can be saved or selected*, refer to
page 230.
Deactivating the full display
When an e-mail is opened in the vehicle, the e-
mail is fully transmitted to the vehicle. This may
result in charges.
1. "Office"
2. "Messages"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Fully download e-mails"
Only a part of the email from the cell phone
is loaded into the vehicle.
Reading the e-mail out loud*
Read the e-mail out loud, refer to page 230.
Calendar
Display the calendar
Appointments
during the last 20 and the next 50
days can be displayed.
1. "Office"
2. "Calendar"
The appointments on the current day are
displayed.
Selecting the calendar day
1. Select the date.
2. Select the desired day or date.
▷ "Next day"
▷ "Date:"
▷ "Previous day"
▷ "Today"
Display the appointment
1. Select the desired appointment.
2. Scroll through the appointment if neces‐
sary:
▷ Turn the controller.
▷ Select the symbol.
Using contact data
Contact data from appointments, e-mails and
notes can be saved or selected*, refer to
page 230.
Seite 228
228
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Office
Reading the appointment out loud*
Read the appointment out loud, refer to
page 230.
Tasks
Displaying the task list
Display tasks that are due within the next
90 days.
1. "Office"
2. "Tasks"
Sorting the task list
1. Select the header in the task list.
2. Select the sorting criterion:
▷ "Priority (!)"*
▷ "Subject"
▷ "Due date"
Displaying the task
1. Select the desired task.
2. Scroll in the task if necessary:
▷ Turn the controller.
▷ Select the symbol.
Using contact data
Contact data from appointments, e-mails and
notes can be saved or selected*, refer to
page 230.
Reading the task out loud
*
Read the task out loud, refer to page 230.
Notes
Displaying notes
1. "Office"
2. "Notes"
All notes are displayed.
Displaying the note
1. Select the desired note.
2. Scroll in the note if necessary:
▷ Turn the controller.
▷ Select the symbol.
Using contact data
Contact data from appointments, e-mails and
notes can be saved or selected*, refer to
page 230.
Reading the note out loud
*
Read the note out loud, refer to page 230.
Reminders
Displaying reminders
Reminders of pending appointments and tasks
are displayed. After an appointment or after a
task is due, the reminder is no longer displayed.
1. "Office"
2. "Reminders"
3. Select the desired reminder.
The corresponding appointment or the task are
displayed.
Seite 229
229
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Using contact data
At a glance
Contact data from calendar entries, appoint‐
ments,
tasks, emails and notes can be stored or
selected*.
Displaying contact or selecting phone
number
1.
"Use contact data"
2. Display the contact or select the phone
number:
▷ Select the contact to display contact de‐
tails.
▷ Select the phone number to establish a
connection directly.
Storing contact data
1. "Use contact data"
2. Highlight the phone number or e-mail ad‐
dress.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Add to existing contact" or "Store as new
contact"
Reading out loud*
Text messages, e-mails, appointment entries,
tasks, and notes can be read out loud.
1. Select the desired message, appointment,
task, or note.
2. Select the symbol.
The following options are available during read‐
ing:
▷ "Pause"
Interrupt reading. Select again to restart
reading.
▷ "Back to beginning"
Start reading message again from the be‐
ginning.
▷ Select the symbol.
Skip a paragraph.
▷ Select the symbol.
Go back one paragraph.
▷ To end reading, tilt the controller to the left.
What to do if...
Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to
page 212.
Appointments, tasks, notes, text messages, or
e-mails from the mobile phone are not dis‐
played.
▷ The mobile phone is not capable of the
missing function or is not connected cor‐
rectly.
▷ The Office function is deactivated.
▷ The mobile phone is connected as an addi‐
tional phone.
▷ Appointments are older than 20 days or are
more than 50 days in the future.
▷ The tasks have been marked as completed
or have a due date that lies more than
90 days in the future.
▷ Depending on the number of stored ap‐
pointments, task notes, and messages in
the
mobile phone, not all are displayed in the
vehicle.
Not all appointments and tasks from the mobile
phone are displayed at the right time?
▷ The time zone, time or date is incorrectly set
on the Control Display and mobile phone.
The e-mail attachment is not displayed.
▷ E-mails are transmitted without an attach‐
ment.
Entries are not displayed in full length.
▷ Text were already transmitted from the mo‐
bile phone in a shortened form.
▷ Synchronization between the mobile phone
and vehicle may take several minutes.
The contact pictures are not being displayed?
▷ A max. of 200 contact pictures can be stored
in the vehicle.
The E-mail is displayed with a delay?
Seite 230
230
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Office
▷ Check the e-mail settings on the telephone
and adjust if necessary.
If all points in this list have been checked and the
required function is still not available, please
contact the hotline or service center.
Seite 231
231
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Contacts*
General information
Contacts
can be created and edited and the ad‐
dresses can be adopted as destinations for nav‐
igation.
New contact
1. "Contacts"
2. "New contact"
3. The entry fields are still filled with the previ‐
ous entries: "Delete input fields"
4. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next
to the entry field.
5. Enter the text, refer to page 24.
6. If the vehicle is equipped with a navigation
system: Enter the address. Only addresses
contained
in the navigation data in the vehi‐
cle can be entered. This ensures that desti‐
nation guidance is possible for all ad‐
dresses.
7. If necessary, "Store".
8. "Store contact in vehicle"
Specifying the home address
A
home address can be stored. It appears at the
top of the contact list.
1. "Home"
2. Create a contact.
3. "Store contact in vehicle"
My contacts
General information
List of all contacts stored in the vehicle.
Displaying contacts
1. "Contacts"
2. "My contacts"
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. De‐
pending on the number of contacts, an A-Z
search is offered, refer to page 24.
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts:
Symbol Storage location
No sym‐
bol
In the vehicle; the address has not
been checked as a destination.
In the vehicle; the address has
been checked as a destination*.
Seite 232
232
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Contacts
Editing a contact
1. Select the desired contact.
2. "Edit contact"
3. Change the entries.
4. Move the controller to the left.
5. "Yes"
Selecting the contact as a navigation
destination*
1. Select the desired contact.
2. Select the address.
3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Checking the address as a destination*
An address that is to be used for destination
guidance must match the navigation data con‐
tained in the vehicle. The address can be
checked for this purpose.
1. Select the desired contact and highlight the
address.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Check as destination"
4. Correct and store the address if necessary.
Selecting the sorting order of the
names
Names can be displayed in a different order.
1. "My contacts"
2. Highlight the contact.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
last name"
Exporting/importing contacts
Contacts can be exported and imported via the
Personal Profile, refer to page 33.
Deleting contacts
1. "My contacts"
2. Highlight the contact.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts"
Seite 233
233
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
BMW ConnectedDrive
BMW Assist*
General information
BMW
Assist provides you with certain services,
e.g., transmission of the position data of your
vehicle to the BMW Assist Response Center if
an Emergency Request* has been initiated.
Many BMW Assist services depend on the indi‐
vidually agreed upon contract.
After your contract has expired, the BMW Assist
system will be deactivated by the BMW Assist
Response Center without your having to visit a
service center. After the BMW Assist system
has been deactivated, no BMW Assist services
will be available. The BMW Assist system can be
reactivated by a service center after you sign a
new contract.
Requirements
▷ The installed BMW Assist system is logged
in to a wireless communications network.
This network must be capable of transmit‐
ting the services.
▷ To transmit position data, the vehicle must
be able to determine the current position.
▷ The BMW Assist service contract was
signed with your service center or with the
BMW Assist Response Center. Enabling
must have been completed.
▷ BMW Assist is activated.
Services offered
▷ Emergency Request: when you press the
SOS button, a connection to the BMW As‐
sist Response Center is established. The
BMW Assist Response Center then speaks
with
you and takes further steps to help you.
▷ Automatic Collision Notification: under cer‐
tain conditions, a connection is established
to the BMW Assist Response Center after a
serious accident. If possible, the BMW As‐
sist Response Center then speaks with you
and takes further steps to help you.
▷ Enhanced Roadside Assistance: BMW
Roadside Assistance* can be contacted if
assistance is needed in the event of a break‐
down. If possible, the vehicle and position
data are transmitted in the process.
▷ Customer Relations: connection with Cus‐
tomer Relations for information on all as‐
pects of your vehicle.
▷ TeleService: data on your vehicle's service
status or required inspections are transmit‐
ted to your service center, either automati‐
cally before a service due date or when you
request a BMW service appointment.
▷ Remote Door Unlock: the BMW Assist Re‐
sponse Center provides assistance if, for ex‐
ample, the remote control is not available
and the vehicle needs to be opened.
▷ Stolen Vehicle Recovery: after you report
that your vehicle was stolen to the police, the
BMW Assist Response Center can deter‐
mine its position.
▷ In addition to these services, the optional
Convenience Plan offers Concierge service
and information for route planning, traffic,
and weather. A limited number of calls can
be made via the BMW Assist Response
Center with Critical Calling if, for example,
the mobile phone is not available or dis‐
charged.
Press the SOS button to contact the BMW
Assist Response Center.
BMW TeleService*
General information
TeleService
supports communication with your
service center.
▷ Data on the vehicle's service requirements
can
be sent directly to the service center. In
this way, the service center can plan its work
Seite 234
234
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
BMW ConnectedDrive
in advance. This shortens the duration of the
service appointment.
▷ In the event of a breakdown, data on the ve‐
hicle's condition can be sent directly to
Roadside Assistance.
▷ The service varies by country.
▷ Connection costs may ensue.
▷ Services may be restricted abroad.
Requirements
▷ BMW Assist is activated.
▷ Wireless reception is available.
▷ The engine is running.
Use of BMW TeleService*
The TeleServices are typically activated in the
vehicle.
Even TeleService Customer Service is not ac‐
tive, a voice contact to Roadside Assistance is
still possible.
To
continue using or to deactivate the services,
please contact your service partner or the BMW
customer hotline.
Concierge service*
General information
The BMW Assist Concierge service offers infor‐
mation on events, gas stations or hotels, and
provides phone numbers and addresses. Hotels
can be booked directly by the BMW Assist Con‐
cierge service. The Concierge service is part of
the optional BMW Convenience Plan.
Starting the Concierge service
1. "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Concierge"
3. "Start service"
A voice connection is established with the BMW
Assist Concierge service. Phone numbers and
addresses can be transmitted to the vehicle.
Roadside Assistance
At a glance
BMW
Roadside Assistance* can be contacted if
assistance is needed in the event of a break‐
down.
Roadside Assistance* can also be contacted via
a Check Control message, refer to page 83.
Starting Roadside Assistance
Vehicles not equipped with BMW
Assist or BMW TeleService
1. "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Roadside Assistance"
The Roadside Assistance number is dis‐
played. If the mobile phone* is paired, a con‐
nection is established to Roadside Assis‐
tance.
Seite 235
235
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Vehicles equipped with BMW Assist or
BMW TeleService
1. "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Roadside Assistance"
3. "Start service"
TeleService Diagnosis*
TeleService Diagnosis enables the wireless
transmission of detailed vehicle data that are
important for vehicle diagnosis. These data are
transmitted automatically.
After the data are transmitted, the voice con‐
nection to Roadside Assistance is re-estab‐
lished.
TeleService Help
*
TeleService Help enables an in-depth diagnosis
of the vehicle by Roadside Assistance via wire‐
less transmission.
TeleService Help can be started after a prompt
by Roadside Assistance and the termination of
the voice connection.
Starting TeleService Help
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. The engine is running.
4. "TeleService Help"
After completion of TeleService Help, a voice
connection is established to Roadside Assis‐
tance.
BMW Online*
At a glance
A
business search can be opened via BMW On‐
line.
License conditions
This product contains NetFront Browser soft‐
ware of ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2007
ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
NetFront is a trademark or registered trademark
of ACCESS CO., LTD., in Japan and other coun‐
tries.
This software is based in part on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group.
Requirements
▷ Subscription to the optional Convenience
Plan.
▷ The date setting, refer to page 80, on the
Control Display is current.
▷ The vehicle is located within wireless net‐
work coverage.
Starting BMW Online
1. "ConnectedDrive"
2. "BMW Online"
3. If necessary, "OK".
The BMW Online home page is displayed.
Operating BMW Online
To start a search:
▷ Turn the controller to highlight an element.
▷ Press the controller to display an element.
Seite 236
236
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
BMW ConnectedDrive
Opening the start page
1. Open "Options".
2. "Display start page"
Loading a new page
1. Open "Options".
2. "Reload"
Cancel
1. Open "Options".
2. "Cancel loading"
Customer Relations
At a glance
Contact Customer Relations for information on
all aspects of your vehicle.
Calling Customer Relations
Vehicles not equipped with BMW
Assist or BMW TeleService
1. "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Customer Relations"
The Customer Relations phone number is dis‐
played. If the
mobile phone* is paired, a con‐
nection is established to Customer Relations.
Vehicles equipped with BMW Assist or
BMW TeleService
1. "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Customer Relations"
3. "Start service"
Service Request*
At a glance
Sends
information to your service partner to re‐
quest the arrangement of a service appoint‐
ment. The TeleService data is transmitted dur‐
ing a Service Request. If possible, your service
partner will establish contact with you.
Starting a Service Request
1. "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Service Request"
3. "Start service"
A Service Request can be started via a Check
Control message, refer to page 83.
Seite 237
237
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Automatic Service Request*
The TeleService data necessary for servicing
the
vehicle are automatically sent to your service
partner prior to the service deadline. If possible,
the service partner will contact you and a service
appointment can be arranged.
To check when your service partner was noti‐
fied:
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"
Services status*
General information
Check services status.
Displaying available services
Display of all services available in the vehicle.
1. "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Service Status"
3. "Available services"
Updating BMW Assist
Manual update of
TeleService* and BMW As‐
sist*.
"Update BMW Assist"
Data transfer*
During the updating of BMW services, display
the status of the data transfer.
1. "ConnectedDrive"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Data transfer"
Apps*
At a glance
Certain software applications of a suitable cell
phone can be integrated in the vehicle. These
software
applications are displayed on the Con‐
trol Display.
They are operated via iDrive.
Requirements
▷ The mobile phone is suitable.
▷ The cell phone operating system supports
the software applications of Apps.
▷ Software applications are installed on the
cell phone and ready to use.
▷ Corresponding mobile wireless contract.
Any
additionally incurred costs are not a part
of Apps.
Seite 238
238
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
BMW ConnectedDrive
▷ Use only BMW approved software applica‐
tions; otherwise, it may result in malfunc‐
tions.
Information about suitable cell phones, available
software applications and their installation can
be found at www.bmw.com/connectivity or at
the service center.
Create the entries.
Make entries only when traffic and road
conditions allow. Otherwise, the vehicle occu‐
pants
and other road users may be put in danger
because of the distraction from driving.
For reasons of safety, some software applica‐
tions are usable only while the vehicle is station‐
ary.◀
Operate Apps
1. Connect the cell phone via the snap-in
adapter or via the USB audio interface.
2. "ConnectedDrive"
3. Select the desired software application.
Displaying status
Information about the currently available soft‐
ware applications can be displayed.
1. "ConnectedDrive"
2. "BMW apps"
PlugIn*
Selected functions of the cell phone are dis‐
played on the Control Display. They can be op‐
erated via iDrive.
1. Connect cell phone via the snap-in adapter.
2. "ConnectedDrive"
3. "PlugIn"
4. "Activate PlugIn"
5. Navigate to the displayed functions via the
controller and select, for example, a desired
category or track.
Press button to switch within the cell
phone functions to a higher level or back.
Press button twice to switch back to the
main menu.
Notes
▷ The ranges of Apps that can be displayed on
the Control Display depend on the range of
installed software applications on the cell
phone.
▷ The data transmission of the software ap‐
plications
from the cell phone to the vehicle
can last some time. Some software applica‐
tions depend on the speed of the available
Internet connection of the cell phone.
▷ Some cell phones cannot simultaneously
use Apps and the Bluetooth hands-free sys‐
tem.
If necessary, restart the software application
on the cell phone after a phone conversa‐
tion.
TeleService Report*
Transmits
technical data that is evaluated for the
ongoing development of BMW products from
your vehicle to BMW in regular intervals if nec‐
essary.
TeleService Report is activated in vehicles that
meet certain technical requirements and have a
valid Assist contract; this feature is free of
charge.
Neither personal data nor position data is trans‐
mitted.
Indicate when the last Teleservice Report was
transmitted:
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Teleservice Info"
Seite 239
239
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Mobility
To ensure that you remain mobile at all times, this
chapter supplies you with important information
on the topics of fuels and lubricants, wheels and
tires, service, maintenance, and Roadside
Assistance.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Refueling
Fuel cap
Opening
1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
flap.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
Closing
1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Do not pinch the retaining strap
Do not pinch the retaining strap attached
to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed
properly and fuel vapors can escape.
A message is displayed if the cap is loose or
missing.◀
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap
In the event of an electrical malfunction, for ex‐
ample.
Pull the green knob with the fuel pump symbol.
This releases the fuel filler flap.
Observe the following when
refueling
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Handling fuels
Obey
safety regulations posted at the gas
station.◀
Fuel tank capacity
Gasoline engine Fuel tank capacity: approx.
21.6 US gal/82 liters.
Refuel promptly
Refuel below a range of 30 miles/50 km;
otherwise, engine functions are not ensured and
damage may occur.◀
Seite 242
242
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Refueling
Fuel
Fuel quality
Refuel with unleaded fuel only
Do not use leaded fuel as this would per‐
manently damage the catalytic converter.
◀
Do not refuel with ethanol
Do not refuel with E85, i.e., fuel with an
ethanol content of 85 %, or with Flex Fuel, as this
would damage the engine and fuel supply sys‐
tem.◀
Required fuel
Super premium gasoline/AKI 91
This gasoline is highly recommended.
Gasoline with lower AKI
However, you may also use gasoline with less
AKI.
The minimum AKI Rating is 89.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
Minimum fuel grade
Do not use any gasoline below the mini‐
mum specified fuel grade; otherwise, engine
damage may occur.◀
Use high-quality brands
Field experience has indicated significant differ‐
ences in fuel quality: volatility, composition, ad‐
ditives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale in
the United States and Canada.
Fuels containing up to and including 10 % etha‐
nol or other oxygenates with up to 2.8 % oxygen
by weight, that is, 15 % MTBE or 3 % methanol
plus an equivalent amount of co-solvent, will not
void the applicable warranties with respect to
defects in materials or workmanship.
Minimum fuel grade
The
use of poor-quality fuels may result in
driveability, starting and stalling problems es‐
pecially under certain environmental conditions
such as high ambient temperature and high al‐
titude.
Should you encounter driveability problems
which you suspect could be related to the fuel
you are using, we recommend that you respond
by switching to a recognized high-quality brand
such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier
Detergent Gasoline.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in unscheduled maintenance.◀
Seite 243
243
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressure
Safety information
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐
sure influence the following:
▷ The service life of the tires.
▷ Road safety.
▷ Driving comfort.
Checking the pressure
Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after driving no more
than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has
been
parked for at least 2 hours. When the tires
are warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
Regularly check the tire inflation pressure
and correct it as needed: at least twice a month
and before a long trip. If you fail to observe this
precaution, you may be driving on tires with in‐
correct tire pressures, a condition that may not
only compromise your vehicle's driving stability,
but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an
accident.◀
After correcting the tire inflation pressure, rein‐
itialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Pressure specifications
The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 244, contains all pressure specifications
for the specified tire sizes at the ambient tem‐
perature. Pressure specifications apply to ap‐
proved tire sizes and recommended tire brands.
This information can be obtained from your
service center.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
please note the following:
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
▷ Vehicle load.
▷ Maximum allowable driving speed.
Tire inflation pressures up to 100 mph/
160 km/h
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum
driving comfort, note the pressure val‐
ues in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 244, and adjust as necessary.
These pressure values can also be found on the
tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door
pillar.
Maximum permissible speed
Do not exceed 100 mph/160 km/h; other‐
wise, tire damage and accidents may result.
◀
Tire inflation pressure values up to
100 mph/160 km/h
740i, 740Li, 750i, 750Li
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/
PSI with cold tires
245/50 R 18 100 V M
+S A/S
245/50 R 18 100 H M
+S
2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35
Seite 244
244
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Wheels and tires
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
245/45 R 19 102 V M
+S XL A/S
245/45 R 19 102 V M
+S XL
2.4 / 35 2.6 / 38
F.: 245/45 R 19 98 Y
R.: 275/40 R 19 101 Y
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.3 / 33
F.: 245/40 R 20 99 Y
XL
R.:
275/35 R 20 102 Y XL
2.4 / 35
-
-
2.6 / 38
F.:
245/35 R 21 96 Y XL
R.:
275/30 R 21 98 Y XL
2.6 / 38
-
-
3.0 / 44
760Li
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in ar/
PSI with cold tires
245/50 R 18 100 V M
+S A/S
245/50 R 18 100 H M
+S
2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35
245/45 R 19 102 V M
+S XL A/S
245/45 R 19 102 V M
+S XL
2.4 / 35 2.6 / 38
F.: 245/45 R 19 98 Y
R.: 275/40 R 19 101 Y
2.3 / 33
-
-
2.3 / 33
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
F.: 245/40 R 20 99 Y
XL
R.:
275/35 R 20 102 Y XL
2.5 / 36
-
-
2.5 / 36
F.:
245/35 R 21 96 Y XL
R.:
275/30 R 21 98 Y XL
2.8/41
-
-
2.9 /42
750i xDrive, 750Li xDrive
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/
PSI with cold tires
245/50 R 18 100 V M
+S A/S
245/50 R 18 100 H M
+S
2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35
245/45 R 19 102 V M
+S XL A/S
245/45 R 19 102 V M
+S XL
2.4 / 35 2.6 / 38
F.: 245/45 R 19 98 Y
R.: 275/40 R 19 101 Y
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.3 / 33
F.: 245/40 R 20 99 Y
XL
R.:
275/35 R 20 102 Y XL
2.5 / 36
-
-
2.6 / 38
F.:
245/35 R 21 96 Y XL
R.:
275/30 R 21 98 Y XL
2.8 / 41
-
-
3.0 / 44
Seite 245
245
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Tire inflation pressures at max. speeds
above 100 mph/160 km/h
Speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
In
order to drive at maximum speeds in ex‐
cess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and,
if necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds
exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant
table on the following pages. Otherwise tire
damage and accidents could occur.◀
Tire inflation pressure values over
100 mph/160 km/h
740i, 740Li, 750i, 750Li
Without high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/
PSI with cold tires
245/50 R 18 100 V M
+S A/S
245/50 R 18 100 H M
+S
2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38
245/45 R 19 102 V M
+S XL A/S
245/45 R 19 102 V M
+S XL
2.4 / 35 2.8 / 41
F.: 245/45 R 19 98 Y
R.: 275/40 R 19 101 Y
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.3 / 33
F.: 245/40 R 20 99 Y XL
R.:
275/35 R 20 102 Y XL
2.4 / 35
-
-
2.6 / 38
F.: 245/35 R 21 96 Y XL
R.:
275/30 R 21 98 Y XL
2.6 / 38
-
-
3.0 / 44
With high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/
PSI with cold tires
245/50 R 18 100 H M
+S
2.5 / 36 2.8 / 41
245/45 R 19 102 V M
+S XL
2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46
F.: 245/45 R 19 98 Y
R.: 275/40 R 19 101 Y
2.5 / 36
-
-
2.6 / 38
F.: 245/40 R 20 99 Y
XL
R.:
275/35 R 20 102 Y XL
2.7 / 39
-
-
2.9 /42
F.:
245/35 R 21 96 Y XL
R.:
275/30 R 21 98 Y XL
2.9 /42
-
-
3.3 / 48
760i, 760Li
Without high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/
PSI with cold tires
245/50 R 18 100 V M
+S A/S
245/50 R 18 100 H M
+S
2.6 / 38 2.8 / 41
245/45 R 19 102 V M
+S XL A/S
245/45 R 19 102 V M
+S XL
2.8 / 41 3.1 / 45
F.: 245/45 R 19 98 Y
R.: 275/40 R 19 101 Y
2.5 / 36
-
-
2.5 / 36
Seite 246
246
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Wheels and tires
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
F.: 245/40 R 20 99 Y XL
R.:
275/35 R 20 102 Y XL
2.7 / 39
-
-
2.7 / 39
F.: 245/35 R 21 96 Y XL
R.:
275/30 R 21 98 Y XL
3.0 / 44
-
-
3.1 / 45
With high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in psi/
kilopascal with cold
tires
245/50 R 18 100 V M
+S A/S
245/50 R 18 100 H M
+S
2.6 / 38 2.8 / 41
245/45 R 19 102 V M
+S XL A/S
245/45 R 19 102 V M
+S XL
2.8 / 41 3.1 / 45
F.: 245/45 R 19 98 Y
R.: 275/40 R 19 101 Y
2.6 / 38
-
-
2.6 / 38
F.: 245/40 R 20 99 Y
XL
R.:
275/35 R 20 102 Y XL
2.8 / 41
-
-
2.8 / 41
F.:
245/35 R 21 96 Y XL
R.:
275/30 R 21 98 Y XL
3.2 / 46
-
-
3.2 / 46
750i xDrive, 750Li xDrive
Without high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in psi/
kilopascal with cold
tires
245/50 R 18 100 V M
+S A/S
245/50 R 18 100 H M
+S
2.4 / 35 2.6 / 38
245/45 R 19 102 V M
+S XL A/S
245/45 R 19 102 V M
+S XL
2.6 / 38 2.8 / 41
F.: 245/45 R 19 98 Y
R.: 275/40 R 19 101 Y
2.2 / 32
-
-
2.3 / 33
F.: 245/40 R 20 99 Y
XL
R.:
275/35 R 20 102 Y XL
2.5 / 36
-
-
2.6 / 38
F.:
245/35 R 21 96 Y XL
R.:
275/30 R 21 98 Y XL
2.8 / 41
-
-
3.0 / 44
With high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in psi/
kilopascal with cold
tires
245/50 R 18 100 V M
+S A/S
245/50 R 18 100 H M
+S
2.6 / 38 2.9 /42
Seite 247
247
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
tions in bar/PSI
245/45 R 19 102 V M
+S XL A/S
245/45 R 19 102 V M
+S XL
2.8 / 41 3.2 / 46
F.: 245/45 R 19 98 Y
R.: 275/40 R 19 101 Y
2.4 / 35
-
-
2.5 / 36
F.: 245/40 R 20 99 Y
XL
R.:
275/35 R 20 102 Y XL
2.7 / 39
-
-
2.7 / 39
F.:
245/35 R 21 96 Y XL
R.:
275/30 R 21 98 Y XL
3.0 / 44
-
-
3.2 / 46
Tire identification marks
Tire size
255/50 R 19 103 Y
255: nominal width in mm
50: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
19: rim diameter in inches
103: load rating, not for ZR tires
Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Speed letter
T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 3510
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
3510: tire age
Tires
with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
Tire age
DOT … 3510: the tire was manufactured in the
35th week in 2010.
Recommendation
Regardless of wear, replace tires at least every
6 years.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA;
Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal
Safety Requirements in addition to these
grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as
well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due
to variations in driving habits, service practices
and differences in road characteristics and cli‐
mate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
Seite 248
248
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Wheels and tires
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on
wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfa‐
ces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
does not include acceleration, cornering, hydro‐
planing, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus‐
tained high temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Temperature grade for this tire
The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and pos‐
sible tire failure.
If necessary, have the vehicle towed.◀
RSC – Run-flat tires
Run-flat tires, refer to page 251, are labeled with
a circular symbol containing the letters RSC
marked on the sidewall.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
weather performance than summer tires.
Tire tread
Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.12 in/3 mm.
There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if
the tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.
Winter tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.16 in/4 mm.
Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are
less suitable for winter operation.
Minimum tread depth
Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's
circumference and have the legally required
minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.
They
are marked on the side of the tire with TWI,
Tread Wear Indicator.
Tire damage
General information
Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign ob‐
jects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Notes
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐
fects:
▷ Unusual vibrations during driving.
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong tendency
to pull to the left or right.
Seite 249
249
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
In case of tire damage
If there are indications of tire damage, re‐
duce your speed immediately and have the
wheels
and tires checked right away; otherwise,
there is the increased risk of an accident.
Drive carefully to the next service center or tire
shop.
If necessary, have the vehicle towed.◀
Repair of tire damage
For safety reasons, the manufacturer of
your vehicle recommends that you do not have
damaged tires repaired; they should be re‐
placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐
sult.◀
Changing wheels and tires
Mounting
Information on mounting tires
Have mounting and balancing performed
only by a service center or tire specialist.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.◀
Wheel and tire combination
Information on the correct wheel-tire combina‐
tion and rim versions for your vehicle can be ob‐
tained from your service center.
Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair the
function of a variety of systems such as ABS or
DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐
sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐
figuration from a single manufacturer.
Following tire damage, have the original wheel
and tire combination remounted on the vehicle
as soon as possible.
Approved wheels and tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom‐
mends that you use only wheels and tires that
have been approved for your particular vehicle
model.
For example, despite having the same official
size
ratings, variations can lead to body contact
and with it, the risk of severe accidents.
The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot evalu‐
ate non-approved wheels and tires to determine
if they are suited for use, and therefore cannot
ensure the operating safety of the vehicle if they
are mounted.◀
Recommended tire brands
For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐
hicle recommends certain tire brands. These
can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.
With proper use, these tires meet the highest
standards for safety and handling.
New tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture,
tires do not achieve their full trac‐
tion potential until after an initial breaking-in pe‐
riod.
Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/
300 km.
Retreaded tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
Seite 250
250
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Wheels and tires
Retreaded tires
Possibly substantial variations in the de‐
sign and age of the tire casing structures can
limit service life and have a negative impact on
road safety.◀
Winter tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
winter tires for winter roads or at temperatures
below +45 ℉/+7 ℃.
Although
so-called all-season M+S tires do pro‐
vide better winter traction than summer tires,
they do not provide the same level of perform‐
ance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then display a corresponding sign in the field of
vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire spe‐
cialist or from your service center.
Maximum speed for winter tires
Do not exceed the maximum speed for the
winter tires; otherwise, tire damage and acci‐
dents can occur.◀
Run-flat tires
For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No
spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your
service center will be glad to advise you.
Rotating wheels between axles
The manufacturer of your vehicle advises
against swapping wheels between the front and
rear axles.
This can impair the handling characteristics.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease and fuels.
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Run-flat tires*
Label
RSC label on the tire sidewall.
The wheels are composed of special rims and
tires that are self-supporting, to a limited de‐
gree.
The
support of the sidewall allows the tire to re‐
main drivable to a restricted degree in the event
of a pressure loss.
Continued driving with a damaged tire., refer to
page 93
Changing run-flat tires
For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No
spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your
service center will be glad to advise you.
Snow chains
Fine-link snow chains
Only certain types of fine-link snow chains have
been tested by the manufacturer of your vehicle,
classified as road-safe and recommended.
Consult your service center for more informa‐
tion.
Use
Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped
with the tires of the following size:
▷ 245/50 R 18.
▷ 245/45 R 19.
Follow the chain manufacturer's instructions.
Seite 251
251
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Make sure that the snow chains are always suf‐
ficiently
tight. Retighten as needed according to
the chain manufacturer's instructions.
Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
Dynamic Traction Control if necessary.
Maximum speed with snow chains
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when
using snow chains.
Snow chain detection*
The concept
When using snow chains, you should set
whether you are driving with or without snow
chains via the iDrive.
The snow chain detection system supports you
by automatically showing the detected state on
the Control Display.
When snow chains are in use, the rear axle steer‐
ing of the Integral Active Steering* is deacti‐
vated automatically.
At speeds above the maximum allowable speed
with snow chains of 30 mph/50 km/h, the rear
axle steering is activated again automatically.
Activating the status
1. "Settings"
2. "Tire chains"
3. "Tire chains installed"
Automatic detection
If functioning properly:
▷ Snow chains are mounted. The setting is not
activated
.
After you drive a short distance, a Check
Control message is shown and the state is
activated automatically.
Confirm the automatic activation.
▷ Snow chains are not mounted. The setting
is activated .
At speeds above 30 mph/50 km/h, a Check
Control message is displayed. Deactivate
the status manually.
If not functioning properly:
▷ Snow chains are mounted. The setting is not
activated .
A Check Control message is not displayed.
The
automatic detection system is malfunc‐
tioning. Activate the status manually.
Activating/deactivating rear axle
steering
If the status indicating that snow chains are in
use
is activated, the rear axle steering is deacti‐
vated automatically.
At speeds above 30 mph/50 km/h, the rear axle
steering is activated again, even though snow
chains are in use.
Seite 252
252
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Wheels and tires
Engine compartment
Important features in the engine compartment
1 Vehicle identification number*
2 Jump starting, negative terminal
3 Washer fluid reservoir
4 Jump starting, positive terminal
5 Oil filler neck. 760i/Li: filler neck is located
under a flap.
6 Coolant reservoir, removed 760i/Li.
Hood
Opening the hood
Working in the engine compartment
Never attempt to perform any service or
repair operations on your vehicle without the
necessary professional technical training.
If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐
lines, have any work on the vehicle performed
only by a service center.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.◀
Never reach into the engine compartment
Never reach into the intermediate spaces
or gaps in the engine compartment. Otherwise,
there is risk of injury, e.g. from rotating or hot
parts.◀
1. Pull the lever.
Seite 253
253
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
2. Press the release handle and open the hood.
3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.
Danger of injury when the hood is open
There
is a danger of injury from protruding
parts when the hood is open.◀
Closing the hood
Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 16 in/
40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully.
The hood must audibly engage on both sides.
Hood open when driving
If you see any signs that the hood is not
completely
closed while driving, pull over imme‐
diately and close it securely.◀
Danger of pinching
Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Seite 254
254
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Engine compartment
Engine oil
General information
The
engine oil consumption is dependent on the
driving style and driving conditions.
Therefore, check the engine oil level after every
refueling using the electronic engine oil level
check.
Checking the oil level
The concept
The oil level is monitored electronically and dis‐
played on the Control Display.
Requirements
▷ The engine must be running and warm after
the vehicle has been driven for at least
6 miles/10 km.
▷ The vehicle is stopped or being driven on a
level roadway.
Displaying the oil level
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
Possible messages
▷ "Engine oil level OK"
▷ "Measurement not possible at this time."
▷ "Measuring engine oil level..."
Duration with the engine running: ap‐
prox. 3 minutes.
Duration while driving: approx. 5 minutes.
▷ "Engine oil level below minimum. Add 1
quart!"
Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km.
▷ "Engine oil level too high! Have this
checked."
Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Too much engine oil
Have the vehicle checked immedi‐
ately; otherwise, surplus oil can lead to en‐
gine damage.
◀
▷ "Measurement inactive. Have this
checked."
Note the newly calculated remaining mile‐
age until the next oil service. Have the sys‐
tem checked as soon as possible.
Adding engine oil
760i/Li: open/close flap
When the flap is closed, it must latch
Seite 255
255
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Filler neck
When the indicator lights up in the instrument
cluster, add 1 US quart/liter of engine oil within
the next 125 miles/200 km.
Recommended oil types, refer to page 256.
Protect children
Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐
dren and heed the warnings on the containers
to prevent health risks.◀
Oil types
Note
No oil additives
Oil
additives may lead to engine damage.◀
Approved oil types
Your service center can advise you on which en‐
gine oils have been approved by the manufac‐
turer of your vehicle.
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the
engine.
Only use approved BMW High Performance oil.
Approved oils belong to the viscosity grades
SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40 and SAE
5W-30.
Alternative oil types
If the approved engine oils are not available, up
to 1 US quart/liter of another oil with the follow‐
ing specification may be used.
API SM quality standards or higher.
Coolant
General information
Danger of burns from hot engine
Do not open the cooling system while the
engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant may
cause burns.◀
Suitable additives
Only
use suitable additives; otherwise, en‐
gine damage may occur. The additives are
harmful to your health.◀
Coolant consists of water and additives.
Not all commercially available additives are suit‐
able for your vehicle. Ask your service center for
suitable additives.
Coolant level
If there is no Min– and Max– mark in the filler
neck of the coolant reservoir, have the coolant
level checked if necessary by your service cen‐
ter and add coolant as needed.
Seite 256
256
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Engine oil
Checking
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the cap of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise
to allow any excess pres‐
sure to dissipate, and then open it.
3. The coolant level is correct if it lies between
the minimum and maximum marks in the
filler neck.
4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to
the specified level; do not overfill.
5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
6. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply
with the relevant environmental
protection regulations when disposing
of coolant and coolant additives.
Seite 257
257
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Maintenance
BMW Maintenance System
The maintenance system directs you to re‐
quired
maintenance measures and thereby sup‐
ports you in maintaining road safety and the op‐
erational reliability of the vehicle.
Condition Based Service CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐
count the driving conditions of your vehicle.
Based on this, Condition Based Service deter‐
mines the maintenance requirements.
The system makes it possible to adapt the
amount of maintenance you need to your user
profile.
Details on the service requirements, refer to
page 81, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is con‐
tinuously stored in the remote control. Your
service center will read out this data and suggest
the right array of service procedures for your ve‐
hicle.
Therefore, hand your service specialist the re‐
mote control that you used most recently.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
count.
If this occurs, have a service center update the
time-dependent maintenance procedures,
such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary,
changing the engine oil and the microfilter/acti‐
vated-charcoal filter.
Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor‐
mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for
additional information on service requirements.
Maintenance and repair should be performed by
your service center. Make sure to have regular
maintenance procedures recorded in the vehi‐
cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models, and in the Warranty and Service
Guide Booklet for Canadian models. These en‐
tries are proof of regular maintenance.
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnosis
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for
checking
the primary components in the vehicle
emissions.
Emissions
▷ The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as pos‐
sible.
▷ The warning lamp flashes under cer‐
tain circumstances:
Seite 258
258
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Maintenance
This indicates that there is excessive
misfiring in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have
the system checked immediately;
otherwise, serious engine misfiring
within a brief period can seriously
damage emission control compo‐
nents,
in particular the catalytic con‐
verter.
Fuel cap
The indicator lamp lights up.
If the fuel cap is not properly tightened,
the
OBD system may conclude that fuel
vapor is escaping. If the cap is then tightened,
the display should go out in a short time.
Data memory
Your vehicle records data relating to vehicle op‐
eration, faults and user settings. These data are
stored in the remote control and can be read out
with suitable devices, particularly when the ve‐
hicle is serviced. The data obtained in this way
provide valuable information for service proc‐
esses and repair or for optimizing and develop‐
ing vehicle functions further.
In addition, if you signed a service contract for
Assist, certain vehicle data can be sent directly
from the vehicle to facilitate the desired serv‐
ices.
Seite 259
259
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Replacing components
Tool kit
The tool kit is located in a fold-down cover in the
trunk lid.
Unscrew the wing nut to open.
Wiper blade replacement
Do
not fold down the wipers without wiper
blades
Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades have
not been installed; this may damage the wind‐
shield.◀
Replacing the wiper blades
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer to
page 72, the wiper arms.
2. Fold up the wipers.
3. Position the wiper blade in a horizontal po‐
sition.
4. Remove the wiper blade toward one side.
Lamp and bulb replacement
General information
Lamps
and bulbs make an essential contribution
to vehicle safety.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that you entrust corresponding procedures to
your service center if you are unfamiliar with
them or they are not described here.
You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs
at your service center.
Danger of burns
Only change bulbs when they are cool;
otherwise, there is the danger of getting
burned.◀
Working on the lighting system
When working on the lighting system, you
should always switch off the lights affected to
prevent short circuits.
To avoid possible injury or equipment damage
when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions
provided by the bulb manufacturer.◀
Seite 260
260
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Replacing components
Do not touch the bulbs
Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare hands, as even minute amounts of
contamination will burn into the bulb's surface
and reduce its service life.
Use
a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or
hold the bulb by its base.◀
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Light-emitting diodes installed behind a cover
serve as the light source for controls, display el‐
ements and other equipment.
These light-emitting diodes, which are related
to conventional lasers, are officially designated
as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers
Do not remove the covers, and never stare
into the unfiltered light for several hours; other‐
wise, irritation of the retina could result.◀
Headlamp glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
ternal lamps in cool or humid weather. When the
light is switched on, the condensation evapo‐
rates after a short time. The headlamp glasses
do not need to be changed.
If there is a large amount of moisture, e.g., water
droplets form in the lamp, have it checked by
your service center.
Front lamps, bulb replacement
At a glance
1 Adaptive light control
2 Parking lamp, daytime running lights*
3 Low beams/high beams
4 Turn signal
Xenon lamps
Because
of the long life of these bulbs, the like‐
lihood of failure is very low. Switching the lamps
on and off frequently shortens their life.
If a xenon bulb fails, switch on the front fog lamps
and continue the trip with great care. Comply
with local regulations.
Do not perform work/bulb replacement on
xenon headlamps
Have any work on the xenon lighting system, in‐
cluding bulb replacement, performed only by a
service center.
Due to the high voltage present in the system,
there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is car‐
ried out improperly.◀
For checking and adjusting headlamp aim,
please contact your BMW center.
Turn signals, incl. side indicators
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 260.
These lamps are made using LED technology.
Please contact your service center in the event
of a malfunction.
Adaptive light control
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 260.
The illustration shows the left side of the engine
compartment.
55-watt bulb, H3.
Seite 261
261
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
1. Open the folding cover in the engine com‐
partment.
2. Turn the cap and remove it.
3. Squeeze the holder together and guide it
downward.
4. Release the holder and fold it upward.
5. Remove the bulb and replace it.
6. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in
the reverse order.
Parking lamps
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 260.
The
illustration shows the left side of the engine
compartment.
35-watt bulb, H8.
1. Open the folding cover in the engine com‐
partment.
2. Turn the cap and remove it.
3. Turn the bulb holder.
Turn
in the other direction on the right side.
4. Remove the bulb and replace it.
5. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in
the reverse order.
Front fog lamps
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 260.
35-watt bulb, H8.
Seite 262
262
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Replacing components
1. Snap out the grill at the recess, arrow.
2. Remove the screw using a screw driver.
3. Pull the lamp out toward the front.
4. Remove the bulb and replace it.
5. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in
the reverse order.
Tail lamps, bulb replacement
At a glance
1 Turn signal
2 Backup lamp
3 Inside brake lamp*
4 Tail lamp
5 Outside brake lamp
6 Rear reflector*
Turn signal, brake, tail, and license
plate lamps
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs., refer to page 260
These lights are made using LED technology.
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.
Lamps in the trunk lid
Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs., refer to page 260
Access to the lamps
1. Remove the three screws using the screw
driver from the tool kit.
2. Fold away the cover.
3. Replace the defective bulb.
Seite 263
263
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Inside brake lamp*
21-watt bulb, H21W.
Pull out the bulb and replace it.
Backup lamp
16-watt bulb, W16W.
Pull out the bulb and replace it.
Changing wheels
Notes
The
vehicle equipment does not include a spare
tire.
When using run-flat tires* or tire sealants, a tire
does not need to be changed immediately in the
event of pressure loss due to a flat tire.
The tools for changing wheels are available as
accessories from your service center.
Jacking points for the vehicle jack
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
cated in the positions shown.
Lug bolt lock*
The lug bolt lock is in the tool kit or in a storage
compartment close to the tool kit.
▷ Lug bolt, arrow 1.
▷ Adapter, arrow 2.
Removing
1. Attach the adapter to the wheel lug.
2. Unscrew the lug bolt.
Remove the adapter after screwing the lug bolt
back on.
Seite 264
264
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Replacing components
Vehicle battery
Maintenance
The battery is maintenance-free, i.e., the elec‐
trolyte will last for the life of the battery.
Your
service center will be glad to advise you on
questions regarding the battery.
Battery replacement
Use approved vehicle batteries only.
Only use vehicle batteries that have been
approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer;
otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and
systems or functions may not be fully availa‐
ble.◀
After a battery replacement, have the battery
registered on the vehicle by your service center
to ensure that all comfort functions are fully
available.
Charging the battery
In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
terminals, refer to page 268, in the engine com‐
partment with the engine off.
Power failure
After a temporary power loss, some equipment
needs to be reinitialized.
Individual settings need to be reprogrammed:
▷ Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory:
store the positions again.
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
▷ Radio station: save again.
▷ Navigation system: wait for the operability of
the navigation.
Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by your
service center or bring them to a recy‐
cling center.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
Notes
Replacing fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do
not replace a defective fuse with a substitute
of another color or amperage rating; this could
lead to a circuit overload, ultimately resulting in
a fire in the vehicle.◀
Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse
types and locations are stored in the fuse box in
the cargo area.
In the glove compartment
Push the handle up, arrow 1, and open the lid,
arrow 2.
In the cargo area
Open the cover on the right side trim.
Information on the fuse types and locations is
found on a separate sheet.
Seite 265
265
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Breakdown assistance
Hazard warning flashers
The button is located in the center console.
Emergency Request
*
Requirements
▷ Equipment version with full preparation
package mobile phone.
An Emergency Request can be made, even
if no mobile phones are paired with the ve‐
hicle.
▷ BMW Assist is activated.
▷ The radio ready state is switched on.
▷ The BMW Assist system is logged in to a
wireless communications network sup‐
ported by BMW Assist.
▷ The Assist system is functional.
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
Emergency Request not guaranteed
For technical reasons, the Emergency Re‐
quest cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable
conditions.◀
Service contract
▷ After your contract with BMW Assist has ex‐
pired, the BMW Assist system can be deac‐
tivated by the service center without you
having to visit a workshop.
After deactivation, an Emergency Request
is no longer possible.
▷ Under certain circumstances, the system
can be reactivated by a service center after
you sign a new contract.
Initiating an Emergency Request
1. Press the cover briefly to open it.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the
button lights up.
▷ The LED lights up: an Emergency Request
was initiated.
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle
until the voice connection has been estab‐
lished.
▷ The LED flashes if the connection to the
BMW
Assist Response Center has been es‐
tablished.
After the Emergency Request arrives at the
BMW Assist Response Center, the BMW
Assist Response Center contacts you and
takes further steps to help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW
Assist Response Center can take further
steps to help you under certain circumstan‐
ces.
For this purpose, data that are used to de‐
termine the necessary rescue measures,
such as the current position of the vehicle if
it can be established, are transmitted to the
BMW Assist Response Center.
▷ If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist
Response Center cannot be heard on the
hands-free system, the hands-free system
may be malfunctioning. However, the BMW
Seite 266
266
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Breakdown assistance
Assist Response Center may still be able to
hear you.
Initiating an Emergency Request
automatically
Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐
quest is automatically initiated immediately after
a severe accident. Automatic Collision Notifica‐
tion is not affected by pressing the SOS button.
Warning triangle*
The warning triangle is located in the container
on the inside of the trunk lid.
Unscrew the wing nut to open.
First aid kit*
The first aid kit is located in the container on the
inside of the trunk lid.
Unscrew the wing nut to open.
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents reg‐
ularly and replace any items promptly.
Roadside Assistance
Service availability
Roadside Assistance can be reached around the
clock in many countries. You can obtain assis‐
tance there in the event of a vehicle breakdown.
Roadside Assistance
The Roadside Assistance, refer to page 235
phone number can be viewed on the iDrive or a
connection to Roadside Assistance* can be es‐
tablished directly.
Jump starting
Notes
If the battery is discharged, an engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle and
two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with
fully insulated clamp handles.
To prevent personal injury or damage to both
vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
dure.
Do not touch live parts
To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury,
always avoid all contact with electrical compo‐
nents while the engine is running.◀
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This informa‐
tion can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐
cle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
consumers in both vehicles.
Bodywork contact between vehicles
Make sure that there is no contact be‐
tween the bodywork of the two vehicles; other‐
wise, there is the danger of short circuits.◀
Seite 267
267
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Starting aid terminals
Connecting order
Connect the jumper cables in the correct
order; otherwise, there is the danger of injury
from sparking.◀
The so-called starting aid terminal in the engine
compartment acts as the battery's positive ter‐
minal.
The body ground or a special nut acts as the
negative terminal.
Connecting the cables
1. Pull off the cap of the BMW starting aid ter‐
minal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery,
or to the corresponding starting aid
terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Attach the other end of the cable to the pos‐
itive terminal of the battery, or to the corre‐
sponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle
to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding engine or
body ground of the vehicle providing assis‐
tance.
5. Attach the other end of the cable to the neg‐
ative
terminal of the battery, or to the corre‐
sponding engine or body ground of the ve‐
hicle to be started.
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and
let it run for several minutes at an increased
idle speed.
If the vehicle being started has a diesel en‐
gine: let the engine of the assisting vehicle
run for approx. 10 minutes.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle being started
in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before making another
attempt in order to allow the discharged bat‐
tery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse
order.
Check the battery and recharge if necessary.
Tow-starting and towing
Transporting your vehicle
Note
Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
Therefore, contact a service center in the event
of a breakdown.
Do not have the vehicle towed
Have your vehicle transported on a loading
platform only; otherwise, damage may occur.◀
Seite 268
268
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Breakdown assistance
Tow truck
Do not lift the vehicle
Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
body
and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may
result.◀
Tow-starting
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Due to the automatic transmission, the engine
cannot be started by tow-starting.
Have the cause of the starting difficulties rem‐
edied.
Towing other vehicles
General information
Light towing vehicle
Your vehicle must not be lighter than the
vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be
possible to control vehicle response.◀
Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly
Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may
cause damage.◀
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐
pending on local regulations.
▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly
identify the vehicle being towed by placing
a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐
dow.
Towing methods when towing other
vehicles
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe
the following:
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited during cor‐
nering.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is secured with an offset.
Tow rope
When
starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that
the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on
the vehicle components when towing, always
use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Attaching the tow rope correctly
Only secure the tow rope on the tow fit‐
ting; otherwise, damage can occur when it is se‐
cured on other parts of the vehicle.◀
Tow fitting
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the
front
or rear of the BMW. It is located in the con‐
tainer on the inside of the trunk lid.
Tow fitting, information on use
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with
the vehicle and screw it all the way in.
Seite 269
269
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads
only.
▷ Use the tow fitting screwed in at the front for
maneuvering the vehicle only.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,
do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.
Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the ve‐
hicle can occur.◀
Screw thread
Push out the cover by pressing on the arrow
symbol.
Seite 270
270
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Breakdown assistance
Care
Car washes
Notes
Steam jets or high-pressure washers
When using steam jets or high-pressure
washers, hold them a sufficient distance away
and use a maximum temperature of 140 ℉/
60 ℃.
Holding them too close or using excessively
high
pressures or temperatures can cause dam‐
age or preliminary damage that may then lead to
long-term damage.
Follow the operating instructions for the high-
pressure washer.◀
Cleaning sensors/cameras with high-
pressure washers
When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the exterior sensors and cameras, e.g.,
Park Distance Control*, for extended periods of
time and only from a distance of at least 12 in/
30 cm.◀
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in win‐
ter.
Intense soiling and road salt can damage the ve‐
hicle.
Washing in automatic car washes
Your vehicle can be washed in automatic car
washes right from the start.
Give preference to cloth car washes or those
that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint
damage.
Notes
Note the following:
▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not
damaged by the transport mechanisms.
▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they
may
be damaged, depending on the width of
the vehicle.
▷ Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to page 71,
to avoid unintentional wiper activation.
▷ In some cases, an unintentional alarm can be
triggered
by the interior motion sensor of the
alarm system*. Follow the instructions on
avoiding an unintentional alarm, refer to
page 44.
Guide rails in car washes
Avoid car washes with guide rails higher
than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body
could be damaged.◀
Before driving into a car wash
The vehicle is able to roll when the following
steps are taken:
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Engage transmission position N.
3. Release the parking brake, refer to page 66,
or deactivate Automatic Hold, refer to
page 68.
4. Switch the engine off.
Transmission position P with the igni‐
tion off
When the ignition is switched off, position P
is engaged automatically. When in an auto‐
matic car wash, for example, ensure that the
ignition is not switched off accidentally.◀
The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside
when in transmission position N.
A
signal is sounded when an attempt is made to
lock the vehicle.
Transmission position
Transmission position P is engaged automati‐
cally:
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
▷ After approx. 15 minutes.
Seite 271
271
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Headlamps
▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or
caustic cleansers.
▷ Soak areas that have been soiled e.g. due to
insects, with shampoo and wash off with
water.
▷ Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an
ice scraper.
After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly
to dry them; otherwise, braking action can
be reduced and corrosion of the brake discs can
occur.
Vehicle care
Car care products
BMW recommends using cleaning and care
products from BMW, since these have been
tested and approved.
Car care and cleaning products
Follow the instructions on the container.
When cleaning the interior, open the doors or
windows.
Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐
cles.
Cleansers can contain substances that are dan‐
gerous and harmful to your health.◀
Vehicle paint
Regular care contributes to driving safety and
value retention.
Environmental influences can act on the vehicle
paint. Tailor the frequency and extent of your car
care to these influences.
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather often, using a
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
wear and premature degradation of the leather
surface.
To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing,
provide leather care roughly every two
months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently as
dust and dirt are more noticeable.
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
grease will gradually break down the protective
layer of the leather surface.
Suitable care products are available from the
service center.
Upholstery material care
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.
If they are very dirty, e.g., beverage stains, use a
soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suitable
interior cleaner.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma‐
terial vigorously.
Damage from Velcro® fasteners
Open Velcro® fasteners on pants or other
articles of clothing can damage the seat covers.
Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.◀
Caring for special components
Light-alloy wheels
Use wheel cleaner, particularly during the winter
months. Do not use aggressive, acidic, strongly
alkaline or abrasive cleaners, or steam jets
above 140 ℉/60 ℃; follow the manufacturer's
instructions.
Chrome surfaces*
Carefully clean components such as the radiator
grille or door handles with an ample supply of
water, possibly with shampoo added, particu‐
larly when they have been exposed to road salt.
Rubber components
Aside from water, treat only with rubber cleans‐
ers.
Seite 272
272
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Care
When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any sil‐
icon-containing car care products in order to
avoid damage or reduced noise damping.
Fine wood parts*
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
nents
only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft
cloth.
Plastic components
These include:
▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
▷ Headliner.
▷ Lamp lenses.
▷ Instrument cluster cover.
▷ Matte black spray-coated components.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Moisten the cloth lightly and use plastic
cleanser, if necessary.
Do not soak the headliner.
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol
or solvents
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐
vents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead to
surface damage.◀
Safety belts
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Chemical cleaning
Do not clean chemically; this can destroy
the webbing.◀
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
belts clipped into their buckles.
Do not allow the reels to retract the safety belts
until they are dry.
Floor carpets and floor mats*
No objects in the area around the pedals
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;
otherwise, the function of the pedals could be
impeded while driving
Do not place additional floor mats over existing
mats or other objects.
Only
use floor mats that have been approved for
the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened
again after they were removed for cleaning, for
example.◀
Floor mats can be removed from the passenger
compartment for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To
prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth
in the direction of travel only.
Sensors/cameras
To clean sensors and cameras, use a cloth mois‐
tened with a small amount of glass cleaner.
Displays/screens
Clean the displays with a microfiber cloth.
Cleaning displays
Do not use chemical or household cleans‐
ers.
Keep all fluids and moisture away from the unit.
Otherwise, they could affect or damage surfa‐
ces or electrical components.
Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do
not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage
can result.◀
Long-term vehicle storage
Your service center can advise you on what to
consider when storing the vehicle for longer
than three months.
Seite 273
273
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference
This chapter contains technical data, short
commands for the voice activation system, and an
index that will quickly take you to the information
you need.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Technical data
Dimensions
Width with mirrors, height with roof-mounted aerial
The two bottom values apply to L models. Height with roof-mounted aerial 760Li: 58.7 in‐
ches/1,490 mm
Seite 276
276
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Technical data
Width without mirrors
Length, wheel base
The bottom values apply to L models.
Smallest turning circle
Diameter: 40 ft/12.2 m
750i xDrive, 740d xDrive Ø: 41 ft/12.5 m
L model Ø: 41.7 ft/12.7 m
750Li xDrive Ø: 42.7 ft/13.0 m
Seite 277
277
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Weights
740i 740Li
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,445/2,470 5,589/2,535
Load lbs/kg 1,058/480 1,058/480
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,635/1,195 2,701/1,225
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,086/1,400 3,164/1,435
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100 220/100
Trunk capacity cu ft/l 17.7/500 17.7/500
750i 750Li
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,699/2,585 5,820/2,640
Load lbs/kg 1,058/480 1,058/480
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,789/1,265 2,855/1,295
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,120/1,415 3,197/1,450
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100 220/100
Trunk capacity cu ft/l 17.7/500 17.7/500
750i xDrive 750Li xDrive
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,842/2,650 5,975/2,710
Load lbs/kg 1,058/480 1,058/480
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,932/1,330 2,976/1,350
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,142/1,425 3,208/1,455
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100 220/100
Trunk capacity cu ft/l 17.7/500 17.7/500
760Li
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 6,096/2,765
Load lbs/kg 948/430
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 3,009/1,365
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,208/1,455
Seite 278
278
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Technical data
760Li
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100
Trunk capacity cu ft/l 17.7/500
Capacities
Notes
Fuel tank US gal/liters approx. 21.7/82 Fuel quality, refer
to page 243
Windshield and headlamp
washer system
US quarts/liters approx. 5.3/5.0
Seite 279
279
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Short commands of the voice activation
system*
General information
Instructions
for voice activation system, refer to
page 25.
To have the available spoken instructions read
out loud: ›Voice commands‹
Adjusting
Vehicle
Function Command
Open the main menu. ›Main menu‹
Open the options. ›Options‹
Open the settings. ›Settings‹
Info display of the instrument cluster. ›Info Display‹
Settings on the Control Display. ›Control display‹
Open the time and date. ›Time and date‹
Open the language and units. ›Language and units‹
Open the speed limit. ›Speed‹
Open the light. ›Lighting‹
Open the door lock. ›Door locks‹
Open the profiles. ›Profiles‹
Equipment*
Function Command
Open the air conditioning settings. ›Climate‹
Open the Head-up Display. ›head up display‹
Enable the rear. ›Allow rear control‹
Seite 280
280
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Short commands of the voice activation system
Vehicle information
Owner's Manual
Function Command
Open the Owner's Manual. ›Display Owner's Manual‹
Open the Quick Reference Guide. ›Quick reference‹
Open the index. ›Owner's Manual‹
Open the search by pictures. ›Search by pictures‹
Computer
Function Command
Open the computer. ›Onboard info‹
Open the trip computer. ›Trip computer‹
Vehicle
Function Command
Open the vehicle information. ›Vehicle info‹
Open the vehicle status. ›Vehicle status‹
Navigation*
General information
Function Command
Navigation menu. ›Navigation‹
Open the destination entry. ›Enter address‹
Enter the address. ›Enter address‹
Open destination guidance. ›Guidance‹
Start destination guidance. ›Start guidance‹
Terminate destination guidance. ›Stop guidance‹
Open the home address. ›Home address‹
Open the route criteria. ›Route preference‹
Seite 281
281
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Function Command
Open the route. ›Route information‹
Switch on the spoken instruction. ›Switch on voice instructions‹
Repeat the spoken instruction. ›Repeat voice instructions‹
Switch off the spoken instruction. ›Switch off voice instructions‹
Display the address book. ›Address book‹
Display the most recent destinations. ›Last destinations‹
Open the traffic bulletins. ›Traffic Info‹
Special destinations. ›Points of interest‹
Map
Function Command
Display the map. ›Map‹
Map facing north. ›Map facing north‹
Map facing the direction of travel. ›Map in direction of travel‹
Perspective map. ›Map perspective view‹
Automatic scaling of the map. ›Map with automatic scaling‹
Scale...feet. ›Map scale ... feet‹
Scale...meters. ›Map
scale ... meters‹ e.g., map scale 100 meters
Scale...kilometers. ›Map scale ... kilometers‹ e.g., map scale 5 kilo‐
meters
Scale...miles. ›Map scale ... miles‹ e.g., map scale 5 miles
Split screen settings
Function Command
Split screen. ›Switch on splitscreen‹
Switch off the split screen. ›Turn off split screen‹
Adjust the split screen. ›Split screen content‹
Split screen, map facing north. ›Split screen map facing north‹
Split screen, current position. ›Split screen current position‹
Seite 282
282
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Short commands of the voice activation system
Function Command
Split screen, facing the direction of travel. ›Split screen map in direction of travel‹
Split screen, perspective. ›Split screen perspective‹
Split screen, expanded intersection zoom. ›Splitscreen Exit ramp view‹
Split screen scale...feet. ›Split
screen scale ... feet‹ e.g., split screen scale
100 feet
Split screen scale...meters. ›Split screen scale ... meters‹ e.g., split screen
scale 100 meters
Split screen scale...kilometers. ›Split screen scale ... kilometers‹ e.g., split screen
scale 5 kilometers
Split screen scale...miles. ›Split screen scale ... miles‹ e.g., split screen
scale 5 miles
Split screen, highlight the traffic situation. ›Split screen, Traffic conditions‹
Split screen, computer. ›Split screen on board info‹
Split screen, trip computer. ›Splitscreen trip computer‹
Split screen, scale automatically. ›Split screen automatic scaling‹
Destination guidance with intermediate destinations
Function Command
Enter a new destination. ›Enter address‹
Trip list. ›Stored trips‹
Radio
FM
Function Command
Open a frequency. ›Frequency ... megahertz‹ e.g., 93.5 megahertz
or frequency 93.5
Open the radio. ›Radio‹
Open the FM stations. ›F M‹
Open the manual search. ›Manual‹
Seite 283
283
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Function Command
Select a frequency range. ›Select frequency‹
Open a station. ›Select station‹
AM
Function Command
Open a frequency. ›Frequency ... Kilohertz‹ e.g., frequency 753 or
753 kilohertz
Open the AM stations. ›A M‹
Open the manual search. ›Manual‹
Weather Band
Function Command
Open the Weather Band. ›Weather band‹
Switch on the Weather Band. ›Weather band on‹
Select a Weather Band station. ›Select a weather channel‹
Satellite radio*
Function Command
Open the satellite radio. ›Satellite radio‹
Switch on the satellite radio. ›Satellite radio on‹
Select a satellite radio channel. ›Select
satellite radio‹ e.g., satellite radio channel
2
Stored stations
Function Command
Open the stored stations. ›Presets‹
Choose a stored station. ›Select preset‹
Select a stored station. ›Preset ...‹ e.g., stored station 2
Seite 284
284
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Short commands of the voice activation system
CD/Multimedia*
CD/DVD drive
Function Command
Select a track. ›Track ...‹ e.g., track 5
or
›C D track ...
‹ e.g., CD track 5
Play back a CD. ›C D on‹
Select a CD. ›Select C D‹
Select a CD and track. ›C D ... track ...‹ e.g., CD 3 track 5
Open the CD and Multimedia menu. ›C D and multimedia‹
CD and DVD. ›C D‹
Select a DVD. ›D V D ...‹ e.g. DVD 3
Display the entertainment details on a split
screen.
›Entertainment details‹
Music collection
Function Command
Search for music, open a menu. ›Music search‹
Open the current playback. ›Current playback‹
Open the music collection. ›Music collection‹
Play back the music collection. ›Music collection on‹
Play back the most frequently played tracks. ›Top fifty‹
External devices
Function Command
Open the external devices. ›External devices‹
Open the Bluetooth devices. ›Bluetooth‹
AUX at front. ›AUX front‹
Seite 285
285
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Tone
Function Command
Open the tone settings. ›Tone‹
Telephone*
Function Command
Dial a phone number. ›Dial number‹
Open the Telephone menu. ›Telephone‹
Display the phone book. ›Phonebook‹
Redialing. ›Redial‹
Display received calls. ›Received calls‹
List of messages ›Messages‹
Open the Bluetooth devices. ›Bluetooth‹
Office*
Function Command
Open the Office menu. ›Office‹
Display Office Today. ›Current office‹
Display the contacts. ›Contacts‹
Display the messages. ›Messages‹
Display the calendar. ›Calendar‹
Display the tasks. ›Tasks‹
Display the reminders. ›Reminders‹
Seite 286
286
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Short commands of the voice activation system
Contacts*
Function Command
Select a name. ›Choose name‹
My contacts. ›My contacts‹
Open the contacts. ›Contacts‹
New contact. ›New contact‹
BMW ConnectedDrive*
Function Command
Open BMW ConnectedDrive. ›Connected Drive‹
Open BMW Search. ›B M W Online‹
Seite 287
287
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐
tem 98
ACC, Active Cruise Control
with Stop & Go 105
Activated-charcoal filter 128
Active Blind Spot Detec‐
tion 95
Active Cruise Control with
Stop & Go, ACC 105
Active seat, front 50
Active seat ventilation,
front 51
Active seat ventilation,
rear 53
Active Steering, integral 101
Adaptive brake assistant 98
Adaptive brake lights, refer to
Brake force display 97
Adaptive drive 100
Adaptive light control 85
Adaptive
light control, bulb re‐
placement 261
Additional telephone 212
Additives, oil 256
Adjustments, seats/head re‐
straints 48
Airbags 88
Airbags, indicator/warning
light 89
Air circulation, refer to Recir‐
culated-air mode 126
Air distribution, manual 125
Air drying, refer to Cooling
function 127
Air pressure, tires 244
Air vents, refer to Ventila‐
tion 128
Air volume, automatic climate
control 126
Alarm system 43
Alarm, unintentional 44
All around the center con‐
sole 17
All around the headliner 18
All around the steering
wheel 12
ALL program, automatic cli‐
mate control 127
All-season tires, refer to Win‐
ter tires 251
All-wheel-drive 99
Alternating-code hand-held
transmitter 133
Alternative oil types 256
AM/FM station 172
Announcement, navigation,
refer to Spoken instruc‐
tions 161
Antifreeze, washer fluid 72
Antilock Brake System,
ABS 98
Anti-slip control, refer to
DSC 98
Appointments 228
Approved engine oils 256
Apps 238
Armrest, refer to Center arm‐
rest 139
Arrival time 79
Ashtray 134
Assist 234
Assistance, Roadside Assis‐
tance 267
Assistance when driving
off 98
Audio playback 179
Audio playback, Blue‐
tooth 194
Audio remote control 198
AUTO intensity 126
Automatic car wash 271
Automatic climate con‐
trol 125
Automatic Cruise Control with
Stop & Go 105
Automatic Curb Monitor 59
Automatic deactivation, front
passenger airbags 89
Automatic headlamp con‐
trol 85
Automatic Hold 68
Automatic locking 39
Automatic recirculated-air
control 126
Automatic Soft Closing,
doors 39
Automatic Soft Closing, trunk
lid 40
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 72
Automatic trunk lid 40
AUTO program, automatic cli‐
mate control 126
AUTO program, intensity 126
AUX-IN port 190
Average fuel consumption 78
Average speed 78
Axle loads, weights 278
B
Backrest curvature, refer to
Lumbar support 49
Backrest, seats 48
Backrest, width 49
Back seats, adjusting 51
Backup camera 116
Backup lamps, bulb replace‐
ment 263
Balance 170
Band-Aids, refer to First aid
kit 267
Bar for tow-starting/tow‐
ing 269
Basic position, rear seats 52
Bass 170
Seite 288
288
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Everything from A to Z
Battery replacement, audio re‐
mote control 198
Battery replacement, remote
control, rear entertain‐
ment 200
Battery replacement, vehicle
battery 265
Battery replacement, vehicle
remote control 32
Battery, vehicle 265
Before entering the car
wash 271
Belts, safety belts 53
Beverage holder, cu‐
pholder 140
Blinds, sun protection 45
Bluetooth audio 194
BMW Apps 238
BMW Apps, video play‐
back 193
BMW Assist 234
BMW EfficientDynamics, refer
to Saving fuel 148
BMW homepage 6
BMW Internet page 6
BMW Maintenance Sys‐
tem 258
BMW Online 236
Bottle holder, refer to Cu‐
pholder 140
Brake assistant 98
Brake assistant, adaptive 98
Brake discs, breaking in 144
Brake force display 97
Brake lamps, brake force dis‐
play 97
Brake lamps, bulb replace‐
ment 263
Brake lights, adaptive 97
Brake pads, breaking in 144
Braking, notes 145
Breakdown assis‐
tance 266, 267
Breaking in 144
Brightness of Control Dis‐
play 81
Bulb replacement 260
Bulb replacement, front 261
Bulb replacement, rear 263
Bulbs and lamps 260
Button, RES 107
Button, Start/Stop 65
Bypassing, refer to starting
aid 267
C
Calendar 228
California Proposition 65
Warning 7
Camera, backup camera 118
Camera, care 273
Camera, Side View 119
Camera, Top View 120
Can holder, refer to Cu‐
pholder 140
Car battery 265
Car care products 272
Care, displays 273
Care, vehicle 272
Cargo 146
Cargo area lid 39
Cargo area, storage compart‐
ments 140
Cargo straps, securing
cargo 147
Car key, refer to Remote con‐
trol 32
Carpet, care 273
Car wash 271
Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 144
CBS Condition Based Serv‐
ice 258
CD/DVD 179
CD/DVD player, rear 199, 204
CDs, storing 186
Cell phone 212
Center armrest 139
Center console 17
Central locking system 35
Central
screen, refer to Control
Display 19
Changes, technical, refer to
Safety 7
Changing parts 260
Changing wheels/tires 250
Check Control 82
Children, seating position 61
Children, transporting
safely 61
Child restraint fixing sys‐
tem 61
Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 62
Child restraint fixing systems,
mounting 61
Child-safety locks 64
Child seat, mounting 61
Child seats 61
Chrome parts, care 272
Cigarette lighter 134
Cleaning, displays 273
Climate control 125
Climate control on head‐
liner 130
Climate control wind‐
shield 145
Clock 77
Closing/opening from in‐
side 39
Closing/opening via door
lock 38
Closing/opening with remote
control 36
Clothes hooks 140
Collision warning 110
Combination instrument 14
Combination instrument, elec‐
tronic displays 16
Combination switch, refer to
Turn signals 70
Combination switch, refer to
Wiper system 70
Comfort Access 42
COMFORT program, Dynamic
Driving Control 103
Computer 77
Concierge service 235
Condensation on win‐
dows 126
Condensation under the vehi‐
cle 146
Seite 289
289
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Condition Based Service
CBS 258
Confirmation signal 37
Contacts 223, 232
Control Display 19
Control Display, settings 80
Controller 19
Control systems, driving sta‐
bility 98
Convenient opening 36
Coolant 256
Coolant temperature 76
Cooler 135
Cooling function 127
Cooling, maximum 126
Cooling system 256
Corrosion on brake discs 146
Cruise control 111
Cruise control, active with
Stop & Go 105
Cruising range 75
Cupholder 140
Curb weight 278
Current fuel consumption 76
Current location, storing 154
Customer Relations 237
D
Damage, tires 249
Damping control, dy‐
namic 100
Data, technical 276
Date 77
Daytime running lights 85
Defrosting, refer to Windows,
defrosting 126
Destination distance 78
Destination guidance 159
Destination guidance with in‐
termediate destinations 158
Destination input, naviga‐
tion 152
Digital clock 77
Digital radio 173
Dimensions 276
Dimmable interior rearview
mirror 59
Direction indicator, refer to
Turn signals 70
Display in front wind‐
shield 123
Display,
instrument cluster 75
Display lighting, refer to Instru‐
ment lighting 87
Displays 14
Displays, cleaning 273
Disposal, coolant 257
Disposal, vehicle battery 265
Distance control, refer to
PDC 113
Distance, selecting for
ACC 106
Distance to destination 78
Divided screen view, split
screen 23
Door lock, refer to Remote
control 32
Doors, Automatic Soft Clos‐
ing 39
Downhill control 99
Drive-off assistant 98
Drive-off assistant, refer to
DSC 98
Driving instructions, breaking
in 144
Driving notes, general 144
Driving stability control sys‐
tems 98
Driving tips 144
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 98
DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol 99
DVD/CD 179
DVD/CD notes 185
DVD/CD player, rear 199, 204
DVD changer 183
DVD settings 182
DVDs, storing 186
DVD, video 181
Dynamic Damping Con‐
trol 100
Dynamic destination guid‐
ance 165
Dynamic Drive 100
Dynamic Driving Control 102
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 98
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 99
E
EfficientDynamics, refer to
Saving fuel 148
Electronic displays, instru‐
ment cluster 16
Electronic engine oil level
check 255
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, refer to DSC 98
Emergency detection, remote
control 33
Emergency release, door
lock 38
Emergency release, fuel filler
flap 242
Emergency release, parking
brake 67
Emergency Request 266
Emergency service, refer to
Roadside Assistance 267
Emergency start function, en‐
gine start 33
Emergency unlocking, trunk
lid 42
Energy Control 76
Energy recovery 77
Engine compartment 253
Engine compartment, working
in 253
Engine coolant 256
Engine oil 255
Engine oil, adding 255
Engine oil additives 256
Engine oil filler neck 255
Engine oil temperature 76
Engine oil types, alterna‐
tive 256
Engine oil types, ap‐
proved 256
Engine start during malfunc‐
tion 33
Seite 290
290
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Everything from A to Z
Engine start, refer to Starting
the engine 65
Engine start, Starting aid 267
Engine stop 66
Engine temperature 76
Entering/exiting
vehicle, assis‐
tance, steering wheel 60
Equalizer 170
Equipment, interior 132
ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐
gram, refer to DSC 98
Exchanging wheels/tires 250
Exhaust system 144
Exterior mirror, automatic dim‐
ming feature, dimmable exte‐
rior mirrors 59
Exterior mirrors 58
External devices 190
External start 267
External temperature dis‐
play 76
External temperature warn‐
ing 76
Eyes for securing cargo 147
F
Fader 170
Failure message, refer to
Check Control 82
False alarm, refer to Uninten‐
tional alarm 44
Fan, refer to Air volume 126
Fault displays, refer to Check
Control 82
Filler neck for engine oil 255
Fine wood, care 273
First aid kit 267
Fitting for towing, refer to Tow
fitting 269
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 91
Flat tire, warning lamp 92
Flat tire, wheel change 264
Flooding 145
Floor carpet, care 273
Floor mats, care 273
FM/AM station 172
Folding table in the rear 136
Fold-out position, windshield
wipers 72
Foot brake 145
Front airbags 88
Front fog lamps 87
Front fog lamps, front, bulb re‐
placement 262
Front lamps 261
Front passenger airbags, au‐
tomatic deactivation 89
Front passenger airbags, indi‐
cator lamp 90
Front passenger seat, adjust‐
ing 50
Front seats, adjusting 48
Fuel cap 242
Fuel consumption, current 76
Fuel consumption, refer to
Average fuel consump‐
tion 78
Fuel filler flap 242
Fuel gauge 75
Fuel quality 243
Fuel, tank capacity 279
Fuse 265
G
Garage door opener, refer to
Integrated universal remote
control 132
Gas station recommenda‐
tion 161
Gear change, automatic trans‐
mission 73
General driving notes 144
Gentleman function 50
Glass sunroof, powered 46
Glove compartment 138
GPS navigation, refer to Navi‐
gation system 152
Gross vehicle weight, ap‐
proved 278
Gross weight, permissible for
trailer towing 278
H
Hand brake, refer to Parking
brake 66
Hand-held transmitter, alter‐
nating code 133
Hazard warning flashers 266
HDC Hill Descent Control 99
HD Radio 173
Head airbags 88
Headlamp control, auto‐
matic 85
Headlamp courtesy delay fea‐
ture 84
Headlamp courtesy delay fea‐
ture via remote control 37
Headlamp flasher 70
Headlamp glass 261
Headlamps 261
Headlamps, care 272
Headlamp washer system 70
Headliner 18
Headphones, rear entertain‐
ment 202, 207
Head restraints 48
Head restraints, front 54
Head restraints, rear 55
Head-up Display 123
Head-up Display, care 273
Heavy cargo, stowing 147
Height, seats 48
Height
with roof-mounted aer‐
ial, vehicle 276
High-beam Assistant 86
High beams 70
High beams/low beams, refer
to High-beam Assistant 86
Hill Descent Control HDC 99
Hills 146
Hill start assistant, refer to
Drive-off assistant 98
Hints 6
Holder for beverages 140
Homepage 6
Hood 253
Horn 12
Hotel function, trunk lid 41
Hot exhaust system 144
Seite 291
291
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
House number, entering for
navigation 153
Hydroplaning 145
I
Ice warning, refer to External
temperature warning 76
Icy roads, refer to External
temperature warning 76
Identification marks, tires 248
Identification number, refer to
Engine compartment 253
iDrive 19
Ignition key, refer to Remote
control 32
Ignition off 65
Ignition on 65
Indication of a flat tire 92
Indicator and warning mes‐
sages 14
Indicator lamps 14
Individual air distribution 125
Individual settings, refer to
Personal Profile 33
Inflation pressure, tires 244
Info display, refer to Com‐
puter 77
Information on the navigation
data 166
Initialization, Integral Active
Steering 101
Initializing,
Tire Pressure Mon‐
itor TPM 92
Instrument cluster 14, 75
Instrument cluster, electronic
displays 16
Instrument lighting 87
Integral Active Steering 101
Integrated key 32
Integrated universal remote
control 132
Intensity, AUTO program 126
Interactive map 156
Interior equipment 132
Interior lamps 87
Interior lamps via remote con‐
trol 36
Interior motion sensor 44
Interior rearview mirror 59
Interior rearview mirror, auto‐
matic dimming feature 59
Intermediate destinations 158
Internet page 6
Intersection, entering for navi‐
gation 153
Interval display, service re‐
quirements 81
iPod/iPhone 191
J
Jacking points for the vehicle
jack 264
Jack, refer to Vehicle jack 264
Joystick, automatic transmis‐
sion 73
K
Key/remote control 32
Keyless Go, refer to Comfort
Access 42
Key Memory, refer to Personal
Profile 33
Kickdown, automatic trans‐
mission 73
Knee airbag 88
L
Lamp replacement 260
Lamp replacement, front 261
Lamp replacement, rear 263
Lamps 84
Lamps and bulbs 260
Lane departure warning 94
Lane margin, warning 94
Language on Control Dis‐
play 81
Lashing eyes, securing
cargo 147
LATCH child restraint fixing
system 62
Leather, care 272
LEDs, light-emitting di‐
odes 261
Length, vehicle 277
Letters and numbers, enter‐
ing 24
License plate lamp, bulb re‐
placement 263
Light-alloy wheels, care 272
Light control 85
Light-emitting diodes,
LEDs 261
Lighter, front 134
Lighter, rear 134
Lighting 84
Lighting via remote control 36
Light switch 84
Load 147
Loading 146
Lock, door 38
Locking/unlocking from in‐
side 39
Locking/unlocking via door
lock 38
Locking/unlocking with re‐
mote control 36
Locking, automatic 39
Locking, central 35
Locking via trunk lid 40
Lock, power window 45
Locks, doors, and win‐
dows 64
Low beams 84
Low beams, automatic, refer to
High-beam Assistant 86
Lower back support 49
Lug bolt lock 264
Luggage rack, refer to Roof-
mounted luggage rack 148
Lumbar support 49
M
Maintenance 258
Maintenance require‐
ments 258
Maintenance, service require‐
ments 81
Seite 292
292
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Everything from A to Z
Maintenance System,
BMW 258
Malfunction displays, refer to
Check Control 82
Malfunction, self-leveling sus‐
pension 102
Manual air distribution 125
Manual air volume 126
Manual brake, refer to Parking
brake 66
Manual mode, transmis‐
sion 74
Manual operation, backup
camera 116
Manual operation, door
lock 38
Manual
operation, exterior mir‐
rors 59
Manual operation, fuel filler
flap 242
Manual operation, Park Dis‐
tance Control PDC 114
Manual operation, parking
brake 67
Manual operation, Side
View 118
Manual operation, Top
View 119
Manual operation, trunk lid 40
Map, destination entry 156
Map in split screen 163
Map view 161
Marking on approved
tires 250
Marking, run-flat tires 251
Massage seat, front 50
Massage seat, rear 52
Master key, refer to Remote
control 32
Maximum cooling 126
Maximum speed, winter
tires 251
Measure, units of 81
Medical kit 267
Memory for seat, mirrors,
steering wheel 57
Menu in instrument cluster 77
Menus, operating, iDrive 19
Menus, refer to iDrive operat‐
ing concept 20
Message list, traffic bulle‐
tins 163
Messages 226
Messages, refer to Check
Control 82
Microfilter 128
Minimum tread, tires 249
Mirror 58
Mirror memory 57
Mobile communication devi‐
ces in the vehicle 145
Mobile phone 212
Modifications, technical, refer
to Safety 7
Moisture in headlamp 261
Monitor, refer to Control Dis‐
play 19
Mounting of child restraint fix‐
ing systems 61
MP3 player 190
Multifunction steering wheel,
buttons 12
Multimedia 179
Music collection 186
Music search 187
Music, storing 186
N
Navigation 152
Navigation data 166
Neck restraints, front, refer to
Head restraints 54
Neck restraints, rear, refer to
Head restraints 55
New wheels and tires 250
Night Vision with pedestrian
detection 120
NORMAL program, Dynamic
Driving Control 103
Notes 229
Nylon rope for tow-starting/
towing 269
O
OBD Onboard Diagnos‐
tics 258
Obstacle marking, backup
camera 117
Odometer 77
Office 223
Oil 255
Oil, adding 255
Oil additives 256
Oil
change interval, service re‐
quirements 81
Oil filler neck 255
Oil level check 255
Oil types, alternative 256
Oil types, approved 256
Old batteries, disposal 265
Onboard Diagnostics
OBD 258
Onboard monitor, refer to
Control Display 19
Online, refer to BMW On‐
line 236
Opening/closing from in‐
side 39
Opening/closing via door
lock 38
Opening/closing with remote
control 36
Operating concept, iDrive 19
Outside air, refer to Automatic
recirculated-air control 126
Overheating of engine, refer to
Coolant temperature 76
P
Paint, vehicle 272
Panic mode 36
Park Distance Control
PDC 113
Parked-car ventilation 130
Parked vehicle, condensa‐
tion 146
Parking aid, refer to PDC 113
Parking brake 66
Parking lamps 84
Seite 293
293
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Parking lamps, bulb replace‐
ment 262
Parking with Auto Hold 68
Passenger side mirror, tilting
downward 59
Pathway lines, backup cam‐
era 116
PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol 113
Pedestrian detection, refer to
Night Vision 120
People detection, refer to
Night Vision 120
Permissible axle load 278
Personal information 223
Personal Profile 33
Phone 212
Pinch
protection system, glass
sunroof 47
Pinch protection system, win‐
dows 45
Plastic, care 273
PlugIn 239
Position, storing 154
Postal code, entering in navi‐
gation 152
Power failure 265
Power sunroof, glass 46
Power windows 44
Pressure, tire air pres‐
sure 244
Profile, refer to Personal Pro‐
file 33
Programmable memory but‐
tons, iDrive 23
Protective function, glass sun‐
roof 47
Protective function, win‐
dows 45
Push-and-turn switch, refer to
Controller 19
R
Radiator fluid 256
Radio 172
Radio-operated key, refer to
Remote control 32
Radio ready state 65
Rain sensor 71
Random 180
Random playback 180
RDS 173
Reading out loud 230
Rear automatic climate con‐
trol 129
Rear axle steering 101
Rear cooler 135
Rear entertainment 199, 204
Rear lamps 263
Rear seats, adjusting 51
Rear seats, basic position 52
Rear sockets 135
Rear source, selecting for rear
entertainment 201, 206
Rearview mirror 58
Rear window defroster 127
Recirculated-air mode 126
Recommended tire
brands 250
Refueling 242
Remaining range 75
Reminders 229
Remote control/key 32
Remote control, audio 198
Remote control, malfunc‐
tion 37
Remote control, rear enter‐
tainment 200
Remote control, universal 132
Replacement fuse 265
Replacing parts 260
Replacing wheels/tires 250
Reporting safety defects 8
RES button 107
Reserve warning, refer to
Range 75
Resetting, Tire Pressure Mon‐
itor TPM 92
Residual heat, automatic cli‐
mate control 127
Retaining straps, securing
cargo 147
Retreaded tires 250
Roadside Assistance 235
Roadside parking lamps 85
Roller sunblinds 45
Roll stabilization, refer to
Adaptive Drive 100
Roll stabilization, refer to Dy‐
namic Drive 100
Roof load capacity 278
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 148
Rope for tow-starting/tow‐
ing 269
Route 160
Route criteria, route 159
Route, displaying 160
Routes, avoiding 160
Route section, bypassing 161
RSC Runflat System Compo‐
nent, refer to Run-flat
tires 251
Rubber components,
care 272
Run-flat tires 251
S
Safe braking 145
Safety 7
Safety belt reminder 54
Safety belts 53
Safety belts, care 273
Safety switch, windows 45
Safety systems, airbags 88
Satellite radio 174
Saving fuel 148
Scale, changing during navi‐
gation 162
Screen, refer to Control Dis‐
play 19
Screwdriver 260
Screw thread for tow fit‐
ting 270
Seat belts, refer to Safety
belts 53
Seat heating, front 50
Seat heating, rear 53
Seating position for chil‐
dren 61
Seat, mirror, and steering
wheel memory 57
Seite 294
294
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Everything from A to Z
Seats 48
Seats, rear, adjusting 51
Seat ventilation, front 51
Seat ventilation, rear 53
Selection list in instrument
cluster 77
Selector lever, automatic
transmission 73
Self-leveling suspension, air
suspension 101
Self-leveling suspension, mal‐
function 102
Sensors, care 273
Service and warranty 7
Service requirements, CBS
Condition Based Serv‐
ice 258
Service requirements, dis‐
play 81
Service, Roadside Assis‐
tance 267
Settings on Control Dis‐
play 80
Settings, storing for seat, mir‐
rors, steering wheel 57
Shifting, automatic transmis‐
sion 72
Short commands 280
Shoulder support 49
Side airbags 88
Side View 118
Signaling, horn 12
Signals when unlocking 37
Sitting safely 48
Size 276
Ski bag 136
Slide/tilt glass roof 46
Smallest turning circle 277
Smoker's package 134
Snap-in adapter, mobile
phone 221
Snow chains 251
Socket 134
Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐
nostics 258
Software applications,
iPhone 238
Software update 197
Spare fuse 265
Special destinations, naviga‐
tion 155
Specified engine oil
types 256
Speed, average 78
Speed limit, setting 79
Speedometer 14
Split screen 23
Split
screen map settings 163
Spoken instructions, naviga‐
tion 161
SPORT+ program, Dynamic
Driving Control 103
SPORT program, Dynamic
Driving Control 103
Sport program, transmis‐
sion 74
Stability control systems 98
Start/Stop button 65
Start function during malfunc‐
tion 33
Starting aid 267
Starting the engine 65
State/province, selecting for
navigation 152
Stations, stored 178
Station, storing 172
Status display, tires 91
Status information, iDrive 22
Status of Owner's Manual 6
Steering, Integral Active
Steering 101
Steering wheel, adjusting 60
Steering wheel heating 60
Steering wheel memory 57
Steptronic, automatic trans‐
mission 72
Stopping the engine 66
Storage compartments 138
Storage compartments, loca‐
tions 138
Storage, tires 251
Storing the vehicle 273
Street, entering for naviga‐
tion 153
Summer tires, tread 249
Supplementary text mes‐
sage 83
Surround View 115
Suspension settings 102
Switch for Dynamic Driving
Control 102
Switch-on times, parked-car
ventilation 131
Switch, refer to Cockpit 12
Symbols 6
T
Tachometer 76
Tail and brake lamps 263
Tailgate 39
Tailgate, automatic 40
Tailgate via remote control 37
Tail lamps 263
Tail lamps, bulb replace‐
ment 263
Tasks 229
Technical changes, refer to
Safety 7
Technical data 276
TeleService 234
Temperature, automatic cli‐
mate control 126
Temperature display, external
temperature 76
Temperature, engine oil 76
Tempomat, refer to Active
Cruise Control 105
Terminal, starting aid 268
Text messages 226
Text message, supplemen‐
tary 83
Theft alarm system, refer to
Alarm system 43
Theft protection, lug
bolts 264
Theft protection, refer to Cen‐
tral locking system 35
Thermal camera, refer to Night
Vision 120
Thigh support 48
Tilt alarm sensor 44
Tilt, seats 48
Seite 295
295
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
Time of arrival 79
Tire damage 249
Tire identification marks 248
Tire inflation pressure 244
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 91
Tires, changing 250
Tires, everything on wheels
and tires 244
Tires, run-flat tires 251
Tire tread 249
Toll roads, route 160
Tone 170
Tool kit 260
Tools 260
Top View 119
Total vehicle weight 278
Tow fitting 269
Towing 268
Town/city, navigation 152
Tow-starting 268
TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor 91
Traction control 99
TRACTION
program, Dynamic
Driving Control 102
Traffic bulletins, naviga‐
tion 163
Traffic situation/gray card 164
Transmission, automatic 72
Transporting children
safely 61
Tread, tires 249
Treble, tone 170
Trip computer 79
Triple turn signal activa‐
tion 70
Trip odometer 77
Trunk lid 39
Trunk lid, automatic 40
Trunk lid, emergency unlock‐
ing 42
Trunk lid, hotel function 41
Trunk lid, manual opera‐
tion 40
Trunk lid via remote con‐
trol 37
Turning circle 277
Turning circle lines, backup
camera 116
Turn signals, front, bulb re‐
placement 261
Turn signals, operation 70
Turn signals, rear, bulb re‐
placement 263
U
Unintentional alarm 44
Units of measure 81
Universal remote control 132
Unlock button, automatic
transmission 73
Unlocking/locking from in‐
side 39
Unlocking/locking via door
lock 38
Unlocking/locking with remote
control 36
Updates made after the edito‐
rial deadline 6
Updating software 197
Upholstery care 272
USB audio interface 191
USB interface 138
V
Vanity mirror 60
Variable steering, Integral Ac‐
tive Steering 101
Vehicle battery 265
Vehicle battery, replacing 265
Vehicle, breaking in 144
Vehicle care 272
Vehicle identification number,
refer to Identification number
in the engine compart‐
ment 253
Vehicle jack 264
Vehicle paint 272
Vehicle storage 273
Vehicle wash 271
Ventilation 128
Ventilation, refer to Parked-car
ventilation 130
Version of the navigation
data 166
Video playback 181
Video playback, iPhone 193
Video playback, snap-in
adapter 193
Voice activation, mobile
phone 219
Voice activation, short com‐
mands 280
Voice activation system 25
Volume, setting 170
W
Warning lamps 14
Warning messages, refer to
Check Control 82
Warning triangle 267
Washer fluid 72
Washer fluid reservoir, ca‐
pacity 279
Washer nozzles, wind‐
shield 72
Washer system 70
Washing, vehicle 271
Water on roads 145
Weather Band 174
Weights 278
Welcome lamps 84
Wheel base, vehicle 277
Wheel change 264
Wheels, changing 250
Wheels, everything on wheels
and tires 244
Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 91
Width with mirrors, vehi‐
cle 276
Window defroster, rear 127
Windows, powered 44
Windshield, climate con‐
trol 145
Windshield washer fluid 72
Windshield washer noz‐
zles 72
Windshield washer system 70
Windshield wiper 70
Seite 296
296
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Everything from A to Z
Windshield wipers, fold-out
position 72
Winter storage, care 273
Winter
tires, suitable tires 251
Winter tires, tread 249
Wiper blades, replacing 260
Wiper fluid 72
Wiper system 70
Wood, care 273
Word match concept, naviga‐
tion 24
Wrench 260
X
xDrive 99
Xenon headlamps, bulb re‐
placement 261
Y
Your individual vehicle 6
Seite 297
297
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving tips Controls At a glance
More about BMW
bmwusa.com
The Ultimate Driving
Machine
01 40 2 606 497 Ue
*BL2606497006*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 606 497 - 03 11 490
